InvenTrack

Intelligent Prediction Engine

Utilizing advanced algorithms, the Intelligent Prediction Engine forecasts future inventory needs based on historical sales data, seasonal trends, and market conditions. This feature empowers users to anticipate demand accurately, minimizing the risk of stockouts and overstocking, thereby optimizing cash flow and storage space.

Requirements

Historical Data Analysis

"As a retail manager, I want the system to analyze historical sales data so that I can understand past trends and make informed decisions about future inventory needs."

Description

The system shall collect and analyze historical sales data to identify trends and fluctuations in inventory needs. This requirement ensures that the Intelligent Prediction Engine has access to accurate and relevant data for generating forecasts. By enhancing the predictive capabilities of the engine with robust data analysis, users can make more informed decisions, leading to improved inventory management and reduced instances of stockouts or overstocking. The feature is essential to align inventory levels with actual customer demand, maximizing both cash flow and storage efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Data Integration and Analysis for Forecasting

Given that the system has access to at least 12 months of historical sales data, when the data is processed by the Intelligent Prediction Engine, then it should accurately identify at least 3 significant trends that impact inventory needs for various products.

Seasonal Trends Mapping

Given that the historical sales data includes seasonal sales patterns, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine is activated, then it should be able to predict at least a 20% change in inventory needs for seasonal products at appropriate times.

Market Condition Adaptation

Given that current market conditions can affect sales, when new market data is introduced, then the Intelligent Prediction Engine should adjust forecasts by no less than 15% based on the identified trends.

Accuracy of Demand Forecasts

Given that historical data has been processed, when comparing the forecasted inventory needs for the next month with actual sales data, then the forecast should not deviate by more than 10% for at least 80% of the products analyzed.

User Decision Support Implementation

Given that the Intelligent Prediction Engine has generated its forecasts, when users are presented with inventory recommendations, then at least 75% of user actions based on these recommendations should result in improved inventory levels (as verified by stock analysis post-implementation).

Reporting and Feedback Loop

Given that historical sales data analysis has been completed, when generating a report, then the report should include clear visualizations of trends, forecasts, and recommendations that are easily understandable to a user with basic inventory knowledge.

Error Handling and Data Quality Assurance

Given that the system processes sales data from multiple sources, when invalid or incomplete data is detected, then the system should flag the data and provide detailed error messages and recommendations for corrections to ensure quality analysis for the prediction engine.

Seasonal Trend Integration

"As a small business owner, I want to account for seasonal trends in sales forecasts so that I can prepare my inventory ahead of peak seasons and avoid lost sales."

Description

The Intelligent Prediction Engine must be capable of integrating and analyzing seasonal trends to enhance forecasting accuracy. This requirement will enable the system to recognize patterns related to seasonal demand fluctuations, allowing users to adjust their inventory strategies proactively. By incorporating seasonal data, the prediction engine can optimize stock levels to match anticipated demand, which is particularly vital for businesses that experience significant seasonal variations in sales. This capability will elevate user confidence in inventory planning and improve overall profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Integrating seasonal data into the Intelligent Prediction Engine to enhance forecasting accuracy during peak holiday shopping seasons.

Given that seasonal sales data is available, when the prediction engine analyzes historical sales coupled with seasonal trends, then it should generate forecast reports that accurately reflect anticipated inventory needs for the holiday period, with at least 90% accuracy based on previous years' sales data.

User adjusts inventory settings based on seasonal trend forecasts generated by the Intelligent Prediction Engine.

Given that the user has access to seasonal trend forecasts, when the user receives notifications about upcoming seasons, then they should be able to adjust their inventory levels proactively, reducing stockouts and overstocking incidents by at least 20% during the seasonal peak.

Business owner reviews the forecasting accuracy post-season to evaluate the effectiveness of the seasonal trend integration.

Given that the season has concluded, when the business owner compares the forecasted stock levels against actual sales, then the forecasting accuracy should reflect a variance of no more than 10%, demonstrating effective integration of seasonal trends into inventory planning.

Generating a notification alert system for users about significant seasonal demand shifts identified by the prediction engine.

Given that the Intelligent Prediction Engine analyzes seasonal sales data, when a significant fluctuation in seasonal demand is detected, then it should generate and send out real-time alerts to users, allowing for immediate adjustments to inventory strategies.

Training sessions for users on how to leverage seasonal trends in inventory management using the Intelligent Prediction Engine.

Given that training sessions are conducted, when users participate in the training, then they should be able to demonstrate understanding by correctly interpreting seasonal demand forecasts and applying them to their inventory strategies with at least 80% success in practical exercises.

Integration of third-party seasonal trend data sources into the Intelligent Prediction Engine.

Given that external seasonal trend data sources are available, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine integrates these data feeds, then the resultant forecasts should improve accuracy by at least 15% compared to forecasts generated by historical sales data alone.

Market Condition Analysis

"As a product manager, I want the prediction engine to consider current market conditions so that I can adjust my inventory according to market demands and competitive pricing."

Description

The requirement will establish the functionality for the Intelligent Prediction Engine to analyze current market conditions, including competitor pricing, economic factors, and other external variables that influence customer behavior. This integrated approach will ensure that forecasts are not only based on historical data but also reflect real-time market dynamics. By understanding how external factors affect demand, users will be able to make more strategic inventory decisions, enhancing responsiveness to market changes and maximizing sales opportunities.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer experiences inaccuracies in inventory levels due to outdated market conditions analysis.

Given that the Intelligent Prediction Engine is analyzing market conditions, when the user inputs competitor pricing and economic data, then the forecasted inventory levels should be recalibrated to reflect these updates within a maximum of 10 minutes.

A retailer wants to adjust stock levels based on seasonal market trends.

Given that the retailer specializes in seasonal products, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine analyzes seasonal trends, then the system should generate an alert recommending adjustments to stock levels at least 30 days before the peak season.

A user needs to view the impact of market conditions on projected sales.

Given that a user requests a sales forecast, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine processes current market conditions, then a detailed report showing projected sales, influenced by these conditions, should be generated and available to the user.

A business wants to prevent overstocking during economic downturns.

Given that economic factors indicate a potential downturn, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine evaluates these indicators against current inventory levels, then it should suggest a reduction in stock orders to avoid overstocking by at least 20%.

A user requires real-time updates on market changes affecting inventory.

Given that there are fluctuations in competitor pricing, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine detects these changes, then the system should automatically provide real-time updates and recommendations to users within 5 minutes.

The inventory manager wants to analyze the effectiveness of the market condition analysis.

Given that the inventory manager has input market condition data, when the analysis is completed, then a summary report showcasing the accuracy of the forecasts should be generated and displayed, assessing variance between predicted and actual sales.

Business owners need a tailored inventory strategy based on external variables.

Given various external variables influencing demand, when users input those variables into the Intelligent Prediction Engine, then the system should generate a customized inventory strategy proposal including suggested order quantities and timing.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a store owner, I want to receive automatic alerts when stock levels are low so that I can quickly restock and avoid losing sales due to empty shelves."

Description

The system shall provide automated restocking alerts based on the forecasts generated by the Intelligent Prediction Engine. When the stock levels for a product are predicted to fall below a defined threshold, the system will notify the user automatically. This requirement will ensure that businesses can respond promptly to inventory needs without manual oversight, significantly reducing the risk of stockouts. By automating this process, users can focus on other critical business areas while ensuring inventory levels are maintained effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automated restocking alert when stock levels of a product fall below the defined threshold based on predictions from the Intelligent Prediction Engine.

Given that the stock level of a product is predicted to fall below the predefined threshold, when the prediction is generated by the Intelligent Prediction Engine, then an automated restocking alert is sent to the user via their preferred notification method.

User can customize the threshold level for restocking alerts for individual products within the InvenTrack platform.

Given that a user is in the product settings page, when they adjust the restocking threshold for a particular product and save the changes, then the new threshold should be accurately reflected in the system.

User can view a summary of all products that are below the restocking threshold along with their predicted stock levels.

Given that the user accesses the inventory dashboard, when the page loads, then a list of products that are below the restocking threshold is displayed with current stock levels and predicted stock levels based on the Intelligent Prediction Engine.

User is notified of restocking needs in a timely manner to avoid stockouts.

Given that automated alerts are configured, when stock levels are forecasted to fall below the threshold, then the user is notified at least 48 hours prior to the predicted stockout event.

System administrators can define global default thresholds for restocking alerts across the application.

Given that an administrator is on the system settings page, when they set a global default restocking threshold and save the changes, then this default should apply to all products without individual customization unless otherwise specified by a user.

User can opt-in or opt-out of receiving automated restocking alerts through their account settings.

Given that a user is in their account settings, when they toggle the option for receiving automated restocking alerts, then their preferences should be saved correctly and reflected in their notification settings immediately.

User can provide feedback on the accuracy of restocking alerts after receiving them.

Given that a user has received an automated restocking alert, when they access the feedback section for that alert, then they should be able to submit a rating or comments on the alert's relevance and accuracy, which will be logged for future analysis.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Predictions

"As an inventory manager, I want a dashboard that clearly presents future inventory predictions so that I can quickly understand potential stock needs and adjust accordingly."

Description

The requirement entails developing a user-friendly dashboard within the InvenTrack application that presents the forecasts generated by the Intelligent Prediction Engine in a clear and visual manner. The dashboard will provide key insights, visualizations, and summaries that allow users to easily interpret predictions and make data-driven inventory decisions. This feature will enhance user engagement with the forecasting capabilities, improving overall satisfaction and facilitating better inventory management through intuitive design.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the User-Friendly Dashboard to View Inventory Predictions

Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a clear, visually appealing presentation of inventory predictions with data updated in real-time.

Customizing Dashboard Views for Different User Roles

Given a user with admin privileges accesses the dashboard, when they select different customization options, then the dashboard should successfully update to reflect the selected metrics and layout preferences without errors.

Interpreting Forecast Data through Visualizations

Given a user is viewing the dashboard, when they hover over a visualization (e.g., graph or chart), then detailed tooltip information should appear, providing clear explanations of the forecast data represented in the visualization.

Receiving Notifications for Significant Inventory Predictions

Given a user has set notification preferences, when the Intelligent Prediction Engine identifies a significant change in inventory needs, then the user should receive a notification alerting them to the change in forecast.

Exporting Prediction Data for Reporting

Given a user is viewing the dashboard, when they select the export option, then the system should generate and download a report with all visible predictions in a user-friendly format (e.g., CSV or PDF).

Comparing Historical Data with Current Predictions

Given a user is on the dashboard, when they toggle the view options to compare historical sales data against current inventory predictions, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison visual with accurate data reflections.

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

This feature sends proactive notifications to users when stock levels reach predefined thresholds, allowing them to react swiftly to changing inventory needs. Dynamic Reorder Alerts ensure that users are always informed, reducing decision fatigue and enhancing overall efficiency in inventory management.

Requirements

Dynamic Threshold Setting

"As a retail manager, I want to customize reorder thresholds for my products so that I can ensure I reorder items at just the right time to avoid stockouts and overstocking."

Description

This requirement enables users to define and customize reorder thresholds for their inventory items based on individual business needs. Users can set specific stock levels that trigger reorder alerts, allowing for tailored inventory management that reflects their operating conditions. This feature integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory tracking functionality of InvenTrack, ensuring that users have maximum control over their stock management. Ultimately, this leads to optimized inventory levels and improved cash flow management as businesses can prevent stockouts and excess inventory.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes reorder thresholds for a specific inventory item based on historical sales data before the holiday season to ensure adequate stock levels without overstocking.

Given the user is on the inventory management screen, when they select an item and enter a stock level in the reorder threshold field, then the system should save this threshold and activate a dynamic reorder alert once the stock reaches this level.

User receives a notification when their inventory item reaches its predefined reorder threshold, allowing them to order more stock in a timely manner.

Given the inventory item has reached its reorder threshold, when the threshold is triggered, then the user should receive a notification via email and in-app alert informing them that the item needs restocking.

User wants to adjust the reorder threshold for multiple items at once due to a seasonal demand increase, improving their stock management efficiency.

Given the user is in the bulk edit mode of the inventory management system, when they adjust the reorder threshold for multiple items, then all selected items should update their thresholds correctly as per user input without errors.

User sets custom reorder thresholds for different product categories (e.g., perishable vs non-perishable items) to better manage inventory based on product traits.

Given the user has defined product categories, when they set different reorder thresholds for each category, then the system should reflect these thresholds accurately and send alerts based on category-specific needs.

User checks historical data after setting reorder thresholds to assess if the chosen levels are optimal and effective based on past sales and stockout occurrences.

Given the history of stock levels and sales data is accessible, when the user views the reorder threshold effectiveness report, then it should clearly show the stockout instances and sales versus the set thresholds for validation.

Multi-Channel Notification System

"As a small business owner, I want to receive inventory alerts by email and SMS to ensure I never miss an important reorder notification, even when I’m away from my desk."

Description

This requirement encompasses the creation of a multi-channel notification system that alerts users of dynamic reorder notifications via various platforms, such as email, mobile app notifications, and SMS. This feature will enhance user engagement by allowing them to choose their preferred method of communication. The implementation of this requirement will lead to timelier responses to inventory needs and a more connected user experience, ensuring no critical stock information is missed regardless of the user's location. Integration with existing communication tools is crucial for effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects preferred notification methods for dynamic reorder alerts during the setup process of InvenTrack.

Given the user is on the notification setup page, when they select their preferred notification methods (email, SMS, mobile app), then these preferences should be saved successfully in their user profile and reflected in the notification settings.

System sends a dynamic reorder alert to the user when stock falls below defined thresholds.

Given the stock level for an item falls below the predefined threshold, when the system generates a reorder alert, then the user must receive this notification via all selected communication channels (email, SMS, mobile app) within 5 minutes of the threshold breach.

User receives a dynamic reorder alert via SMS and confirms restock action within the mobile app.

Given the user receives a dynamic reorder alert via SMS, when they click the link to confirm restock action in the mobile app, then their action should update the inventory status and mark the alert as acknowledged in the system.

System integrates with an external communication tool to deliver dynamic reorder alerts.

Given the external communication tool is configured, when a dynamic reorder alert is triggered, then the alert must also be sent through the external tool, ensuring consistency in notifications across all platforms.

User checks the history of dynamic reorder alerts in their InvenTrack dashboard.

Given the user is logged into their InvenTrack account, when they access the notification history section, then they should see a complete log of all dynamic reorder alerts sent, including timestamps and channels used for delivery.

User modifies notification preferences after initial setup.

Given the user accesses the notification settings post-setup, when they change their preferred notification methods, then the updated preferences should be saved, and immediate confirmation should be provided on the successful update.

Historical Data Analysis for Threshold Optimization

"As an inventory manager, I want to analyze past sales data to adjust my reorder thresholds, so that I can better anticipate inventory needs based on real sales patterns."

Description

This requirement allows users to analyze historical sales data to optimize reorder thresholds dynamically. By leveraging past sales trends, users can set more accurate thresholds for reorder alerts, leading to better inventory management decisions. The integration of historical data analysis will facilitate informed decision-making, help anticipate future inventory needs, and minimize the risk of stockouts or overstocking. This feature aims to create an intelligent inventory system that learns from prior sales performance, ultimately improving overall operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User Accesses Historical Data for Analysis

Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the 'Historical Data Analysis' section, then they should see a comprehensive list of their previous sales data segmented by date and product categories.

User Sets Reorder Thresholds Using Historical Data

Given the user has accessed their historical sales data, when they select a product and adjust its reorder threshold based on the analysis, then the new threshold should be saved and reflected in the inventory management dashboard.

User Receives Dynamic Reorder Alerts

Given the user has set up reorder thresholds and there is a stock level drop below the threshold, then the user should receive an immediate notification alerting them to restock the product via email and in-app message.

User Reviews Alert History

Given the user wants to track alert notifications, when they access the 'Alerts History' section, then they should see a chronological list of all reorder alerts received, including details on the product and timestamp of alert.

User Optimizes Threshold with Predictive Analysis

Given the user has sufficient historical data, when they request a predictive analysis for reorder thresholds, then the system should provide recommended threshold levels based on analyzed trends and seasonality patterns.

User Validates Recommended Threshold Adjustments

Given the user views the recommended threshold adjustments, when they review these suggestions, then they should have the option to accept or modify the suggestions before finalizing them in the system.

User Accesses Help Section on Threshold Optimization

Given the user requires assistance, when they navigate to the help section on historical data analysis and threshold optimization, then they should find a clear guide and FAQs addressing common questions and best practices.

Integrate Supplier Reorder Linkages

"As a retail owner, I want to have direct links in my reorder alerts to send orders to my suppliers, so that I can replenish stock quickly and efficiently without additional steps."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating direct links to suppliers in the reorder alerts, allowing users to quickly place orders for replenishment directly from the notification. By simplifying the reorder process, users can save valuable time and increase the efficiency of their procurement process. This feature will ensure that, upon receiving a reorder alert, users can act instantly by connecting them with their suppliers' ordering systems. This will streamline the inventory replenishment process, ensuring optimal stock levels are maintained effortlessly.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a dynamic reorder alert when stock levels for a specific product fall below a predefined threshold set in their inventory management system.

Given the stock level of a product is below the predefined threshold, when the dynamic reorder alert is triggered, then a 'Reorder Now' link to the relevant supplier's ordering system should be displayed in the notification.

A user clicks on the 'Reorder Now' link in the reorder alert notification to place an order with the selected supplier.

Given the user has clicked the 'Reorder Now' link, when the user is redirected to the supplier's ordering system, then the product, quantity, and relevant details should be pre-filled and ready for confirmation.

User receives a reorder alert and initiates the reorder process from a mobile device while on the go.

Given that the user is using the mobile application, when a reorder alert is triggered, then the notification should be clearly formatted for mobile, with the 'Reorder Now' link easily accessible and functional.

User has successfully placed an order through the supplier's system after clicking the reorder link in the alert.

Given the order has been placed successfully, when the user checks their order history in the inventory management system, then the order details (product, quantity, supplier, date) should be visible and marked as 'Ordered'.

Multiple reorder alerts are generated for different products simultaneously.

Given that multiple products are below the reorder threshold, when the dynamic reorder alerts are triggered, then each alert should include its respective 'Reorder Now' link and not merge the links together, ensuring clarity and ease of action for the user.

A user edits the predefined threshold for a product and there's a change in reorder alert notifications.

Given that the user has successfully updated the predefined reorder threshold for a product, when the stock level falls below the new threshold, then the dynamic reorder alert should be triggered based on the updated threshold.

User receives feedback from the supplier’s system after a successful reorder submission.

Given the user has submitted an order via the supplier's system, when the supplier sends a confirmation back to the user, then the inventory management system should automatically update the status of the product to 'Pending' for delivery.

User Feedback Loop for Alert Effectiveness

"As an inventory manager, I want to give feedback on my reorder alerts so that the system can adjust and improve the notifications I receive to better suit my needs."

Description

This requirement implements a feedback mechanism that allows users to provide input on the effectiveness of reorder alerts. Users can indicate whether the alerts were timely, helpful, or if any adjustments are needed based on changing business conditions. This valuable feedback can be used to enhance the alert system, making it more responsive and aligned with user needs over time. The integration will create a user-driven improvement process that continually refines the alert system, leading to higher user satisfaction and better overall performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a dynamic reorder alert when stock levels drop below the predefined threshold.

Given the user has predefined a stock threshold, when the stock level drops below that threshold, then a reorder alert notification should be sent to the user via the preferred communication method (e.g., email, SMS, app notification).

User can provide feedback on the effectiveness of the received reorder alert.

Given the user receives a reorder alert, when they interact with the alert notification, then they should have the option to provide feedback indicating whether the alert was timely, helpful, or if adjustments are needed.

User feedback is aggregated and made available for review.

Given that multiple users have provided feedback on reorder alerts, when the system aggregates the feedback, then users should be able to view a summary report of the feedback indicating common themes and areas for improvement.

User receives confirmation that their feedback has been recorded.

Given the user submits feedback on the reorder alert, when the feedback is successfully recorded, then the user should receive a confirmation message indicating that their input has been acknowledged.

System adjusts reorder alerts based on aggregated user feedback.

Given aggregated user feedback indicates changes are necessary, when the feedback results in an update of the alert thresholds or notification characteristics, then the system should implement these changes for future alerts.

User can view their historical feedback on reorder alerts.

Given users have provided feedback over time, when they access their feedback history, then they should be able to see all past feedback submissions and any response or changes made based on that feedback.

Feedback incorporates user data for personalized alert recommendations.

Given that the user profile includes their inventory management behavior, when feedback is provided, then the system should analyze this data to offer personalized recommendations for alert settings going forward.

Automated Purchase Order Generation

Automated Purchase Order Generation simplifies the procurement process by suggesting optimal reorder quantities and automatically drafting purchase orders for selected suppliers. This feature saves time by reducing manual input, ensuring timely restocking without the need for constant oversight.

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Suggestions

"As an inventory manager, I want to receive dynamic reorder suggestions so that I can efficiently maintain optimal stock levels without incurring excess costs from overstocking."

Description

The Dynamic Reorder Suggestions requirement enhances the automated purchase order generation feature by analyzing historical sales data and current inventory levels to provide real-time recommendations on optimal reorder quantities. This functionality ensures businesses maintain adequate stock levels without excessive overstocking. By factoring in seasonal trends, lead time from suppliers, and past sales velocity, the system can send actionable insights to users, facilitating better inventory decision-making. This capability integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory management workflow and increases operational efficiency, ultimately contributing to improved customer satisfaction through timely product availability.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to receive dynamic reorder suggestions based on current inventory levels and historical sales data.

Given the user has access to the inventory dashboard, when the inventory level of any product falls below the predefined minimum threshold, then the system should automatically generate a reorder suggestion based on historical sales data and recommended reorder quantity.

A user reviews the suggested reorder quantities before finalizing the purchase order.

Given the user has received dynamic reorder suggestions, when they view the suggested quantities for any product, then they should see the recommended reorder quantity along with supporting data including historical sales trends and current stock levels.

The user wants to ensure that reorder suggestions factor in seasonal demand fluctuations.

Given the user has configured seasonal trends in their inventory settings, when the system analyzes sales data, then the dynamic reorder suggestions should adjust quantities based on identified seasonal trends to avoid stockouts during peak seasons.

Inventory levels are updated after purchase orders are placed based on reorder suggestions.

Given a purchase order is created from dynamic reorder suggestions, when the order is confirmed and processed, then the system should automatically update the inventory levels to reflect the new stock once it is received.

The user needs to evaluate the effectiveness of dynamic reorder suggestions over a specified timeframe.

Given the user is viewing inventory reports, when they select a report period, then the system should provide statistics on stockouts and excess inventory as a result of the dynamic reorder suggestions over that period.

Integration with e-commerce platforms requires accurate sync of inventory levels after reorder suggestions are implemented.

Given the user has integrated InvenTrack with their e-commerce platform, when a purchase order is generated from a reorder suggestion, then the system should reflect the updated inventory levels in real-time on the e-commerce platform to prevent overselling.

Supplier Integration Module

"As a procurement officer, I want to integrate my suppliers' systems with InvenTrack so that I can automate the purchase order process and reduce manual errors."

Description

The Supplier Integration Module requirement facilitates direct integration with suppliers' systems, allowing automated purchase orders to be sent and tracked without manual intervention. This feature will enable InvenTrack users to select preferred suppliers from a validated list and automatically populate purchase order forms with updated pricing and product information. Integration will ensure that order confirmations and updates are received in real-time, enhancing communication efficiency and reducing the risk of errors due to miscommunication. This capability maximizes the benefit of the automated purchase order generation feature by providing a streamlined procurement experience while improving supplier relationship management.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of supplier details and automated purchase order generation process.

Given that a user selects a preferred supplier from the validated list, when the order quantity reaches the predefined threshold, then the system should automatically generate a purchase order populated with the correct supplier details and product information.

Real-time communication of order confirmations and updates with suppliers.

Given that a purchase order is sent to the selected supplier, when the supplier confirms the order, then the system should receive the order confirmation in real-time and update the order status in InvenTrack automatically.

Error handling during the integration process with suppliers' systems.

Given that there is a communication failure with a supplier's system during the purchase order generation, when the system attempts to send the purchase order, then an error message should be displayed to the user, and the order should not be lost or duplicated.

Accessing the updated pricing and product information from the supplier system.

Given that a user initiates a purchase order, when the system retrieves the latest pricing and product information from the supplier's system, then this information should be reflected accurately in the generated purchase order without any discrepancies.

User interface for managing supplier integrations effectively.

Given that a user navigates to the Supplier Integration Module, when they view the managed suppliers, then they should see a list of all suppliers with their integration statuses and be able to select or update supplier details easily.

User-driven adjustments of reorder quantities based on supplier recommendations.

Given that the system suggests reorder quantities based on demand forecasting, when a user chooses to override the suggested quantities, then the system should allow manual adjustments while preserving the audit trail of changes made for accountability.

Training and onboarding users to effectively use the Supplier Integration Module.

Given that a new user accesses the Supplier Integration Module, when they initiate the onboarding tutorial, then they should receive structured guidance on how to navigate and use the integration features effectively, with completion tracking included.

Order Approval Workflow

"As a finance manager, I want to establish an order approval workflow for purchase orders so that I can control spending and comply with company procurement policies."

Description

The Order Approval Workflow requirement introduces a multi-level approval process for purchase orders generated automatically by the system. This feature allows organizations to set predefined approval hierarchies based on order value, supplier relationships, or inventory levels, ensuring that higher-value or strategic orders receive additional scrutiny. By incorporating customizable alerts and notifications for approvers, the workflow maintains accountability and control over procurement. This capability not only enhances governance but also helps in maintaining compliance with internal policies, ensuring that larger expenditures are adequately authorized before being processed.

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-level approval process for purchase orders based on order value

Given a purchase order generated with a value exceeding $1,000, when the order is submitted for approval, then it should trigger a multi-level approval workflow that requires at least two approvers before final approval can be granted.

Customizable alert notifications for approvers

Given an approver assigned to a purchase order, when a purchase order is submitted for their approval, then they should receive an email notification detailing order specifics and a link to approve or reject the order.

Predefined approval hierarchies based on supplier relationships

Given a purchase order generated for a preferred supplier, when the order is submitted for approval, then it should follow the approval hierarchy set for that supplier, which may include different approvers based on supplier preference level.

Accountability and control over procurement process

Given that a purchase order is approved, when the approval is processed, then the system should log the approval with the timestamp and the approver's details for audit purposes.

Rejection handling within the approval workflow

Given a purchase order requiring approval, when an approver rejects the order, then an automated notification should be sent to the original requester along with a reason for rejection, and the order must be marked as rejected in the system.

Dynamic adjustment of approval thresholds based on inventory levels

Given a purchase order initiated for restocking, when the current inventory level is below the minimum threshold, then the approval threshold for that purchase order should automatically be lowered to facilitate quicker approvals.

Integration with existing procurement policies

Given a purchase order that is submitted for approval, when it does not comply with the organization’s procurement policies, then the order should be flagged and the workflow should not proceed without rectifying the compliance issue.

Purchase Order History Reporting

"As a business owner, I want to access historical purchase order reports so that I can make data-driven decisions about future supplier contracts."

Description

The Purchase Order History Reporting requirement enables users to generate detailed reports on past purchase orders, including quantities ordered, costs, supplier performance, and fulfillment rates. This reporting functionality allows businesses to analyze their purchasing patterns, identify trends, and evaluate supplier reliability, thus empowering users to make informed decisions about future orders and supplier selections. The reports should be customizable and exportable to various formats, providing flexibility in how users analyze and utilize the data. This feature will enhance strategic sourcing efforts by leveraging historical data insights to optimize purchasing practices.

Acceptance Criteria

Purchase Order Generation Report for Monthly Review

Given a user is on the Purchase Order History Reporting page, when they select the date range for the past month and click 'Generate Report', then the system should display a report that includes all purchase orders placed during that month, with correct quantities and total costs for each supplier.

Supplier Performance Analysis

Given a user is analyzing supplier performance, when they request a report for supplier efficiency, then the system should provide a detailed report showing fulfillment rates and on-time delivery records for each supplier over the selected period.

Exporting Purchase Order Report

Given a user has generated a purchase order history report, when they click on the 'Export' button, then the system should allow them to download the report in at least three different formats (PDF, CSV, Excel).

Customizable Report Fields

Given a user is generating a purchase order report, when they select the fields they want to include (like quantity ordered, cost, and supplier performance) before generating the report, then the system should accurately reflect their choices in the final report output.

Real-time Visualization of Historical Data

Given a user is on the Purchase Order History Reporting page, when they apply various filters (such as date range, supplier, and order status), then the system should dynamically update the displayed data and visuals to reflect the chosen filters in real time.

Automated Inventory Alerts

"As an inventory manager, I want to receive automated alerts for low inventory levels so that I can act quickly to replenish stock and avoid stockouts."

Description

The Automated Inventory Alerts requirement establishes a system for notifying users of critical inventory levels and backorders directly related to the automated purchase order generation feature. This alerts system will trigger notifications based on user-defined thresholds, indicating when to reorder stock or when ordered items are delayed. By providing timely information, this feature helps users to proactively address inventory issues before they affect operations, maintaining seamless workflow and customer satisfaction. Integration with mobile notifications will enhance accessibility, allowing users to respond to alerts while on the go.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory user sets a minimum stock threshold for a product and receives a notification when inventory falls below that threshold.

Given the user has set a minimum stock level for a product, when the inventory level falls below this threshold, then the user should receive an automatic notification via the application and mobile notification system.

User orders items from a supplier through the automated purchase order generation feature and wants to be notified of any delays in the order.

Given the user has created a purchase order through the automated system, when the supplier updates the order status to delayed, then the user should receive a notification detailing the delay and expected resolution time.

User wishes to reorder an item and uses the system to generate an automated purchase order, ensuring it accurately reflects the required quantities.

Given the user has selected a product to reorder, when the automated purchase order is generated, then it should suggest optimal reorder quantities based on current inventory levels and sales data, and create a draft purchase order ready for confirmation.

Inventory management staff need to monitor critical inventory levels while away from their desk.

Given critical inventory thresholds have been configured, when stock levels reach a critical point, then the user receives an immediate notification on their mobile device, allowing them to act promptly.

User wants to see a history of notifications related to inventory alerts for record-keeping and accountability purposes.

Given the user has access to their account logs, when they access the inventory alerts history, then they should be able to view all past notifications with timestamps and related inventory details.

A user needs to adjust their inventory thresholds based on seasonal sales trends and expects alerts to reflect these changes.

Given the user has adjusted their inventory thresholds, when the new thresholds take effect, then the alert system should accurately reflect the updated thresholds in subsequent notifications.

User collaborates with team members and needs to share specific inventory alert notifications for better team coordination.

Given the user has received an inventory alert, when they use the share function, then the system should allow the user to send the notification details to specified team members through email or in-app messaging.

Smart Analytics Dashboard

The Smart Analytics Dashboard presents comprehensive insights into reorder suggestions, inventory turnover rates, and supplier performance. By visualizing key metrics, users can make informed decisions quickly and identify areas for improvement in their inventory management strategies.

Requirements

Reorder Suggestions Algorithm

"As an inventory manager, I want to receive automated reorder suggestions so that I can restock items just in time to meet customer demand without overstocking."

Description

The Reorder Suggestions Algorithm analyzes inventory levels and sales data to provide automated recommendations on when to reorder products. This feature will utilize historical data, current stock levels, and predictive analytics to suggest optimal reorder quantities, thereby minimizing the risk of stockouts and overstocking. Integrated within the Smart Analytics Dashboard, it will enhance user decision-making by offering actionable insights tailored to their specific inventory needs, ultimately improving inventory efficiency and turnover rates.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to receive reorder suggestions on the Smart Analytics Dashboard when an item's inventory level drops below a predefined threshold so that I can maintain optimal stock levels and avoid stockouts.

Given the inventory levels for a product are monitored, When the inventory level drops below the threshold set for that product, Then a reorder suggestion is displayed on the Smart Analytics Dashboard with the recommended quantity.

As a user of InvenTrack, I want the reorder suggestions to be generated automatically based on historical sales data so that I can make informed decisions about my inventory.

Given the historical sales data for products is available, When the algorithm analyzes the sales data, Then it generates reorder suggestions that consider trends in the sales history.

As a small business owner, I want the Smart Analytics Dashboard to provide a visual representation of the recommended reorder quantities so that I can easily understand the implications on my inventory management.

Given the reorder suggestions have been calculated, When the user views the Smart Analytics Dashboard, Then the suggested reorder quantities are displayed in a clear and visually appealing format such as charts or graphs.

As an inventory manager, I want to be notified if the predicted reorder quantity exceeds our storage capacity to prevent overstocking before placing orders.

Given the reorder suggestion algorithm has calculated the reorder quantities, When the suggested quantity exceeds the maximum storage capacity for that product, Then an alert is shown on the Smart Analytics Dashboard indicating the risk of overstocking.

As a user, I want to be able to customize the reorder threshold for each product so that I can tailor inventory management to fit my specific business needs.

Given I am on the product settings page, When I set or adjust the reorder threshold for a product, Then the system saves the new threshold and utilizes it for future reorder suggestions effectively.

As a product manager, I want the algorithm to consider seasonal demand shifts when generating reorder suggestions to improve accuracy during peak seasons.

Given that seasonal demand data is available, When the algorithm runs its analysis, Then it incorporates seasonal trends into the reorder suggestions to optimize inventory levels during peak times.

Inventory Turnover Visualization

"As a retailer, I want to visualize my inventory turnover rates so that I can identify fast and slow-selling products and make informed stocking decisions accordingly."

Description

The Inventory Turnover Visualization feature provides users with interactive graphs and charts that depict inventory turnover rates over specified time periods. This functionality will allow users to track how quickly their inventory is sold and replaced, helping them identify fast and slow-moving items. By leveraging visual metrics within the Smart Analytics Dashboard, users can quickly assess performance and make informed inventory decisions that align with their sales trends, leading to improved inventory efficiency and sales maximization.

Acceptance Criteria

Inventory Turnover Rate Visualization for Seasonal Trends

Given I am a user viewing the Smart Analytics Dashboard, when I select the option to view the inventory turnover chart for the past 30 days, then I should see an interactive graph displaying turnover rates for each product as well as an aggregated view by category, allowing me to identify seasonal trends.

Comparative Analysis of Inventory Turnover Rates

Given that I have multiple product categories, when I choose to compare inventory turnover rates between two or more categories on the Smart Analytics Dashboard, then I should see a side-by-side comparison that highlights significant differences in turnover efficiently through visual metrics such as charts or graphs.

Customization of Time Period for Inventory Analysis

Given I am using the Inventory Turnover Visualization feature, when I specify a custom time period (e.g., last quarter, last year) for analysis, then the dashboard should refresh to show me the inventory turnover rates for that selected period accurately.

Drill-Down Capability for Detailed Insights

Given the turnover rate visualizations displayed on the dashboard, when I click on any specific product in the graph, then I should be taken to a detailed view that provides historical turnover data and related sales metrics for that product.

Performance Insights on Slow-Moving Items

Given I am viewing the inventory turnover visualization, when the turnover rates for a product category fall below a predefined threshold, then I should receive a visual alert on the dashboard indicating items classified as slow-moving, along with suggestions for improvement.

User Feedback Submission for Dashboard Usability

Given I have accessed the Inventory Turnover Visualization feature, when I navigate through its functionalities, then I should be presented with an option to submit feedback regarding the usability and effectiveness of the dashboard for continuous improvement.

Integration with Real-Time Sales Data

Given I am using the Smart Analytics Dashboard, when I update inventory based on recent sales data, then the inventory turnover visualizations should reflect real-time changes, ensuring that the data presented is current and accurate.

Supplier Performance Metrics

"As a procurement manager, I want to analyze supplier performance metrics so that I can optimize my supplier relationships and improve our inventory replenishment processes."

Description

The Supplier Performance Metrics feature tracks and evaluates supplier reliability, delivery times, and product quality through comprehensive analytics. This integration into the Smart Analytics Dashboard will equip users with the ability to assess supplier performance, helping them decide which suppliers to prioritize or reconsider based on their effectiveness. The insights gained will not only strengthen supplier relationships but also contribute to more efficient and reliable inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Use case for viewing supplier performance metrics on the Smart Analytics Dashboard.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Smart Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a section for Supplier Performance Metrics that includes reliability, delivery times, and product quality.

Use case for generating a report on supplier performance over a specified period.

Given a user is on the Supplier Performance Metrics section of the Smart Analytics Dashboard, when they select a date range and click 'Generate Report', then a detailed report of supplier performance for the selected period should be displayed.

Use case for receiving alerts on supplier performance issues.

Given a user has set performance thresholds for suppliers, when a supplier's reliability or delivery metrics fall below the threshold, then the user should receive an automated alert notification via email and on the dashboard.

Use case for prioritizing suppliers based on performance metrics.

Given a user is reviewing the Supplier Performance Metrics, when they filter the suppliers by performance ratings, then the dashboard should display suppliers ranked from highest to lowest performance based on reliability, delivery times, and product quality.

Use case for comparing multiple suppliers side-by-side.

Given a user has selected multiple suppliers to compare, when they activate the compare feature, then the Smart Analytics Dashboard should display a side-by-side comparison of the selected suppliers' performance metrics.

Use case for integrating supplier performance metrics with inventory restocking alerts.

Given a user has enabled supplier performance tracking, when an inventory item is low and its supplier's performance is below threshold, then the user should receive a recommendation to consider alternative suppliers for restocking.

Use case for visualizing supplier performance trends over time.

Given a user is viewing the Supplier Performance Metrics, when they select a performance metric (e.g., delivery times) and specify a time period, then a visual graph representing the trend of that metric over time should be displayed on the dashboard.

Customizable Dashboard Widgets

"As a business owner, I want to customize my analytics dashboard so that I can focus on the metrics that are most important to my inventory management strategy."

Description

The Customizable Dashboard Widgets feature allows users to personalize their Smart Analytics Dashboard by choosing and arranging metrics that are most relevant to their inventory management needs. This flexibility offers users the ability to tailor their analytical views, enhancing their ability to quickly access key performance indicators that matter most to their business. As a result, the customization aspect will increase user engagement and efficiency in monitoring inventory metrics.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes the Smart Analytics Dashboard to display metrics that are most relevant to their inventory management needs.

Given that the user is on the Smart Analytics Dashboard, when they select metrics from the widget options and arrange them, then the dashboard must reflect these changes immediately and retain the custom layout upon the next login.

User wants to remove a widget from their Smart Analytics Dashboard.

Given that the user has added multiple widgets to the dashboard, when they click the remove button on a widget, then the widget should be removed from the dashboard and not appear in the next session.

User needs to save their customized dashboard layout for future access.

Given that the user has made changes to the dashboard layout, when they click the save button, then a confirmation message must appear indicating the layout has been saved, and the layout should reload correctly in subsequent sessions.

User requests help or guidance on customizing the widgets on their dashboard.

Given that the user clicks on the help icon, when they view the help section, then they should see clear instructions and examples on how to customize the dashboard widgets effectively.

User checks if the dashboard metrics are accurate and reflect real-time data.

Given that the user is viewing the dashboard, when they refresh the page or click the refresh button, then the metrics displayed must update to reflect the most current inventory data.

User wants to arrange the dashboard widgets in a specific order for better visibility.

Given that the user can drag and drop widgets, when they rearrange the widgets as desired, then the new arrangement must be saved automatically and reflected accurately upon refreshing the dashboard.

Mobile Analytics Access

"As a business owner, I want to access my inventory analytics on my mobile device so that I can make informed decisions even when I am away from my desk."

Description

Mobile Analytics Access grants users the ability to view key analytics and reports on their mobile devices through a responsive design or mobile application. This feature ensures that business owners and inventory managers can monitor their inventory metrics and receive alerts on the go, providing flexibility in managing their stock levels and decision-making processes. The convenience of mobile access supports timely responses to inventory needs, irrespective of location.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile User Accesses Analytics Dashboard While Traveling

Given the user has a stable internet connection and is logged into the InvenTrack mobile application, when they navigate to the Smart Analytics Dashboard, then they should see real-time inventory metrics and key performance indicators displayed correctly on their mobile device.

User Receives Restocking Alerts on Mobile Device

Given the user has enabled notification settings in the mobile application, when a product's stock level falls below the defined threshold, then the user should receive an immediate and clear alert notification on their mobile device.

User Views Supplier Performance Metrics on Mobile

Given the user is accessing the mobile application, when they select the supplier performance report, then they should be able to view graphical representations of supplier metrics, including delivery times and order accuracy, without any distortion or loading issues.

User Filters Inventory Data by Date Range on Mobile

Given the user is on the Smart Analytics Dashboard, when they apply a date range filter to the inventory turnover report, then the data displayed should accurately reflect only the metrics within the specified date range.

User Switches Between Mobile and Desktop Views Seamlessly

Given the user has accessed the Smart Analytics Dashboard on mobile and desktop devices, when they switch from the mobile app to the desktop version, then all analytics data should remain consistent and updated without data loss or discrepancies.

User Utilizes Help Feature for Mobile Analytics Access

Given the user is on the Smart Analytics Dashboard within the mobile app, when they access the help feature, then they should be able to view guidance on how to use the dashboard effectively and troubleshooting tips for common issues.

Supplier Performance Insights

This feature evaluates supplier reliability and performance metrics, enabling users to make data-driven decisions about their procurement relationships. Supplier Performance Insights help users to choose the best suppliers for their needs, improving quality and reducing lead times.

Requirements

Supplier Scorecard Visualization

"As a purchasing manager, I want to view performance metrics for my suppliers in a visual format so that I can quickly identify which suppliers are reliable and which need improvement, enabling me to make more informed procurement decisions."

Description

This requirement involves creating a visual dashboard that displays key performance indicators (KPIs) for each supplier, allowing users to easily assess supplier performance over time. The dashboard will present data such as on-time delivery rates, quality metrics, and lead times in an accessible format. By integrating this scorecard into the InvenTrack platform, users can quickly identify which suppliers meet their standards and which ones require improvement. This visualization assists in making data-driven decisions that enhance procurement strategies and foster better supplier relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Scorecard Visualization during Procurement Review Meetings

Given a user accesses the Supplier Performance Insights dashboard, when they select a specific supplier, then the dashboard should display the supplier's scorecard with KPIs like on-time delivery rate, quality metrics, and lead times for the past six months.

Assessing Supplier Performance Trends Over Time

Given a user views the Supplier Scorecard, when they apply date filters for the last quarter, then the dashboard should update to display the relevant KPIs for that period accurately and reflect any trends.

Identifying Underperforming Suppliers

Given a user reviews the Supplier Performance Insights dashboard, when the user focuses on KPIs below the set thresholds, then the system should highlight these suppliers in red for easy identification.

Integrating Supplier Scorecard Data in Reporting

Given a user generates a performance report, when they include supplier performance metrics, then the generated report should accurately reflect the data as displayed on the Supplier Scorecard dashboard in a tabular format.

User Inputs for KPI Thresholds

Given a user accesses the Supplier Performance Insights settings, when they enter new threshold values for the KPIs, then the system should save these changes and reflect them in the scorecard visualization immediately.

Mobile Accessibility of Supplier Scorecard

Given a user accesses the Supplier Performance Insights on a mobile device, when they navigate to the Supplier Scorecard section, then the dashboard should render correctly with all KPIs visible without loss of data or functionality.

Real-Time Data Updates

Given a user is viewing the Supplier Scorecard, when new supplier performance data is available, then the dashboard should refresh automatically to show the updated KPIs without requiring the user to refresh the page manually.

Supplier Comparison Tool

"As a procurement officer, I want to compare multiple suppliers based on various performance metrics so that I can select the best option that meets my business's needs."

Description

The implementation of a supplier comparison tool will allow users to select multiple suppliers and compare their performance metrics side by side. This feature will include filters to refine comparisons based on specific metrics such as pricing, delivery times, and product quality. By providing a comprehensive comparison, users can easily identify the best supplier for their specific needs and negotiate better terms. This capability will strengthen user decision-making, leading to improved procurement outcomes and overall business efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects multiple suppliers to compare their pricing, delivery times, and product quality metrics through the Supplier Comparison Tool.

Given that the user has selected multiple suppliers for comparison, when they apply filters for pricing, delivery times, and quality metrics, then the tool should display a side-by-side comparison of the selected suppliers reflecting the applied filters accurately.

User accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool and chooses suppliers based on their performance metrics over a specific time frame.

Given that the user accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they select a time frame for the performance metrics, then the comparison results should reflect the selected time frame and show performance data for each supplier accurately.

User evaluates the comparison of suppliers and decides to save the comparison view for future reference.

Given that the user has compared multiple suppliers, when they save the comparison view, then it should be stored in their account and retrievable at a later time without any loss of data.

User wants to visualize the supplier performance data to quickly identify trends.

Given that the user is utilizing the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they request a graphical representation of the comparison metrics, then the tool should generate and display a visual chart that highlights the key performance metrics of the selected suppliers.

User encounters discrepancies in supplier performance data while using the comparison tool.

Given that the user is using the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they detect discrepancies, then they should be able to report these discrepancies directly through the tool, and an explanatory message should be displayed confirming the submission.

User wants to filter suppliers based on minimum ratings to streamline their comparison.

Given that the user applies a minimum rating filter in the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they execute the filter, then only suppliers meeting the minimum rating criteria should be displayed in the comparison results.

User needs to sort suppliers based on specific metrics such as delivery times.

Given that the user utilizes the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they select to sort suppliers by delivery times, then the comparison results should be rearranged to reflect the suppliers ordered from shortest to longest delivery time.

Automated Supplier Performance Alerts

"As a supply chain manager, I want to receive alerts when a supplier's performance declines so that I can take immediate action to resolve the issue and maintain smooth operations."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing an automated alert system that notifies users when a supplier's performance falls below predefined thresholds. Users will be able to set specific criteria for important metrics such as delivery timeliness or product quality. When a supplier fails to meet these standards, users will receive notifications via email or through the InvenTrack platform, allowing them to take prompt corrective action. This proactive approach enables businesses to address issues before they impact operations, improving supplier relationships and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier performance alert triggers when a supplier's delivery timeliness falls below acceptable thresholds set by the user.

Given a supplier with established performance metrics, when the delivery timeliness dips below the threshold, then an alert is sent to the user's email and the InvenTrack platform.

Users are able to configure and customize the thresholds for supplier performance metrics directly within the InvenTrack interface.

Given the user has access to the Supplier Performance Insights feature, when they set custom thresholds for delivery timeliness or product quality, then these thresholds should be saved and used for future alert generation.

Users receive timely notifications through both email and the InvenTrack platform when performance metrics are breached.

Given a supplier's performance has fallen below the set thresholds, when the alert is triggered, then the user will receive a notification via email and an in-app notification within 5 minutes of the trigger.

Users can view a historical log of supplier performance alerts to assess patterns over time.

Given that a user accesses the Supplier Performance Insights feature, when they select the historical alerts section, then they should see a record of all past alerts, including timestamps and performance metrics that triggered the alerts.

The alert notification system allows users to prioritize certain suppliers based on their importance to the business.

Given the user has a list of suppliers, when they designate specific suppliers as high priority, then alerts for these suppliers should use a different notification method (e.g., text message) in addition to email and in-app notifications.

Admin users can modify the alert settings for all users within their organization for uniformity in supplier performance monitoring.

Given the admin user accesses the alert configuration settings, when they change the default alert thresholds or notification methods, then these new settings should apply to all users in the organization immediately.

Supplier Feedback Loop

"As a business owner, I want to provide feedback on my suppliers based on my experiences so that I can help improve their service and assist other users in making informed decisions."

Description

This requirement is aimed at creating a feedback mechanism where users can input and track their experiences with suppliers. Users can submit ratings and comments on various aspects of supplier performance. This feedback will not only help improve supplier relationships but also serve as a database for future procurement decisions. Integrating this function within InvenTrack allows users to rely on historical data and collective feedback to anticipate supplier reliability, ultimately enhancing procurement strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Feedback Submission for Performance Ratings

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, When the user navigates to the Supplier Performance Insights section and selects a supplier, Then the user should be able to submit a rating from 1 to 5 stars along with optional comments regarding their experience, and the system should save this feedback successfully without errors.

View Historical Feedback on Suppliers

Given a user is viewing the Supplier Performance Insights section, When the user selects a supplier, Then the user should see a summary of all submitted feedback, including ratings and comments from previous entries, displayed in chronological order.

Aggregate Supplier Performance Metrics

Given multiple users have submitted feedback on a supplier, When a user accesses the supplier's profile in the Supplier Performance Insights section, Then the user should see aggregated performance metrics, such as average rating, total feedback count, and distribution of ratings, clearly displayed.

Edit Existing Supplier Feedback

Given a user has previously submitted feedback for a supplier, When the user navigates back to the Supplier Performance Insights section and selects their feedback entry, Then the user should be able to edit their rating and comments, and upon saving, the updates should reflect immediately in the feedback summary.

Delete Supplier Feedback Entries

Given a user has submitted feedback on a supplier, When the user selects the option to delete their feedback entry, Then the system should prompt for confirmation and, upon confirmation, delete the feedback entry, ensuring it no longer appears in the feedback summary.

Notify Users of Feedback Updates

Given that feedback has been submitted for a supplier, When the supplier receives a new feedback entry or an existing entry is updated, Then the system should send a notification to users who have interacted with that supplier, summarizing the new feedback details.

Feedback Impact on Supplier Selection

Given a user is viewing suppliers for a procurement decision, When the user filters suppliers based on performance ratings, Then the system should display suppliers in order of their aggregated ratings, allowing the user to make informed decisions based on historical feedback.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want my supplier performance data to integrate seamlessly with our e-commerce platform so that I can have a holistic view of supplier impact on our sales and inventory."

Description

This requirement entails integrating the Supplier Performance Insights feature with major e-commerce platforms used by our clients. By leveraging APIs, the integration will allow automatic syncing of supplier performance data based on sales and fulfillment metrics directly tied to e-commerce activities. This functionality will expand the usability of the Supplier Performance Insights, ensuring that users can view comprehensive supplier metrics that include direct sales impact. This deeper insight will empower businesses to make better-cycled decisions around inventory and supplier management.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Supplier Performance Insights with Shopify.

Given a business is using Shopify, when they connect their InvenTrack account to Shopify, then supplier performance metrics should sync automatically based on recent sales and fulfillment data within 5 minutes of connection.

Integration with WooCommerce for Supplier Performance Insights.

Given a retail business uses WooCommerce, when the supplier performance insights feature is activated, then the system should retrieve supplier metrics and display them on the dashboard within 10 minutes.

User interface for viewing supplier metrics after integration.

Given supplier performance insights are integrated with an e-commerce platform, when a user navigates to the supplier performance dashboard, then they should see a summary of supplier ratings, lead times, and order fulfillment percentages.

Error handling during supplier data sync.

Given the supplier performance insights feature is integrated with an e-commerce platform, when there is an error in syncing data, then the user should receive a clear error notification detailing the issue and suggested actions within 2 minutes of the error.

Real-time updates of supplier metrics.

Given a connected e-commerce platform, when new sales occur or fulfillment metrics change, then these updates should reflect in the supplier performance insights within 3 minutes, ensuring the data is real-time.

Data accuracy after synchronization between InvenTrack and e-commerce platforms.

Given the integration is active, when supplier performance data is pulled from the e-commerce platform, then at least 95% of the data points should match the source data without discrepancies.

Historical performance analysis for suppliers.

Given that supplier performance insights are integrated, when a user selects a supplier from the dashboard, then they should be able to view historical performance data over the past 6 months, including metrics such as average lead time and fulfillment rate.

Inventory Health Score

The Inventory Health Score is a key performance indicator that assesses the overall status of stock levels, turnover rates, and sales performance. By providing a clear summary of inventory efficiency, this feature helps users quickly identify slow-moving items and opportunities for improvement.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Monitoring

"As a business owner, I want to receive real-time updates on my inventory levels so that I can avoid stockouts and ensure my customers can always find the products they want."

Description

This requirement entails the implementation of real-time inventory tracking capabilities that allow users to monitor stock levels as they change. Users will receive instant notifications when stock levels fall below specified thresholds, enabling proactive management of stock levels. This functionality is crucial for preventing stockouts, thereby ensuring that customers can always purchase items that are in demand. The integration with sales data will provide insights into how quickly items are moving off the shelves, further aiding in inventory management decisions. Overall, real-time inventory monitoring significantly enhances operational efficiency and customer satisfaction by minimizing the risk of running out of popular products.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives instant notifications when the stock level of a specific product falls below the defined threshold of 10 units.

Given that the stock level of a product is monitored, when it drops below 10 units, then the user should receive an instant notification via email and mobile app.

User can view real-time stock level updates on the dashboard while they manage their inventory.

Given that the user is logged into the inventory management dashboard, when they access the stock monitoring section, then they should see the current stock levels updated in real-time for all products.

User can set custom stock level thresholds for different products based on their sales performance.

Given that the user is on the product settings page, when they choose a product and set a new stock level threshold, then that threshold should be saved and reflected in the stock level monitoring system.

Integration with sales data reflects inventory turnover rates dynamically as sales occur.

Given that a sale is made for a specific product, when the sale data is entered into the system, then the inventory turnover rate for that product should update immediately on the reporting dashboard.

User wants to analyze slow-moving items based on the Inventory Health Score in relation to their stock levels.

Given that the user accesses the Inventory Health Score report, when they filter for slow-moving items, then they should see a list of products with a low turnover rate and their respective stock levels.

User can compare stock levels against sales forecasts for the upcoming month.

Given that the user is in the forecasting tool, when they select a time period for comparison, then they should see a visual representation comparing current stock levels to the forecasted sales for that period.

User is notified of recommended restocking quantities based on historical sales data for frequently purchased items.

Given that an item has reached the defined low stock threshold and its sales data indicates frequent purchases, when the user checks for restocking recommendations, then they should receive a notification with suggested order quantities based on past sales patterns.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a store manager, I want to receive alerts when stock levels are low so that I can reorder items promptly and ensure that we do not run out of popular products."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating an automated alert system that triggers notifications for the user when inventory for specific items reaches a predefined low level. This feature will help in maintaining optimal stock levels by reducing the manual effort required for inventory management. Users will be able to customize alert thresholds based on their business needs and product turnover rates. The automated alerts will not only improve inventory efficiency but also contribute to better cash flow management by preventing overstocking and stockouts. Integration with supplier order systems will facilitate seamless reordering processes based on these alerts.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a low stock threshold for a product in their inventory management dashboard.

Given the user has set a low stock threshold for a product, when the inventory for that product reaches the threshold, then an automated alert is triggered to notify the user via email and in-app notification.

User customizes alert thresholds for multiple products based on varying turnover rates.

Given the user has access to the inventory management dashboard, when they adjust alert thresholds for multiple products, then the system successfully saves these thresholds and displays them accurately within the alert settings.

User receives a notification for low stock levels on a key product before it runs out.

Given the inventory of a key product drops to the predefined low level, when the inventory status is updated, then the user receives an alert notification at least 24 hours before stock runs out.

Inventory alert notifications are integrated with the supplier order system for seamless reordering.

Given an automated alert for a low-stock product, when the alert is triggered, then the system generates a reorder request to the connected supplier order system without user intervention.

User views their customized inventory alert settings on the dashboard.

Given the user has set up alert thresholds, when they navigate to the settings section of the dashboard, then they can view, edit, and delete their alert preferences for different products.

Multiple users on a team receive the same automated alert for low inventory when set by a single user.

Given that a user sets up an automated alert for low inventory on a shared product, when the inventory reaches the low level, then all designated team members receive the same alert notifications simultaneously.

User can test the automated alert system without affecting live inventory levels.

Given a test mode in the inventory management system, when the user triggers a low stock condition in test mode, then the system generates an alert as it would in live mode, ensuring that functionality works correctly without impacting actual inventory.

Inventory Performance Dashboard

"As an inventory manager, I want to see a dashboard of my inventory performance metrics so that I can quickly assess where improvements are needed and respond effectively to changing market demands."

Description

This requirement involves developing a comprehensive dashboard that consolidates various inventory performance metrics in one user-friendly interface. Users will be able to view key performance indicators such as turnover rates, stock health scores, and sales trends at a glance. This feature enhances decision-making by providing actionable insights into inventory performance, thereby allowing users to optimize their inventory management strategies. The dashboard will support visualization tools, such as graphs and charts, making it easier for users to interpret the data. By having immediate access to critical inventory metrics, users can make informed adjustments to their inventory practices.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Inventory Performance Dashboard upon logging into InvenTrack for the first time to assess their inventory management metrics.

Given that the user is logged into InvenTrack and accesses the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when the dashboard loads, then it should display key performance indicators including turnover rates, stock health scores, and sales trends in a clear and organized layout.

Retail user wants to compare the current month’s inventory turnover rate with the previous month’s.

Given that the user is on the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they select the turnover rate metric, then it should provide a comparison option to view the current month's turnover rate against the previous month, displayed graphically.

E-commerce user utilizes the dashboard to identify slow-moving items that require targeted promotion.

Given that the user is using the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they filter the metrics to show items with low turnover rates, then the dashboard should list those items with details including their sales performance and stock levels.

User wants to customize the view of their Inventory Performance Dashboard to focus on specific metrics.

Given that the user is on the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they choose to customize their dashboard layout, then they should be able to add, remove, or rearrange the displayed metrics according to their preferences.

User accesses the dashboard on a mobile device to check inventory metrics while on the go.

Given that the user accesses InvenTrack on a mobile device, when they open the Inventory Performance Dashboard, then it should be fully responsive, displaying all relevant metrics without loss of functionality or clarity.

User interacts with the charts on the dashboard to gather detailed information on sales trends.

Given that the user is viewing graphs on the Inventory Performance Dashboard, when they hover over a data point in the sales trend chart, then it should display a tooltip with detailed sales figures for that point in time.

Slow-Moving Inventory Identification

"As a retail manager, I want to be alerted about slow-moving inventory so that I can take action to increase sales and reduce excess stock."

Description

This requirement focuses on implementing a feature that automatically identifies and flags slow-moving inventory items based on sales velocity and turnover rates. This insight allows users to take targeted actions, such as promotional strategies or discounting, to enhance sales for these items. By providing guidelines and recommendations based on the identified slow-moving products, users can make strategic decisions that improve overall inventory efficiency and minimize losses due to obsolete stock. This feature integrates seamlessly with the Inventory Health Score, providing a holistic view of inventory performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Identification of Slow-Moving Inventory Items Based on Sales Velocity

Given the user has inventory data available, when the system calculates the sales velocity and turnover rates, then it should automatically flag items as slow-moving if they fall below the defined thresholds for thirty days.

Display of Recommendations for Slow-Moving Items

Given that slow-moving inventory has been identified, when the user views the inventory report, then actionable recommendations for promotion or discounting should be displayed for each slow-moving item.

Integration with Inventory Health Score

Given the system has flagged slow-moving inventory, when the user accesses the Inventory Health Score dashboard, then the flagged items should update the user's score and be represented visually on the dashboard.

Notification System for Slow-Moving Inventory

Given that the inventory system has identified slow-moving items, when the next scheduled report is generated, then the user should receive a notification summarizing these items and suggested actions.

User Feedback on Recommendations Effectiveness

Given the recommendations for slow-moving items have been implemented, when users apply these recommendations and track performance for sixty days, then they should be able to provide feedback on the effectiveness of the suggestions through a feedback form.

Historical Analysis of Slow-Moving Inventory

Given that slow-moving items have been flagged, when the user accesses the historical performance report, then they should be able to see trends and historical data for each slow-moving item over the last twelve months.

User Interface for Slow-Moving Inventory Overview

Given that the slow-moving inventory feature is active, when the user navigates to the Inventory Management module, then they should see a dedicated section that lists all slow-moving items with relevant details such as sales velocity, turnover rate, and suggested actions.

Advanced Demand Forecasting

"As a business analyst, I want to access advanced demand forecasting tools so that I can predict future inventory needs and make data-driven inventory decisions."

Description

This requirement is centered on the development of an advanced demand forecasting tool that utilizes historical sales data, market trends, and seasonal patterns to predict future inventory needs. With this feature, users will be able to plan more effectively by anticipating demand fluctuations and adjusting their inventory strategies accordingly. This capability reduces the risk of overstocking or stockouts, ultimately leading to better inventory turnover rates and improved profitability. Integration with existing sales and inventory systems will ensure that forecasts are based on real-time data, making them more reliable and actionable.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to generate a demand forecast for the next quarter based on historical sales data and seasonal trends.

Given the user inputs their historical sales data and specifies the desired forecast period, When they request a forecast, Then the system generates a forecast report that includes expected sales figures, potential stock levels, and highlights seasonal trends.

A user adjusts their inventory levels based on the generated demand forecast.

Given the user receives a demand forecast report, When they adjust inventory levels for specific items according to the recommendations, Then the updated inventory levels should reflect the adjusted values and the system should notify the user of changes made.

The system automatically updates demand forecasting based on real-time sales data.

Given that sales data is being collected in real time, When new sales data comes in, Then the demand forecasting model is recalibrated, and the user can request an updated forecast reflecting the most current data.

A user needs to identify and address slow-moving inventory based on forecasts.

Given the user accesses the inventory health score dashboard, When they view forecasts related to inventory items, Then the system identifies and highlights items likely to become slow-moving, providing actionable recommendations.

Users want to ensure the accuracy of the forecasts made by the system compared to actual sales.

Given that actual sales data for the forecast period becomes available, When the user compares the forecast figures to the actual sales, Then the forecast accuracy percentage should be calculated and displayed, showing the difference between predicted and actual sales.

Users want to receive alerts for significant changes in forecasted demand.

Given that the system generates a new forecast, When there is a significant deviation (e.g., 20% or more) in demand from the previous forecast, Then the user receives an alert notification prompting them to review the changes.

User wants to integrate the demand forecasting tool with their existing sales and inventory systems.

Given the user initiates integration with their existing sales and inventory systems, When the systems connect successfully, Then the demand forecasting tool should demonstrate data accuracy by using real-time data from the integrated systems.

User Role Management

"As a system administrator, I want to manage user roles and permissions so that I can ensure that sensitive inventory data is protected and only accessible to authorized users."

Description

This requirement involves creating a user role management system that enables admin users to define different access levels and permissions for various team members. This feature enhances security and ensures that sensitive inventory data is only accessible to authorized personnel. By implementing role management, businesses can enforce accountability and streamline workflows by allowing the right team members to access pertinent information. This customization will support diverse team structures and operational requirements while maintaining the integrity of inventory data.

Acceptance Criteria

Admin User Creates a New Role with Specific Permissions

Given an admin user is logged in, when they create a new user role and assign specific permissions (view, edit, delete), then the new role should be saved and reflect the assigned permissions in the user role management interface.

Admin User Modifies Permissions for an Existing Role

Given an admin user is logged in, when they select an existing user role and change its permissions, then the system should successfully update the role permissions and show the changes in the user role management interface.

Team Member Logs In with Assigned Role Permissions

Given a team member is assigned a specific user role, when they log in to the system, then they should only have access to features and data as defined by their role's assigned permissions.

Admin User Deletes a User Role

Given an admin user is logged in, when they delete a specific user role, then that role should be removed from the system and no longer available for assignment to users.

User Role Permissions Audit Report Generation

Given an admin user is logged in, when they request a user role permissions audit report, then the system should generate a report detailing all user roles and their corresponding permissions accurately.

System Alerts for Unused Roles

Given the user role management system, when a user role has not been used for a specified period (e.g., 6 months), then the system should notify the admin user with an alert to review the role.

User Access Attempt Logging

Given a user attempts to access a feature they do not have permission for, when this action occurs, then the system should log the attempt with details of the user ID and timestamp for review by an admin.

Customizable Reorder Strategies

Customizable Reorder Strategies allow users to tailor reorder points and quantities based on specific product types, seasonal demand, or sales trends. This flexibility ensures that users can adapt the Smart Reorder Assistant to their unique business needs, enhancing overall inventory performance.

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Point Configuration

"As an inventory manager, I want to configure dynamic reorder points for different products so that I can optimize my inventory levels based on actual sales trends and avoid both stockouts and overstock situations."

Description

The Dynamic Reorder Point Configuration allows users to set multiple reorder points based on various factors such as product type, historical sales data, and seasonal trends. This feature enables businesses to fine-tune their inventory replenishment process, ensuring that products are reordered at optimal times to prevent stockouts and meet customer demand without overstocking. Additionally, it integrates with the existing sales forecasting tools within InvenTrack, leveraging real-time data to automatically adjust reorder points based on changing market conditions and sales velocity, ultimately leading to improved inventory turnover rates and enhanced customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets dynamic reorder points based on historical sales data for seasonal products.

Given a user has uploaded historical sales data, when the user sets a reorder point for a seasonal product, then the system should calculate and display suggested reorder points based on changes in sales velocity and trends.

User integrates reorder strategies with real-time sales forecasting tools within InvenTrack.

Given the user has access to sales forecasting tools, when they adjust reorder points for a product, then those adjustments should reflect immediately in both the forecasting tool and the inventory management interface.

User customizes reorder quantities based on product type and sales trends.

Given a user is configuring reorder strategies for different product categories, when they set a reorder quantity for a specific product type, then that setting should apply only to products of that category and not affect others.

User receives automated alerts for low stock items based on dynamic reorder points.

Given a user has configured dynamic reorder points, when the stock level of an item falls below the set reorder point, then the user should receive an automated alert via email or the InvenTrack platform.

User tests the versatility of reorder settings against fluctuating market conditions.

Given the user has dynamic reorder points configured, when there is a significant increase or decrease in market demand, then the system should automatically adjust the reorder points and notify the user of these changes.

User reviews reorder point performance with analytics reporting.

Given a user accesses the performance analytics dashboard, when they select a product with dynamic reorder points, then they should see a report detailing reorder effectiveness, stockout incidents, and overall inventory turnover rates.

Seasonal Demand Integration

"As a business owner, I want to automatically adjust my reorder strategies based on seasonal demands so that I can prepare in advance and meet customer needs during peak shopping times."

Description

The Seasonal Demand Integration feature allows users to adjust reorder strategies according to historical seasonal sales patterns. This feature provides insights and recommendations on how much stock to order in anticipation of increased demand during peak seasons, thus preventing last-minute shortages and missed sales opportunities. By analyzing past sales data, this feature will suggest optimal reorder quantities and timings tailored to seasonal fluctuations, aiding retailers in achieving better inventory management and maximizing sales during high-demand periods. It also ensures that the integrations with e-commerce platforms reflect seasonal adjustments automatically.

Acceptance Criteria

User adjusts the reorder strategies for a product category with historical seasonal sales data, ensuring that the system incorporates these new custom settings for the upcoming peak season.

Given the user selects a product category and enters new seasonal reorder points and quantities, when the user saves these changes, then the system should automatically update the reorder strategy for that category in the inventory settings.

A user reviews the proposed reorder quantities and timings suggested by the Seasonal Demand Integration based on prior year sales data during a peak season.

Given the user navigates to the Seasonal Demand Integration section, when the user requests recommendations for reorder quantities and timings, then the system should display a report outlining suggested reorder quantities for each product based on historical trends.

A user receives a restocking alert via email or app notification for a product influenced by seasonal demand patterns, ensuring timely action for inventory management.

Given the user has set up notifications for restocking alerts, when the suggested reorder point for a seasonal product is reached, then the system should generate and send an alert to the user with suggested quantities and timings for restocking.

When seasonal demand adjustments are made, the integration with the e-commerce platform reflects these changes in real-time to prevent stock-out situations.

Given the user adjusts seasonal demand settings in InvenTrack, when these changes are saved, then the e-commerce platform should reflect updated stock levels and availability without delay.

A user analyzes the impact of seasonal demand adjustments on overall inventory performance towards the end of a season.

Given the user accesses inventory reports post-season, when comparing inventory turnover rates before and after adjustments, then the system should show measurable improvements in stock levels and sales performance for the affected categories.

A user wants to set future seasonal demand strategies based on predictive analytics and learning from past sales data.

Given the user requests to set up future seasonal demand strategies, when the system processes historical sales data for the specified periods, then it should provide a forecast of recommended reorder points and quantities for the next season.

Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard

"As a sales analyst, I want to visualize sales trends over time so that I can identify which products need to be reordered and which ones should be phased out."

Description

The Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard provides users with a visual representation of sales performance over time. It offers analytics tools that allow users to assess sales trends by product categories, periods, and promotional activities. This feature supports data-driven decision making by showcasing which products are performing well and which are underperforming, enabling users to adjust their inventory strategies accordingly. The dashboard will be integrated within InvenTrack and will display real-time changes, empowering users to make timely and informed replenishment decisions that align with actual sales data.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Trend Dashboard Usage Scenario for Seasonal Adjustments

Given a user accesses the Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they select a specific product category and a date range covering previous seasonal sales, then they should see visual trends that demonstrate sales patterns for that category, allowing them to identify peak sales periods for planning inventory.

Evaluating Promotional Impact on Sales through Dashboard

Given a user views the Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they filter results by promotional activities over the last 30 days, then they should be able to see a detailed list of products with corresponding sales increases or decreases attributed to the promotions.

Real-Time Update Verification in Sales Dashboard

Given the user is viewing the Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard, when a sale is made, then the dashboard should update the sales figures in real-time, reflecting accurate current sales data without requiring a page refresh.

Assessing Underperforming Products in Dashboard

Given a user uses the Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they apply filters for low sales performance metrics, then the dashboard should generate a list of products ranked by sales performance, enabling the user to identify underperforming items for potential action.

Data Export Functionality for Sales Analysis

Given a user accesses the Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard, when they select the export option, then they should be able to download a comprehensive report of the sales trends in a CSV file format for further analysis.

User Customization of Dashboard Layout

Given the Sales Trend Analysis Dashboard is displayed, when the user arranges or modifies the graph types and data views to their preference, then these customizations should be saved and remain consistent upon subsequent logins.

Supplier Comparison Tool

This feature allows users to compare multiple suppliers side-by-side based on criteria such as pricing, shipping times, and product quality. By providing a clear visual representation, Retail Owners and E-commerce Managers can identify the best suppliers for their specific needs, ensuring they make informed decisions that optimize costs and improve inventory quality.

Requirements

Dynamic Supplier Comparison

"As a Retail Owner, I want to compare multiple suppliers directly within InvenTrack, so that I can make informed decisions that optimize my costs and improve the quality of my inventory."

Description

The Supplier Comparison Tool must allow users to dynamically compare multiple suppliers by providing a side-by-side visual interface. Users will enter criteria such as pricing, shipping times, and product quality to filter and sort suppliers. This functionality should integrate with real-time data from suppliers, ensuring that comparisons are made on the most current information available. It will enhance decision-making by allowing users to visually analyze differences and select suppliers that best meet their inventory needs. The tool should be user-friendly, requiring minimal training for new users, thereby increasing adoption rates and satisfaction with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Comparison for Seasonal Inventory Needs

Given a user selects multiple suppliers and enters specific criteria (pricing, shipping times, and product quality), When the user requests a comparison, Then the system displays a side-by-side table with real-time data for each supplier based on the entered criteria, allowing the user to visually analyze differences.

Dynamic Updates with New Supplier Data

Given the system is connected to supplier APIs, When new data (pricing, shipping times, product quality) is available, Then the comparison tool refreshes automatically to display the latest information without user intervention, ensuring users always see the most current supplier data.

User-friendly Interface for New Users

Given a new user accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool for the first time, When they explore the interface without prior training, Then they can successfully filter and sort supplier data based on predefined criteria (pricing, shipping times, product quality) within 10 minutes, demonstrating minimal required training for usability.

Exporting Comparison Results for Reporting

Given a user has completed a supplier comparison, When the user selects the 'Export' option, Then the system generates a downloadable report in PDF format that includes all comparison results and visual graphs to support decision-making.

Custom Filters for Specific Product Categories

Given a user wants to compare suppliers for specific product categories, When they apply custom filters to the comparison tool, Then the system accurately shows only the relevant suppliers and their criteria for those specific product categories.

Performance Metrics Display

Given users complete multiple comparisons, When viewing past comparisons, Then the system shows performance metrics such as average pricing, average shipping times, and user ratings for each supplier, enabling informed decision-making based on historical data.

Customizable Comparison Criteria

"As an E-commerce Manager, I want to customize the criteria for comparing suppliers, so that I can tailor the evaluation process to my business's specific needs and find the best options available."

Description

Users should be able to customize the comparison criteria in the Supplier Comparison Tool based on specific business needs. The tool must allow users to add, remove, or modify the criteria they want to use in their comparisons, such as minimum order quantities, customer service ratings, and delivery options. By providing this flexibility, the Supplier Comparison Tool will cater to the unique requirements of different businesses, ultimately making it more beneficial for users. This feature will need to seamlessly integrate within the existing interface and maintain a straightforward user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User adds a new comparison criterion to the Supplier Comparison Tool.

Given the user has accessed the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they click on the 'Add Criterion' button and enter valid details for a new criterion, then the new criterion should be added to the comparison criteria list and should display correctly.

User modifies an existing comparison criterion in the Supplier Comparison Tool.

Given the user has an existing criterion in the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they select the criterion and choose 'Edit', then they should be able to modify the criterion's details and save the changes, reflecting the updated information in the criteria list.

User removes a comparison criterion from the Supplier Comparison Tool.

Given the user has accessed the Supplier Comparison Tool with multiple criteria listed, when they select a criterion and click on the 'Remove' button, then the selected criterion should be removed from the list and no longer appear in the comparison.

User views the comparison criteria list to ensure all desired criteria are present.

Given the user has customized their comparison criteria in the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they navigate to the criteria overview, then all added, modified, or removed criteria should be accurately displayed, showing correct information as intended by the user.

User utilizes the comparison tool with customized criteria to evaluate suppliers.

Given the user has set up multiple suppliers for comparison using their customized criteria, when they use the comparison tool, then the output should reflect correct calculations and visual representations based on the selected criteria, enabling informed decision-making.

User saves their customized comparison criteria for future use.

Given the user has customized their comparison criteria in the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they click on the 'Save Criteria' button, then the criteria should be stored successfully and available for later retrieval without loss of information.

Supplier Performance Analytics

"As a Retail Owner, I want to view analytics on supplier performance, so that I can assess their reliability and quality before making purchasing decisions."

Description

The Supplier Comparison Tool should include analytics features that evaluate supplier performance over time based on user-defined metrics such as delivery reliability, product quality scores, and support response times. This will not only enable users to make comparisons based on current data but also allow them to see historical trends and predict future performance. The analytics dashboard will provide visual indicators (charts, graphs) that display performance metrics, facilitating easier analysis and better-informed decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User examines supplier performance analytics after receiving an order to assess which suppliers are meeting their delivery timelines, product quality standards, and support effectiveness.

Given that the user selects multiple suppliers and a specific performance metric, when they access the analytics dashboard, then they should see a comparative display of performance metrics for each supplier, including delivery reliability, product quality scores, and support response times, in clear visual formats (charts or graphs).

A retail owner wants to evaluate supplier trends over a six-month period to determine which suppliers have consistently high performance before the busy holiday season.

Given that the user selects a time frame of six months on the analytics dashboard, when the report is generated, then they should see historical performance trends over that period, with visual representations indicating improvements or declines in supplier scores.

An e-commerce manager needs to make supplier decisions based on both current performance and historical data to ensure they partner with the most reliable suppliers.

Given that the user requests an analytics report that includes both current and historical performance, when the report is generated, then it should display a side-by-side comparison of latest performance metrics and historical trends, enabling a comprehensive view for decision-making.

After a supplier’s performance has significantly dropped, a user seeks to investigate the underlying reasons and trends associated with this decline.

Given that the user clicks on a specific supplier's performance metric, when they are redirected to the detailed analytics page, then it should provide granular insights into the factors contributing to the decline, including filter options for time periods and specific metrics.

A user is interested in identifying which suppliers consistently provide high-quality products for their inventory.

Given that the user filters the suppliers by product quality scores on the analytics dashboard, when the relevant data is displayed, then it should show a ranked list of suppliers based on their highest quality scores, with visual aids for clarity.

A retail owner wants to see if supplier support response times have improved since implementing a new vendor management process.

Given that the user applies a filter to show support response times before and after the implementation date, when the analysis is performed, then it should visualize the response times with comparative graphs highlighting the percentage change.

An e-commerce manager needs a quick snapshot of supplier performance to share with stakeholders in a meeting.

Given that the user requests a high-level summary report of supplier performance metrics, when the report is generated, then it should display an executive summary with key performance indicators and visual representations suitable for presentation.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an E-commerce Manager, I want the Supplier Comparison Tool to integrate with my e-commerce platform, so that I can automatically utilize performance data in my supplier evaluations for better decision-making."

Description

To enhance functionality, the Supplier Comparison Tool must integrate with major e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon. This integration should allow users to pull in data directly from these platforms to enrich supplier comparisons with actual performance metrics like sales volume and customer feedback. By leveraging this data, users can make decisions that are not only informed by pricing and quality but also by past performance in similar categories or products. The integration process also needs to be seamless to avoid disrupting the user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User pulls supplier data into InvenTrack from Shopify to compare pricing and shipping times against suppliers from WooCommerce.

Given that the user is logged into both InvenTrack and Shopify, when the user requests to import supplier data, then the system should successfully retrieve supplier pricing and shipping times without errors.

The user selects multiple suppliers to compare side-by-side within the Supplier Comparison Tool.

Given that the user has at least three suppliers listed, when the user selects these suppliers for comparison, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison table with pricing, shipping times, and product quality metrics.

User views historical performance metrics of suppliers pulled from Amazon to make informed decisions.

Given that the supplier performance data has been successfully imported from Amazon, when the user accesses a supplier's profile, then the system should display relevant sales volume and customer feedback for the selected supplier.

User attempts to compare suppliers but one supplier's data fails to import.

Given that the user has selected multiple suppliers including one with import issues, when the comparison process is initiated, then the system should display a clear error message indicating which supplier failed to import and why.

User integrates supplier data regularly from WooCommerce for ongoing supplier performance tracking.

Given that the user has set up scheduled data imports from WooCommerce, when the scheduled time arrives, then the system should automatically pull updated supplier performance metrics without user intervention and notify them of successful data sync.

User evaluates options and finalizes supplier choices based on comprehensive comparison metrics.

Given that the user has compared multiple suppliers, when the user selects a supplier as the preferred choice, then the system should highlight this selection and provide a summary of the comparison that justified this choice.

Mobile-Friendly View

"As an E-commerce Manager, I want to be able to access the Supplier Comparison Tool from my mobile device, so that I can make quick decisions anytime and anywhere, enhancing my inventory management efficiency."

Description

The Supplier Comparison Tool should have a mobile-friendly version that allows users to access comparison features via smartphones and tablets. This will involve implementing responsive design principles to ensure that all functionalities are accessible and intuitive on smaller screens. By enabling mobile access, users can compare suppliers on-the-go, increasing flexibility in supply chain management and facilitating timely decision-making when unexpected inventory needs arise.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile Users Accessing the Supplier Comparison Tool on Smartphones

Given a mobile user accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool from a smartphone, when they navigate to the comparison page, then the design should render responsively with all features accessible and fully functional on the screen without horizontal scrolling.

Functional Interface on Tablet Devices

Given a mobile user accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool from a tablet, when they use the comparison functionalities, then all elements should adjust for optimal viewing while maintaining usability and responsiveness.

Complete Supplier Data Display

Given a mobile user is comparing suppliers, when selecting multiple suppliers for comparison, then all relevant data (pricing, shipping times, quality ratings) should display clearly and legibly on the mobile screen.

User Interaction Feedback

Given a mobile user interacts with the comparison tool, when they tap on a supplier for more details, then they should receive immediate visual feedback (like a highlight or animation) confirming their selection.

Performance Under Mobile Network Conditions

Given a mobile user with a slow network connection, when accessing the Supplier Comparison Tool, then the page should load within 5 seconds and all functionalities should remain responsive without crashing or freezing.

Intuitive Navigation for Mobile Users

Given a mobile user is navigating the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they attempt to switch between suppliers or return to the main menu, then the navigation should be intuitive, requiring no more than 2 taps to access any relevant feature.

Accessibility Compliance for Mobile View

Given a mobile user accesses the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they navigate the interface using assistive technologies (e.g., screen readers), then all components should be fully accessible and provide appropriate verbal descriptions for each feature.

User Feedback Loop

"As a Retail Owner, I want to provide feedback on the Supplier Comparison Tool, so that my suggestions can help improve its functionality and better meet my needs in the future."

Description

A user feedback mechanism should be integrated into the Supplier Comparison Tool to collect user insights and experiences with the comparison process. This feature will allow users to submit feedback on the usability of the tool, the clarity of information presented, and any additional features they desire. Collecting this data regularly will help the development team prioritize improvements and updates, ensuring that the tool evolves in line with user needs and continues to provide value over time.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits feedback on the Supplier Comparison Tool after evaluating multiple suppliers in a single session.

Given a Retail Owner has accessed the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they provide feedback on at least one supplier comparison, then the feedback should be recorded and stored without errors.

User requests to view feedback results on the usability of the Supplier Comparison Tool for upcoming enhancements.

Given an E-commerce Manager is reviewing the user feedback collected, when they access the feedback report, then they should see a visual summary of the feedback data including ratings and comments.

User submits a suggestion for an additional feature in the Supplier Comparison Tool based on their experience.

Given a user has completed utilizing the Supplier Comparison Tool, when they submit a suggestion for a new feature, then an acknowledgment should be sent to the user confirming receipt of their suggestion.

User accesses historical feedback data to track changes in user satisfaction over time.

Given a business administrator is checking user feedback trends, when they navigate to the historical feedback section, then they should be able to filter feedback by date ranges and view visual trends in satisfaction ratings.

User analyzes the impact of feedback on tool enhancements during a review meeting.

Given a development team is in a review meeting, when they present enhancements based on user feedback, then at least one feedback instance should be linked to a specific enhancement to demonstrate responsiveness to user needs.

User updates their feedback on the Supplier Comparison Tool after experiencing recent updates.

Given a user has previously submitted feedback, when they access the feedback updating functionality, then they should be able to edit and resubmit their feedback information easily and receive a confirmation of the update.

Integrated Order Tracking

Integrated Order Tracking offers real-time updates on the status of orders placed through the marketplace. Users receive notifications for shipment progress, estimated delivery dates, and any delays, equipping Operations Coordinators and Warehouse Managers with the information they need to manage stock levels and fulfill orders efficiently, thereby enhancing overall customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Real-Time Notification System

"As an Operations Coordinator, I want to receive real-time notifications about the status of our orders so that I can manage stock levels effectively and ensure timely fulfillment for our customers."

Description

The Real-Time Notification System will allow users to receive instant alerts and updates regarding the status of their orders within InvenTrack. This includes notifications for shipment initiation, tracking updates, estimated delivery dates, and any delays. The functionality will ensure that Operations Coordinators and Warehouse Managers have access to timely information, enabling them to respond promptly to changes and make informed decisions regarding stock levels and fulfillment processes. This integrated feature is essential for maintaining an efficient inventory management workflow, ultimately leading to enhanced customer satisfaction and trust in the service provided.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time order notifications for shipment initiation by the warehouse staff.

Given that an order has been successfully processed, when the warehouse staff initiate the shipment, then the Operations Coordinator should receive a notification within 1 minute of shipment initiation.

Notifications for tracking updates provided to Operations Coordinators after shipment.

Given that an order has shipped, when there is a change in the tracking status (e.g., 'Out for Delivery'), then the Operations Coordinator should receive a real-time update notification within 5 minutes of the status change.

Estimated delivery date notifications sent to customers after order fulfillment.

Given an order has been shipped, when the estimated delivery date is updated by the courier, then the customer should receive a notification reflecting the change within 10 minutes of receiving that update.

Alerts for any delivery delays communicated to Warehouse Managers.

Given that there is a delay in delivery, when the system receives a delay notification from the shipping provider, then the Warehouse Manager should be notified of the delay immediately.

Notification system performance monitoring for latency issues.

Given that the notification system is running, when a notification is sent, then the delivery time of that notification should not exceed 2 seconds on average over a 30-day period.

User management access to notification settings for teams.

Given that an Operations Coordinator accesses the settings, when they modify the notification preferences, then those changes should be effective immediately, confirming via a success message.

Multi-platform notifications received by users on various devices.

Given that a user has the InvenTrack application installed on multiple devices, when a notification is triggered, then the user should receive the same notification across all devices within 1 minute.

Comprehensive Order History Tracking

"As a Warehouse Manager, I want to access a detailed order history so that I can analyze past trends and improve future inventory planning."

Description

The Comprehensive Order History Tracking feature will provide users with an accessible log of all orders placed, including details such as order statuses, dates, quantities, and any changes made to the order. This functionality allows Warehouse Managers and Operations Coordinators to review past orders, analyze trends, and refine inventory forecasts based on historical data. The integration will support decision-making processes by giving users a complete picture of order activities, ensuring better preparation for inventory management and customer queries.

Acceptance Criteria

User viewing the order history to analyze past orders during a stock replenishment meeting.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they access the 'Order History' section, then they should see a complete list of all past orders with statuses, dates, and quantities clearly displayed.

User searching for a specific order in order history for customer service inquiry.

Given a user is in the 'Order History' section, when they enter an order number in the search bar, then the system should return the correct order details, including status and changes made.

User generating a report based on historical order trends to improve inventory forecasting.

Given a user has access to the report generation feature, when they select the 'Generate Report' option for order history, then the system should produce a report containing trend analysis based on past order data over a specified period.

User receiving notifications on any changes made to past orders for audit purposes.

Given a user has an order in the system, when any change is made to that order, then the user should receive a notification detailing the change in status, date, and quantity.

User exporting order history to an external system for integration with accounting software.

Given a user is on the 'Order History' page, when they select the 'Export' option, then the system should successfully provide a downloadable file of the order history in CSV format.

Deadline Alerts for Delayed Shipments

"As an Operations Coordinator, I want to receive alerts when shipments are delayed so that I can manage customer expectations and take corrective actions in advance."

Description

The Deadline Alerts for Delayed Shipments feature will automatically notify users of any order delays that could impact delivery timelines. By integrating this capability, InvenTrack ensures that Operations Coordinators and Warehouse Managers are promptly informed, allowing them to take necessary action, such as communicating with suppliers or managing customer expectations. This proactive approach to order management is designed to maintain service quality and uphold customer satisfaction, preventing shipping issues from escalating into larger problems.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification for Shipment Delays during Peak Season

Given an order is placed and the delivery date is approaching, when the shipment is delayed beyond the expected delivery date, then the Operations Coordinator should receive an automatic notification via email and in-app alert informing them of the delay.

Integration with Supplier Communication Tools

Given that an order delay has been triggered, when the delay notification is sent, then the system should provide an option to contact the relevant supplier through integrated communication tools within InvenTrack.

Tracking History for Delayed Shipments

Given an order has been flagged for delay, when a user views the order details, then they should see a history log of previous notifications and updates related to that shipment.

Real-Time Updates on Customer Portals

Given a shipment delay notification has been triggered, when a customer views their order status in their portal, then they should see updated information reflecting the delay and any new estimated delivery date.

Customizable Alert Settings for Different Users

Given a user is set up in the system, when the user navigates to alert settings, then they should be able to customize the type of shipment alerts they receive (e.g., SMS, email, app notification).

Performance Metric for Delay Notifications

Given the feature is live, when tracking shipment delays over a month, then the system should be able to report on the average time taken from delay notification to user acknowledgment across all users.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a Business Owner, I want my inventory to be automatically updated in InvenTrack whenever I sell products on my online store so that I can avoid stockouts and overstocking."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement focuses on establishing seamless connections between InvenTrack and various major e-commerce platforms like Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon. This integration will allow for automatic synchronization of order data, ensuring that inventory levels are updated in real-time as sales occur. By streamlining the connection between sales and inventory management, this feature will minimize discrepancies in stock levels and facilitate efficient order fulfillment, effectively supporting business growth and reducing manual data entry tasks.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Order and Inventory Synchronization between InvenTrack and Shopify.

Given a sale is made on Shopify, when the order is placed, then the inventory level in InvenTrack should automatically decrement by the quantity sold within 5 seconds.

Notification of Inventory Updates due to E-commerce Sales.

Given that an order has been completed on WooCommerce, when the order status changes to 'completed', then InvenTrack should send an update notification to the administrator's email within 1 minute.

Error Handling for Failed Integration with Amazon.

Given that there is a failure in syncing order data from Amazon, when the integration fails, then InvenTrack should log the error details and notify the administrators via the dashboard and email immediately.

Automated Update of Stock Levels Post Purchase.

Given a customer makes a purchase on Amazon, when the payment is confirmed, then the stock levels in InvenTrack should reflect the purchase and show the updated quantity within 2 seconds.

Manual Synchronization of Inventory Levels.

Given that an operator manually triggers a sync, when the synchronization process is initiated in InvenTrack, then the system should display a success message and update all inventory levels from integrated e-commerce platforms within 3 minutes.

Comprehensive Inventory Report Generation Post Integration.

Given that the integration with all selected e-commerce platforms is complete, when an inventory report is generated, then the report should accurately reflect the stock levels and include data from all integrated platforms without discrepancies.

User-friendly Dashboard for Order Visibility

"As a Warehouse Manager, I want a user-friendly dashboard that shows the status of all orders at a glance so that I can quickly identify any issues and ensure smooth order fulfillment."

Description

The User-friendly Dashboard for Order Visibility will present a clear, concise overview of all orders in progress, including their statuses and timelines. This feature will be designed with an intuitive interface, enabling users to quickly assess the current state of their orders at a glance. Having this centralized visual representation will empower Operations Coordinators and Warehouse Managers to efficiently track orders, identify bottlenecks, and allocate resources as needed. This functionality is critical for maintaining operational efficiency and enhancing visibility into the overall order fulfillment process.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays a list of all orders, including both shipped and pending orders, in real-time as soon as a user logs in.

Given the user is logged into the dashboard, When the user views the orders section, Then all orders should be displayed with their current statuses (e.g., shipped, in progress, delayed) and timestamps of status updates.

Users can filter orders by their status or date range directly from the dashboard.

Given the user is on the dashboard, When the user selects a filter for order statuses or specifies a date range, Then only the orders matching the selected criteria should be displayed with accurate data.

Notifications are sent to users for status changes of their orders, including shipment updates and potential delays.

Given that an order status changes, When the status is updated, Then a notification should be sent to the user with details of the change, ensuring all users receive notifications within 5 minutes of the update.

Users can access detailed order information by selecting an order on the dashboard.

Given the user clicks on an order from the dashboard, When the order is selected, Then a detailed view should open displaying comprehensive order information, including item details, tracking information, and history of updates.

Dashboards can be customized to show different metrics based on user preferences.

Given the user is on their dashboard, When they select customization options, Then the dashboard should update to reflect the chosen metrics relevant to their role, allowing them to prioritize the information displayed.

Dynamic Supplier Ratings

This feature provides users with a dynamic rating system for suppliers based on performance, reliability, and customer feedback. By leveraging these ratings, users can avoid dealing with underperforming suppliers and make better purchasing decisions. Financial Analysts will benefit from this data as it supports financial forecasting and budgeting efforts.

Requirements

Supplier Performance Tracking

"As a purchasing manager, I want to track the performance of suppliers based on delivery accuracy and product quality so that I can make informed decisions and minimize the risk of sourcing issues."

Description

Implement a robust performance tracking system that monitors supplier metrics such as delivery time, order accuracy, and product quality. The system will utilize data analytics to generate insights from historical supplier performance and provide users with the ability to filter and compare suppliers based on key performance indicators (KPIs). This will not only enhance decision-making but also streamline procurement processes by identifying reliable suppliers, thus reducing risks associated with poor supplier performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier performance dashboard displays real-time metrics for delivery times, order accuracy, and product quality for selected suppliers.

Given a user has access to the supplier performance dashboard, When they select a supplier, Then the dashboard should display the latest performance metrics including delivery time, order accuracy percentage, and product quality ratings.

Users can filter suppliers based on specific performance criteria such as delivery time threshold or minimum order accuracy.

Given a user is viewing the supplier list, When they apply filters for delivery time less than 5 days and order accuracy above 95%, Then the system should display only those suppliers that meet both criteria.

Users receive a comprehensive report summarizing supplier performance over the past quarter.

Given a user requests a performance report for all suppliers for the last quarter, When the report is generated, Then it should include average delivery times, average order accuracy, and overall product quality ratings for each supplier.

Performance tracking system generates alerts for suppliers whose performance drops below set benchmarks.

Given a supplier's average delivery time exceeds 7 days, When this occurs, Then the system should automatically send an alert notification to the procurement manager.

Users can compare multiple suppliers based on selected Key Performance Indicators (KPIs).

Given a user selects two or more suppliers to compare, When they initiate the comparison, Then the system should display a comparative analysis of delivery times, accuracy rates, and product quality side-by-side.

Financial analysts access supplier performance data for budgeting purposes.

Given a financial analyst needs supplier data for financial forecasting, When they query the performance metrics, Then they should be able to obtain historical performance data that reflects trends over the past year.

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a retailer, I want to provide and view customer feedback on suppliers so that I can evaluate their service and make better sourcing choices."

Description

Develop an integration feature that allows users to input customer feedback directly related to suppliers within the inventory management system. This feedback will be correlated with supplier ratings, giving a more comprehensive view of supplier reliability and service quality. By enabling users to log experiences and assessments in real time, InvenTrack will ensure that decisions are informed by on-the-ground feedback rather than solely transactional data.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Feedback Submission Process

Given a logged-in user on the InvenTrack platform, when the user navigates to the supplier management section and selects a supplier, then the user should be able to enter and submit customer feedback regarding that supplier's performance, which will be stored in the system's database.

Feedback Impact on Supplier Rating

Given that customer feedback has been submitted for a supplier, when at least one feedback entry is recorded, then the supplier's dynamic rating should be recalculated and updated in real-time to reflect the new information within a maximum of 5 minutes.

Feedback Visibility to Users

Given that feedback has been submitted for a supplier, when other users view the supplier profile, then the feedback should be displayed in a dedicated feedback section for easy access and transparency.

Integration with Supplier Performance Metrics

Given that user feedback is correlated with supplier performance data, when generating a supplier performance report, then feedback data should be included and influence the overall supplier reliability score.

User Notification of Feedback Submission

Given that a user has submitted feedback about a supplier, when the feedback is submitted successfully, then the user should receive a confirmation notification indicating that their feedback has been recorded successfully.

Filter and Sort Supplier Ratings by Feedback

Given multiple suppliers and their associated feedback, when a user filters or sorts the supplier list based on feedback ratings, then the system should accurately reflect the user’s selection and display the suppliers in the correct order based on their feedback ratings.

Data Security for Customer Feedback

Given that feedback data is being stored, when a new feedback record is created, then the system should ensure that the feedback is securely stored and only accessible by authorized users in compliance with data protection regulations.

Automated Supplier Rating Updates

"As a business owner, I want supplier ratings to update automatically based on continuous performance data so that I can always rely on accurate information for my purchasing decisions."

Description

Create a dynamic system that automatically updates supplier ratings based on continuous performance assessment and user feedback collected over time. This system will utilize algorithms to calculate ratings, incorporating multiple factors such as delivery times, accuracy, and customer feedback. This allows users to have the most current information on supplier performance without needing manual intervention, ensuring efficient and accurate decision-making in procurement.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Supplier Rating Updates based on Performance Metrics

Given a supplier with established performance metrics, when the performance data is collected and analyzed, then the supplier's rating should automatically update within a 24-hour period to reflect current performance.

Real-time Feedback Integration for Supplier Ratings

Given that a user provides feedback on a supplier, when the feedback is submitted, then the system should process this feedback and update the supplier's rating immediately, ensuring users see updated ratings without delay.

Supplier Rating Retrieval for Procurement Decisions

Given a user accessing supplier ratings for decision-making, when they query the ratings, then the system should return the most current ratings within 2 seconds, demonstrating the efficiency of the automated updates.

User Notification for Significant Rating Changes

Given a supplier's rating changes significantly (by more than 1 full star), when this change occurs, then the user should receive a notification within 10 minutes to inform them of the rating update.

Performance Metric Gathering Methodology

Given the continuous assessment of supplier performance, when metrics such as delivery times and accuracy are recorded, then the system should accurately reflect these metrics in the rating algorithm used for updates.

Historical Performance Tracking of Suppliers

Given the automated rating system, when a user requests historical data on a supplier's ratings, then the system should provide a detailed report showing the rating changes over time, ensuring transparency and data accuracy.

Custom Reporting for Suppliers

"As a financial analyst, I want to create custom reports on supplier performance so that I can support budget forecasting and identify opportunities for cost savings."

Description

Introduce a custom reporting feature that allows users to generate tailored reports on supplier performance metrics and ratings. Users should be able to select different parameters, such as time periods, types of products supplied, and customer feedback to generate detailed reports that assist in strategy formulation and supplier evaluations. This feature will enhance users' ability to analyze supplier relationships and inform budget forecasting effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Generating Supplier Performance Reports Based on Selected Parameters

Given that a user is on the custom reporting page, when they select specific parameters (time period, product type, customer feedback) and click 'Generate Report', then a detailed report showing supplier ratings and performance metrics should be displayed accurately according to the selected parameters.

Saving Custom Reports for Future Access

Given that a user has generated a custom report, when they choose to save the report with a specific name, then the report should be stored in the user's account and be retrievable for future access without losing any data or settings.

Exporting Supplier Reports in Multiple Formats

Given that a user has generated a supplier performance report, when they select an export option, then the report should be exportable in at least three formats (PDF, Excel, CSV) without data loss or formatting errors.

Filtering Supplier Reports by Performance Ratings

Given that a user is viewing the supplier performance report, when they apply a filter for performance ratings (e.g., 'Above Average', 'Below Average'), then only the suppliers matching the selected performance criteria should be displayed in the report.

Viewing Historical Supplier Performance Data

Given that a user is on the custom reporting page, when they select a time range for historical data, then the generated report should accurately reflect supplier ratings and performance metrics over that specified historical period without discrepancies.

Automatic Updates for Supplier Ratings in Reports

Given that a user has a saved custom report, when the supplier ratings are updated in the system, then the next time the user accesses the report, it should reflect the most current ratings and performance metrics.

User Access Levels for Reporting Features

Given that an organization has multiple users with different roles, when a user accesses the custom reporting feature, then their access should align with their role's permissions, restricting or allowing access to specific reports as necessary.

Supplier Risk Assessment Module

"As a risk manager, I want to assess the financial stability of suppliers to identify potential risks that could impact my supply chain operations."

Description

Design a supplier risk assessment module that evaluates potential risks associated with each supplier, including financial stability and compliance with regulations. This module will aggregate various data points to give users a comprehensive view of supplier risks, helping them make informed purchasing decisions and enhancing the business's overall risk management strategy.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier performance evaluation based on recent delivery times and quality ratings.

Given a user accesses the Supplier Risk Assessment Module, when they input a supplier's ID, then the system should display a performance rating based on at least three months of data regarding delivery times and product quality.

Compliance verification for each supplier based on current regulations.

Given the user selects a supplier for risk assessment, when they request compliance checks, then the system should retrieve and display compliance status for at least five relevant regulations or standards pertaining to the supplier's industry.

Aggregation of financial stability indicators for supplier risk evaluations.

Given a user retrieves a supplier’s risk assessment report, when the report is generated, then it should include key financial stability indicators like credit score, debt-to-equity ratio, and revenue trends for the past three years.

User feedback integration into supplier ratings.

Given users receive supplier performance feedback, when they input feedback ratings into the system, then the supplier’s overall performance rating should update to reflect the new feedback within 24 hours.

Visualization of supplier risk data using dashboards.

Given a user accesses the Supplier Risk Assessment Module, when they view the dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of supplier risks categorized by financial stability, compliance, and performance ratings, updated in real-time.

Alerts for suppliers showing increased risk levels.

Given a user has established risk thresholds for suppliers, when a supplier exceeds those thresholds, then the system should send an automated alert to the user within 1 hour of detection.

Integration of supplier ratings into purchasing decision processes.

Given a user is creating a purchase order, when they view the supplier options, then the system should display the dynamic ratings next to each supplier’s name to aid decision-making.

Automated Supplier Suggestions

Leveraging machine learning algorithms, this feature suggests suppliers based on user preferences, past purchases, and specific inventory needs. By automating the supplier selection process, users can save time and ensure they consistently work with the best-suited suppliers for their business models.

Requirements

Supplier Preference Customization

"As a small business owner, I want to customize my supplier preferences so that I can easily find and select suppliers that best meet my specific criteria and requirements."

Description

This requirement will allow users to customize their supplier preferences based on various factors such as pricing, delivery times, product quality, and previous interactions. This feature is essential for ensuring that the automated supplier suggestions align closely with the specific needs and priorities of each business, thereby enhancing the user experience and increasing the chances of selecting the most optimal suppliers. Customizable options will include filters and settings that allow businesses to tailor their preferences, making the suggestions more relevant and actionable. By integrating this feature, InvenTrack will provide a more personalized inventory management solution that can accommodate the diverse needs of different users.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Supplier Preferences for Optimal Suggestions

Given a user is in the Supplier Preference Customization menu, when they select filters for pricing, delivery times, and product quality, then the system should save these preferences and use them to generate supplier suggestions.

User Validates Supplier Suggestions Based on Custom Preferences

Given a user has customized their supplier preferences, when the user accesses the automated supplier suggestions, then the suggested suppliers should align with the specified customization parameters.

User Updates Supplier Preference Settings

Given a user previously set supplier preferences, when they access the customization settings and modify at least one filter (like changing delivery time preferences), then the updated settings should be saved and reflected in future supplier suggestions.

User Views Performance Metrics of Suggested Suppliers

Given a user selects a supplier from the automated suggestions, when they view the supplier's profile, then the system should display performance metrics related to pricing, delivery times, and product quality based on their past interactions.

User Receives Notifications for Unselected Suppliers

Given a user has supplier preferences set, when the automated system generates suggestions, then the user should receive alerts regarding unselected suppliers that meet their preferences but are not selected due to previous settings.

User Tests the Supplier Suggestion Algorithm

Given a user has not selected any supplier preferences, when they trigger the automated supplier suggestion function, then the system should provide suggestions based on default settings that prioritize the best-performing suppliers.

User Interacts with Supplier Feedback Mechanism

Given a user reviews a suggested supplier, when they provide feedback on pricing or quality, then this feedback should update the machine learning algorithm to improve future supplier suggestions accordingly.

Intelligent Supplier Scoring

"As a procurement manager, I want to have a scoring system for suppliers so that I can quickly assess their reliability and performance based on past purchases and key metrics."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a scoring system that evaluates suppliers based on several metrics such as reliability, pricing, delivery performance, and product quality. This scoring mechanism will leverage machine learning algorithms to analyze past purchase data and supplier performance, providing users with a clear and quantifiable assessment of each supplier's suitability. By utilizing intelligent scoring, InvenTrack can deliver more accurate and beneficial supplier suggestions, thereby ensuring users can make informed decisions based on comprehensive supplier analytics. This enhancement will improve the overall sourcing strategy for businesses, reducing risks associated with supplier reliability.

Acceptance Criteria

User evaluates suppliers based on the intelligent scoring system during the procurement cycle.

Given that a user accesses the supplier suggestions interface, when they request a summary of suppliers, then they should see a list of suppliers ranked by their score along with explanations for each score based on specific metrics.

A user wants to filter suppliers based on specific metrics in the intelligent scoring system.

Given that a user is on the supplier suggestions page, when they apply filters for reliability and pricing, then the displayed suppliers should reflect only those that meet the selected criteria with updated scores accordingly.

The system needs to update supplier scores automatically based on new performance data.

Given that new purchase data is fed into the system, when the data is processed, then the suppliers' scores should be recalculated and updated in real-time without user intervention.

A user wishes to compare different suppliers based on intelligent scoring metrics for informed decision-making.

Given that a user selects multiple suppliers for comparison, when they view the comparison interface, then they should see a side-by-side breakdown of scores and metrics for the selected suppliers.

The intelligent scoring system needs to incorporate user feedback on supplier performance.

Given that a user submits feedback on a supplier, when the feedback is processed, then the supplier's score should reflect this new evaluation within the next scoring cycle.

A user wants to receive notifications about significant changes in supplier scores.

Given that a supplier's score has changed significantly, when the change is detected by the system, then the user should receive an automated notification regarding the update.

Dynamic Inventory Alerts for Supplier Changes

"As a retailer, I want to receive alerts about any changes in my suppliers' inventory so that I can adjust my restocking plans immediately and avoid potential stockouts."

Description

This requirement introduces dynamic alerting features that notify users when there are changes in supplier availability or characteristics that could impact their inventory strategies. Users will receive real-time notifications about stockouts, new product offerings, or changes in pricing from suppliers they frequently use. This proactive approach will help businesses manage their inventory more effectively and can lead to better decision-making regarding restocking and supplier selection. The integration of this feature into InvenTrack ensures that users remain informed about critical supplier updates that affect inventory management, allowing them to respond promptly to changing conditions.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when a supplier they frequently purchase from is experiencing a stockout, enabling them to take action before running out of essential inventory.

Given the user has set up notifications for supplier stockouts, When a stockout occurs, Then the user receives an immediate alert via the InvenTrack dashboard and email.

Users are alerted when a preferred supplier offers new products that meet their inventory criteria, allowing them to consider new stock options.

Given the user has defined product preferences and supplier relationships, When a supplier adds new products that fit these criteria, Then the user receives a notification showcasing those new offerings.

Users get notifications when the price of a frequently purchased product changes, enabling them to assess the impact on their cost structure.

Given the user has opted to track pricing changes for specific products, When a supplier modifies the price of those products, Then the user receives a notification detailing the price change.

InvenTrack displays a summary of supplier changes affecting inventory strategy during the weekly review, allowing users to make informed decisions about restocking.

Given it is the end of the week, When the user accesses their weekly inventory review, Then a summary of all relevant supplier changes including stockouts, new products, and price changes for the past week is presented.

Users can configure their alert preferences to choose which changes (stockouts, new products, price changes) they want to be notified about, ensuring customization to their needs.

Given the user is in the settings menu for alerts, When they select their notification preferences, Then the system will only send alerts based on those specific criteria chosen by the user.

Users can view a history of all alerts received regarding their suppliers, allowing for retrospective analysis of supplier reliability and decision-making adjustments.

Given the user selects the option to view their alert history, When the alert history is displayed, Then it includes timestamps, types of alerts (stockouts, new products, price changes), and links to the related suppliers.

User Interface Enhancements for Supplier Management

"As a user, I want a more intuitive interface for managing suppliers so that I can quickly navigate and utilize the automated suggestions and preferences without confusion."

Description

To facilitate better user interaction with the automation features, this requirement covers enhancements to the user interface specifically for supplier management. The improvements will aim to make navigation more intuitive, allowing users to easily access supplier suggestions, customize preferences, and view supplier performance metrics. This feature will enhance user satisfaction and engagement by providing a streamlined, user-friendly experience that reduces the time spent on supplier management tasks. Clear visual layouts and responsive design principles will be employed to ensure that all users, regardless of technical proficiency, can effectively utilize these tools.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the supplier management interface to find and select suppliers based on suggested preferences and past purchases.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack and navigates to the supplier management section, When the user views supplier suggestions, Then the interface should display at least three supplier options that align with the user's previous purchase patterns and preferences, with ratings and performance metrics visible.

User customizes their preferences for supplier selection to receive more relevant suggestions.

Given a user is on the supplier management interface, When the user updates their supplier preferences and hits 'save', Then the system should confirm that preferences are updated and the user should see a confirmation message, along with updated supplier suggestions reflecting those changes.

User views performance metrics for each suggested supplier to make informed decisions.

Given a user is viewing the supplier suggestions, When the user clicks on a supplier to view details, Then the system should display the supplier's performance metrics, including delivery times, reliability scores, and user ratings in a clear and concise format.

User returns to the supplier management interface after a period to assess the accuracy of the automated suggestions.

Given a user returns to the supplier management section after making previous selections, When the user checks the supplier suggestions, Then the system should display updated suggestions based on the latest transaction history and market trends, with a clear indication of changes made since the last visit.

User completes a task of selecting a supplier for a new order after evaluating suggestions.

Given a user has reviewed the suggested suppliers and their performance, When the user selects a supplier and proceeds to place an order, Then the system should successfully process the selection and prompt the user to confirm the order details before final submission, ensuring a seamless experience.

User interacts with a help feature within the supplier management interface for assistance with the new enhancements.

Given a user is navigating the supplier management interface, When the user clicks on the help icon, Then the system should present relevant resources, including FAQs, tutorial videos, and contact support information, tailored to the user’s current task.

Supplier Education and Resources

"As a business owner, I want access to resources and guides regarding supplier management so that I can improve my understanding and make better decisions with the automated suggestions provided."

Description

This requirement encompasses the development of a dedicated resources section within InvenTrack that provides users with educational materials about supplier selection and management. This will include guides, best practices, and tips on how to effectively utilize the automated supplier suggestions feature. Offering these resources can help users maximize the benefits of the system, ultimately leading to better supplier relationships and inventory practices. By providing education and support, InvenTrack seeks to empower users and enhance overall customer satisfaction, making inventory management not only easier but also more informed and responsible.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the dedicated resources section within InvenTrack to learn about supplier selection and management best practices.

Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the resources section and view the supplier education materials, then they should see at least 5 guides and 10 tips related to supplier management.

User completes a guide on supplier selection and is prompted to take a quiz to test their knowledge.

Given the user has finished reading a specific guide, when they complete a quiz related to that guide, then the system should provide immediate feedback on their performance and offer suggestions for further resources based on their score.

User seeks out additional support on utilizing automated supplier suggestions based on their business model.

Given the user accesses the resources section, when they search for support related to the automated supplier suggestions feature, then they should receive at least 3 relevant articles or videos that address frequently asked questions and best practices.

User utilizes the resources to improve their supplier relationship management after integrating InvenTrack.

Given that user has gone through the educational materials, when they apply three or more recommended practices in their supplier management process, then they should report a measurable improvement in supplier communication or inventory efficiency within one month.

User wishes to provide feedback on the educational resources available in InvenTrack.

Given the user has viewed the resources, when they select the feedback option, then they should be able to submit their feedback easily, and receive confirmation that their feedback was submitted successfully.

Admin updates the resources section with new materials and ensures they are accessible to users.

Given the admin has uploaded new educational materials, when a user visits the resources section, then the new materials should be visible and categorized appropriately within 24 hours of the update.

Supplier Communication Hub

The Supplier Communication Hub facilitates direct messaging and inquiries with suppliers within the InvenTrack platform. This feature streamlines communication between Retail Owners and suppliers, reducing turnaround times for questions about product availability or order changes, and enhancing collaborative relationships.

Requirements

Direct Messaging System

"As a Retail Owner, I want to communicate directly with my suppliers within InvenTrack so that I can quickly resolve any inquiries regarding product availability and order changes, improving my response time and maintaining smooth operations."

Description

The Direct Messaging System enables real-time communication between Retail Owners and Suppliers directly within the InvenTrack platform. This feature will allow users to send messages, share updates, and inquire about products or orders without leaving the application. Messages will be stored for future reference, providing a complete communication history that enhances transparency and accountability. The system will include notifications to alert users of new messages, ensuring timely responses and fostering stronger collaboration between Retail Owners and Suppliers. Integration with existing user profiles will streamline access to supplier information and previous conversations, creating a seamless communication experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Owner initiates a direct message to a Supplier regarding an order inquiry.

Given a Retail Owner is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when they select a Supplier and click on 'Send Message', then the message should be sent successfully and appear in both the sender's and recipient's message history.

Supplier receives a new message notification from a Retail Owner.

Given a Supplier is logged into the InvenTrack platform, when a Retail Owner sends a new message, then the Supplier should receive a notification alerting them of the new message within 5 seconds.

Retail Owner views the communication history with a specific Supplier.

Given a Retail Owner is on the Supplier Communication Hub, when they select a specific Supplier, then all previous messages exchanged with that Supplier should be displayed chronologically with correct timestamps.

Supplier updates a Retail Owner about product availability via direct messaging.

Given a Supplier has access to the Direct Messaging System, when they send a message regarding product availability, then the Retail Owner should receive the message in real-time within the application.

Retail Owner searches for a specific message within the communication history.

Given a Retail Owner is viewing their message history, when they enter a keyword in the search bar, then the system should display all messages containing that keyword within 2 seconds.

Retail Owner sends an inquiry about changing an order directly to the Supplier.

Given a Retail Owner wants to change an order, when they send a direct message specifying the changes, then the Supplier should receive the message and confirm receipt within 10 seconds.

Both Retail Owner and Supplier collaborate on resolving an issue through the Direct Messaging System.

Given an ongoing issue between a Retail Owner and a Supplier, when they exchange messages back and forth, then both parties should be able to see the complete communication thread without any delays or data loss.

Supplier Profile Management

"As a Retail Owner, I want to manage my suppliers’ profiles so that I can easily access their information and maintain accurate records, which will help me streamline my purchasing decisions."

Description

The Supplier Profile Management feature allows Retail Owners to create, edit, and manage profiles for each supplier within the InvenTrack platform. Each profile will contain essential information such as contact details, product offerings, past orders, and communication history. This comprehensive view will help users efficiently manage supplier relations and make informed decisions when sourcing products. The feature will support easy filtering and searching, enabling users to quickly locate specific suppliers based on various criteria such as location, product type, or order performance. User access levels will allow different members of the team to view or edit supplier information as required, fostering collaboration and maintaining data integrity.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Owner creates a new supplier profile with contact details and product offerings.

Given I am logged into InvenTrack, when I navigate to the Supplier Profile Management section and fill in all required fields with valid information, then I should be able to successfully save the new supplier profile, and the profile should be visible in the supplier list.

Retail Owner edits existing supplier profile information.

Given I have an existing supplier profile, when I update the supplier's contact information and product offerings, then the changes should be saved successfully and reflected in the supplier profile upon retrieval.

Retail Owner filters supplier list by product type.

Given I am in the Supplier Profile Management section, when I apply a filter for a specific product type, then the supplier list should refresh to display only those suppliers that offer the selected product type.

Retail Owner searches for a supplier using location criteria.

Given I am in the Supplier Profile Management section, when I enter a location criteria in the search bar, then the supplier list should display all suppliers that match the location entered.

Team member views supplier profile with limited access rights.

Given that I am logged in as a team member with view-only access, when I try to access the supplier profile, then I should be able to view all supplier information but should not have the option to edit any fields.

Retail Owner reviews communication history with a supplier.

Given I am viewing a supplier profile, when I navigate to the communication history section, then I should see a complete log of all previous communications with that supplier, sorted by date.

Order Status Tracking

"As a Retail Owner, I want to track the status of my orders with suppliers so that I can keep my customers informed about delivery times and manage my inventory more effectively."

Description

The Order Status Tracking feature will provide Retail Owners with real-time updates on the status of their orders placed with suppliers. By integrating with supplier systems, users will receive alerts when an order is confirmed, shipped, or delivered. This transparency not only helps in planning inventory levels but also enhances communication with customers regarding expected delivery dates. The feature will also allow users to report issues or delays directly through the tracking interface, facilitating swift resolution and maintaining customer satisfaction. Enhanced visibility into order statuses will contribute to better inventory turnover and improved cash flow management.

Acceptance Criteria

Order Confirmation Alert for Retail Owners

Given an order has been successfully placed with a supplier, When the supplier confirms the order, Then the Retail Owner should receive an immediate notification indicating that their order has been confirmed.

Shipment Notification for Retail Owners

Given an order has been shipped by the supplier, When the shipment status is updated in the system, Then the Retail Owner should receive an alert with tracking information and estimated delivery date.

Delivery Update for Retail Owners

Given an order has been delivered to the Retail Owner, When the delivery status is updated, Then the Retail Owner should receive a notification confirming the delivery, including any discrepancies reported during the delivery process.

Issue Reporting through Order Tracking Interface

Given there is a problem or delay with an order, When the Retail Owner interacts with the order tracking interface to report the issue, Then the system must successfully log the issue and notify both the Retail Owner and the supplier for resolution.

Real-Time Order Status Dashboard

Given a Retail Owner accesses their order status dashboard, When the dashboard loads, Then the system should display the real-time status of all orders, with clear indicators for confirmed, shipped, and delivered statuses.

Automated Order Status Update Frequency

Given the order status updates from suppliers, When a Retail Owner subscribes to updates, Then the system should automate the frequency of status updates at least twice a day to keep the user informed.

Supplier Feedback System

"As a Retail Owner, I want to provide feedback on my suppliers’ performance so that I can help them improve their service while also making better sourcing decisions."

Description

The Supplier Feedback System will enable Retail Owners to provide feedback on supplier performance directly within the InvenTrack platform. Users can rate suppliers based on criteria such as product quality, delivery time, and communication effectiveness. This data will be aggregated to provide an overall performance score for each supplier, helping users make informed sourcing decisions in the future. The feedback will also be shared with suppliers as constructive insights to foster improvement and enhance business relationships. The system will maintain a history of feedback submissions, allowing users to track performance trends over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Owner submits feedback on a supplier's product delivery performance after receiving an order.

Given the Retail Owner is on the Supplier Feedback System page, when they rate a supplier's delivery performance and submit feedback, then the feedback must be recorded successfully and show up in the supplier's performance history.

Retail Owner views the aggregated performance score of a supplier based on previous feedback submissions.

Given the Retail Owner selects a supplier from the Supplier Feedback System, when they view the supplier's profile, then the overall performance score based on all feedback submissions must be displayed accurately along with individual ratings and comments.

Supplier receives feedback notifications after Retail Owners submit evaluations.

Given a Retail Owner submits feedback for a supplier, when the feedback is submitted, then the supplier must receive a notification about the new feedback with a summary of ratings and comments provided.

Retail Owner tracks performance trends of suppliers over time using the feedback history.

Given the Retail Owner accesses the Supplier Feedback System, when they select the 'Feedback History' option, then they must see a detailed list of past feedback submissions with dates, ratings, and any trends in supplier performance over time.

Retail Owner rates a supplier based on multiple criteria: quality, delivery, and communication effectiveness.

Given the Retail Owner is completing a feedback form, when they provide ratings for product quality, delivery time, and communication, then all ratings must be submitted simultaneously and recorded in the system as part of the supplier's performance evaluation.

Automated Communication Alerts

"As a Retail Owner, I want to receive automated alerts about important updates from my suppliers so that I can stay informed and respond promptly to changes that may impact my inventory management."

Description

The Automated Communication Alerts feature will send customizable notifications to Retail Owners regarding important updates from suppliers. These alerts can be set for specific events such as new product launches, order updates, or changes in availability. Users can select their preferred communication channels for receiving these alerts, such as email or in-app notifications. This proactive approach ensures that Retail Owners remain informed about crucial supplier developments, enabling them to respond quickly to changes that may affect their business operations. The feature will also allow for grouping alerts by supplier or event type for better organization.

Acceptance Criteria

Retail Owner receives automated communication alerts for new product launches from suppliers.

Given a Retail Owner has subscribed to notifications for new product launches, When a supplier launches a new product, Then the Retail Owner should receive an automated email notification and an in-app alert regarding the new product.

Retail Owner configures preferred communication channels for receiving supplier updates.

Given a Retail Owner accesses the alert settings in the Supplier Communication Hub, When they select their preferred communication channels (email or in-app notifications) and save the settings, Then the system should store the preferences successfully and apply them to all future notifications.

Retail Owner receives alerts grouped by supplier for better management.

Given a Retail Owner has multiple suppliers, When they receive alerts, Then the alerts should be grouped by supplier in the notifications section for easy reference and management.

Retail Owner receives order update notifications from suppliers.

Given a Retail Owner is waiting for an order update, When the supplier updates an existing order, Then the Retail Owner should receive an automated notification via their selected channels indicating the update and any relevant details.

Retail Owner acknowledges receipt of automated communication alerts.

Given a Retail Owner receives an automated alert, When they view the alert, Then they must have the option to confirm receipt and action the notification, which then updates the alert status in the system.

Retail Owner adds a specific supplier to their watchlist for updates.

Given a Retail Owner wants to ensure they receive alerts regarding a specific supplier, When the Retail Owner adds that supplier to their watchlist in the Supplier Communication Hub, Then they should receive all pertinent alerts for that supplier.

Retail Owner customizes alert frequency for different types of notifications.

Given a Retail Owner accesses the settings for communication alerts, When they set a specific frequency (immediate, daily, weekly) for different notification types, Then the system should honor these preferences for sending alerts accordingly.

Bulk Order Discounts

This feature alerts users to potential bulk order discounts from suppliers when they are purchasing larger quantities. By optimizing order sizes and surface discount options, this feature helps users maximize procurement efficiency and improve profit margins, benefiting both Retail Owners and E-commerce Managers.

Requirements

Supplier Discount Notification

"As a Retail Owner, I want to be alerted about potential bulk order discounts from suppliers when I reach certain order quantities so that I can save money and improve my profit margins."

Description

The Supplier Discount Notification requirement enables the InvenTrack system to automatically alert users when bulk order discounts are available from their suppliers. This functionality involves integrating supplier data with a discount management module that monitors bulk purchasing patterns and identifies opportunities for savings. By notifying users of potential discounts when they are about to place orders, the feature ensures that they make informed purchasing decisions that can lead to increased cost savings and improved profit margins. This requirement is crucial for business owners who want to maximize procurement efficiency while reinforcing their budgetary constraints.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when bulk order discounts are available from suppliers after selecting multiple items in the cart.

Given a user has added items to their cart, When the total quantity of the items meets the supplier's bulk discount threshold, Then an alert should appear notifying the user of the available discount.

User can view details of the bulk order discount when notified through the alert system.

Given a user receives a bulk order discount alert, When the user clicks on the alert, Then a detailed view of the discount options should be presented, including supplier name, discount percentage, and minimum quantity required.

User can confirm acceptance of the bulk order discount and adjust their order accordingly.

Given a user is viewing the bulk order discount details, When the user opts to apply the discount, Then the system should adjust the cart total and reflect the discount applied in the order summary.

User can cancel the bulk order discount alert and continue shopping without interruptions.

Given a user receives a bulk order discount alert, When the user chooses to dismiss the alert, Then the alert should no longer be displayed and the user should be able to continue shopping seamlessly.

System logs and tracks user interactions with bulk order discount notifications.

Given a user has received multiple bulk order discount alerts, When the user interacts with the alerts, Then each interaction should be logged in the system for analytics purposes.

User receives reminders for bulk order discounts before finalizing their purchase.

Given a user is at the checkout stage of their order, When the system detects eligible bulk discounts for items in the cart, Then the user should receive a reminder alerting them of the available discounts before completing the purchase.

Dynamic Order Quantity Optimization

"As an E-commerce Manager, I want the system to suggest optimal order quantities based on my inventory and supplier discounts, so that I can streamline my purchasing process and avoid unnecessary stockouts or excess inventory."

Description

Dynamic Order Quantity Optimization involves the implementation of an intelligent algorithm that adjusts recommended order quantities based on previous purchasing data, current inventory levels, and upcoming promotions. This requirement is focused on empowering users to make smarter purchasing decisions by suggesting the optimal quantities to order that not only avail discounts but also take into account the stock levels needed to meet consumer demand. The integration of this feature enhances inventory management efficiency and helps prevent overstocking or stock shortages, thereby maintaining a more stable cash flow.

Acceptance Criteria

User reviews purchasing history and selects a product category to view recommended bulk order quantities.

Given the user views their purchasing history, when they select a product category, then the system displays recommended order quantities that maximize bulk discount opportunities based on historical data.

User is alerted to bulk order discounts when placing an order.

Given the user is in the cart with a selected product quantity, when the quantity threshold for a bulk discount is reached, then the system alerts the user about the potential discount and suggested optimal order quantity.

User adjusts the recommended order quantity based on current inventory levels and expected demand.

Given the user has received a recommendation for a bulk order quantity, when they review current inventory levels and input future sales projections, then the adjusted recommended quantity reflects their inputs and maintains potential discounts.

User processes an order using the dynamically optimized order quantity.

Given the user confirms a purchase with the optimized order quantity, when the order is processed, then the system should correctly reflect the order in both the inventory and purchasing history with applied discounts.

User analyzes the impact of dynamic order quantity optimization on overall inventory costs.

Given the user has completed a series of transactions using the optimized order quantities, when they review their inventory cost reports, then the results should show reductions in holding costs and fewer stockouts compared to previous periods.

User can access the history of notifications for bulk discounts and optimized order suggestions.

Given the user has used the dynamic order quantity feature, when they navigate to their alerts history, then they should see a comprehensive list of past bulk discount alerts and recommended order quantity notifications.

System updates recommended order quantities based on new supplier promotions.

Given the user is accessing the dynamic order quantity feature, when new supplier promotions are uploaded into the system, then the recommended order quantities should automatically refresh to reflect the new promotional discounts.

Bulk Order History Tracking

"As a Retail Owner, I want to view my bulk order history so that I can analyze my past purchasing patterns and leverage that information for future negotiations with suppliers."

Description

The Bulk Order History Tracking requirement allows users to view and analyze their past bulk orders, including details on purchased quantities, discounts received, and supplier information. The feature will facilitate data visualization to help users comprehend their purchasing behaviors and trends, enabling them to make data-driven decisions when planning future orders. This historical analysis enriches user understanding of spending patterns and helps in negotiating better terms with suppliers based on past purchasing performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses their Bulk Order History to review past bulk orders during a quarterly purchasing strategy meeting.

Given the user has logged into the InvenTrack application, when they navigate to the Bulk Order History section, then they should see a list of all past bulk orders with details including quantities purchased, discounts received, and supplier information, displayed in a clear table format.

User filters their Bulk Order History by a specific date range to analyze purchasing patterns over a quarter.

Given the user selects a start and end date on the Bulk Order History page, when they apply the filter, then the displayed orders should only include purchases made within the selected date range, reflecting accurate totals for that period.

User wants to visualize their bulk purchasing trends over the past year to identify optimal order sizes and potential savings.

Given the user accesses the Bulk Order History analysis tool, when they choose to visualize their data, then the system should generate a graphical representation (e.g., bar chart or line graph) showing trends in quantities purchased, discounts received, and suppliers over the past year.

User retrieves detailed information about a specific bulk order to negotiate better terms with a supplier.

Given the user selects a specific bulk order from the history, when they view the order details, then they should see comprehensive information including order date, supplier contact details, quantities, discounts, and any notes associated with that order for reference during negotiation.

User wants to export their Bulk Order History for offline analysis or reporting.

Given the user is on the Bulk Order History page, when they click on the export option, then the system should download a CSV file containing all displayed transaction data accurately formatted for external analysis.

User checks the Bulk Order History after recent bulk orders are added to ensure new data is reflected promptly.

Given the user has just completed a bulk order and returns to the Bulk Order History, when they refresh the page, then the most recent orders should be correctly displayed with updated details,”status”: “To Do

User analyzes their Bulk Order History to determine the impact of discounts on overall procurement costs.

Given the user navigates to the Bulk Order History, when they compare the total costs of bulk purchases with and without discounts, then the system should clearly indicate total savings, allowing the user to effectively assess the benefits of bulk purchasing strategies.

Supplier Discount Comparison Tool

"As an E-commerce Manager, I want to compare bulk order discounts from different suppliers so that I can select the most cost-effective options for my inventory needs."

Description

The Supplier Discount Comparison Tool feature equips users with the capability to compare bulk order discounts offered by various suppliers side-by-side. This requirement involves aggregating pricing and discount data from multiple supplier APIs and presenting it in an easily interpretable format. By utilizing this feature, users can make more informed procurement decisions and choose suppliers that align with their budgetary needs while maximizing cost savings. This tool enhances competitive buying strategies for users, enabling more efficient supplier management.

Acceptance Criteria

User compares bulk order discounts for three different suppliers on the Supplier Discount Comparison Tool interface.

Given the user has logged into InvenTrack, when they select bulk order quantities for comparison, then they should see a side-by-side comparison of pricing and discounts from all selected suppliers.

User adds custom bulk quantities for the supplier discount comparison.

Given the user is on the Supplier Discount Comparison Tool page, when they enter custom quantities for each supplier, then the tool should recalculate and display updated discount information reflecting those quantities.

User requests additional information on a supplier's discount offer while comparing discounts.

Given the user is currently comparing supplier discounts, when they click on a supplier's details link, then the system should display additional information including terms of service, lead times, and past customer reviews for that supplier.

User encounters an error while retrieving supplier discount data from APIs during a comparison session.

Given that the user is using the Supplier Discount Comparison Tool, when the system fails to retrieve data from a supplier API, then an error message should be displayed stating 'Unable to retrieve supplier data. Please try again later.'

User wants to save their comparison of bulk order discounts for future reference.

Given the user has completed a supplier discount comparison, when they click the 'Save Comparison' button, then the comparison should be saved to their account under 'Saved Comparisons' for easy future access.

User needs to reset the supplier discount comparison criteria to start fresh.

Given the user has made selections in the Supplier Discount Comparison Tool, when they click on the 'Reset' button, then all selections and custom input fields should be cleared, allowing for a new comparison to be made.

User looks to receive notifications for new discounts from their saved suppliers.

Given the user has subscribed to receive notifications, when suppliers update their discount offerings, then the user should receive an email alerting them of the new discounts available from their saved suppliers.

Automated Restocking Alerts Integration

"As a Retail Owner, I want to receive automated alerts when my inventory falls below a set threshold, so that I can quickly reorder and take advantage of bulk discounts."

Description

The Automated Restocking Alerts Integration requirement allows users to set customizable thresholds for inventory levels that trigger alerts to notify them when stock is low and suggest potential bulk ordering options with discounts. This feature will ensure that users can maintain optimal inventory levels without constant manual monitoring. By integrating these alerts with supplier discount information, users can act timely when they need to reorder, maximizing their savings in the process.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a low stock threshold for an item in their inventory.

Given the user is on the inventory management page, when they set a threshold for a specific item, then an alert should be triggered when the stock level falls below this threshold.

User receives an alert for low inventory levels.

Given the user has set a low stock threshold, when the inventory level is below this threshold, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of low stock.

User sees suggested suppliers for bulk discounts when low-stock alerts are triggered.

Given a low stock alert is received, when the user views the alert, then they should see a list of suggested suppliers that offer bulk discounts for the out-of-stock item.

User can customize alert preferences for different items.

Given the user is on the alert settings page, when they customize alert preferences for specific items, then these preferences should be saved, and the correct alerts should be triggered accordingly.

User can compare bulk discount options from multiple suppliers.

Given the low stock alert shows supplier suggestions, when the user clicks on the suggested suppliers, then they should be taken to a comparison page showing bulk discount options from each supplier.

User acknowledges and dismisses a low stock alert.

Given the user receives a low stock alert, when they choose to acknowledge and dismiss the alert, then the alert should be removed from their notifications and not show again until the next low stock occurrence.

User integrates automated restocking alerts with their accounting software.

Given the user has linked their accounting software to InvenTrack, when a low stock alert is triggered, then the alert should also appear in their accounting dashboard for seamless inventory management integration.

Product Availability Alerts

Users are notified when specific products become available from their preferred suppliers. This proactive feature ensures that users are informed of the latest restocks, enabling them to make timely purchasing decisions, ultimately minimizing stockouts and keeping their inventory levels optimized.

Requirements

Real-Time Availability Notifications

"As a retailer, I want to receive real-time notifications when my preferred products are restocked so that I can quickly place orders and maintain optimal inventory levels."

Description

This requirement involves the implementation of a real-time notification system that alerts users when selected products from their preferred suppliers become available. The notifications should be customizable, allowing users to set preferences for which products they wish to be alerted about. This feature will enhance user engagement and satisfaction by ensuring that they never miss out on stock availability, thereby enabling timely purchasing decisions and reducing instances of stockouts. Integration with a user-friendly dashboard will allow users to manage notification preferences easily, enhancing their overall experience with the InvenTrack platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification via email when a product from their preferred supplier is back in stock after being unavailable for a specified duration.

Given a user has selected products for availability alerts, when those products become available from a preferred supplier, then the user receives a real-time email notification confirming the product's availability.

User can customize the frequency of notifications they receive for product availability, choosing options such as instant, daily, or weekly updates.

Given a user is in the notification settings, when they adjust the frequency of alerts for product availability, then the system saves their preference and applies it to future notifications accordingly.

User can view and manage their product availability alert preferences directly from their user dashboard.

Given a user accesses their dashboard, when they navigate to the alerts settings, then they can see a list of all products selected for alerts along with options to modify or remove alerts for each product.

User receives an in-app notification when their selected product becomes available, in addition to email notifications set for that product.

Given a user has enabled both in-app and email notifications for a product, when that product becomes available, then the user receives an in-app notification immediately after the email alert is sent.

The user can disable alerts for specific products without impacting alerts for other products they have selected.

Given a user is in their notification settings, when they choose to disable alerts for a specific product, then they should only stop receiving notifications for that product without affecting alerts for others.

Supplier Integration Module

"As a shop owner, I want to integrate my supplier systems with InvenTrack so that I can automatically receive alerts about product restock without manual checking."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a robust integration module that connects InvenTrack with various supplier systems from which users source their products. This integration will automate the monitoring of product availability, ensuring that alerts are triggered as soon as items are restocked without manual intervention. By streamlining this process, users can efficiently manage their supply chain and maintain optimum stock without delays, reducing the risk of missed opportunities or excess inventory due to untracked stock levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier system integration successfully monitors product availability in real-time across multiple suppliers.

Given a supplier system is integrated with InvenTrack, when a product becomes available from the supplier, then an alert notification should be sent to the user within 5 minutes of the restock event.

Users can configure their product availability alerts based on specific criteria.

Given a user is setting up product availability alerts, when they select a product and specify alert conditions including supplier and threshold quantity, then the system should save these configurations and apply them accurately.

Notifications are received by users through multiple channels for product availability alerts.

Given a product availability alert is triggered, when the user has opted for notification via email and mobile push, then both channels should receive the alert within 10 seconds of the system detecting the availability.

Tracking of product availability updates is displayed in user dashboards.

Given a user accesses their dashboard, when products have been restocked, then the dashboard should reflect the updated availability status alongside the notifications received.

Users can disable or pause product availability alerts at any time.

Given a user has active product availability alerts, when they choose to disable a specific alert, then that alert should no longer trigger notifications until re-enabled by the user.

System accurately handles fluctuations in product availability from suppliers.

Given a product is temporarily unavailable and then becomes available again, when the supplier updates their inventory status, then InvenTrack should only notify once for that restock event and not repeatedly for subsequent availabilities within a defined timeframe.

Users can view a history of product availability alerts for analysis and decision-making.

Given a user requests historical data on product availability, when they access the reporting feature, then the system should display a timeline of all alerts received for the selected products over the specified analysis period.

Custom Notification Settings

"As a user, I want to customize my alert settings so that I receive notifications in my preferred format and for the products I care about, thereby managing my inventory efficiently."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing users with the ability to customize their notification preferences for product availability alerts. Users can choose the types of notifications they wish to receive, such as push notifications, emails, or SMS, and set thresholds for when to be notified (e.g., low stock levels, specific supplier restocks). This personalization aspect enhances user experience by allowing them to tailor their alerts based on their needs and workflow, ensuring that they receive only the most relevant information regarding their stock.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects preferred notification methods for product availability alerts.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to notification settings, then they should be able to select from options of push notifications, emails, or SMS for product availability alerts.

User sets specific thresholds for notifications based on stock levels and supplier restocks.

Given a user is in the notification settings area, when they define thresholds for notifications, then the application should allow setting low stock notification levels and supplier-specific restock alerts.

User receives notifications in their chosen format when a product becomes available.

Given a user has configured their notification settings, when a product from a preferred supplier is restocked, then the user should receive a notification in the selected format (push, email, SMS).

User updates their notification preferences after the initial setup.

Given a user is in their account settings, when they change their notification preferences, then the changes should be saved successfully and reflect in the next product availability alert.

User receives no alerts for products they have opted out of notifications.

Given a user has deselected notifications for certain products, when those products become available, then the user should not receive any notifications for those products.

User is able to preview notifications before saving their preferences.

Given a user is setting up their notification preferences, when they choose a setting, then they should be able to preview how the notification will appear in the chosen format (push, email, SMS) before saving.

User can access help documentation regarding notification settings.

Given a user is on the notification settings page, when they click on the help icon, then they should be redirected to a documentation page that explains how to customize notification settings and the importance of each option.

Product Availability Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to have a product availability dashboard so that I can easily track stock levels and restock notifications in one place, helping me make better purchasing decisions."

Description

The requirement involves creating a dedicated dashboard where users can view the availability status of their preferred products at a glance. This dashboard will display real-time data on stock levels, notifications received, and upcoming restocks, allowing users to make informed decisions quickly. With intuitive visualizations and filters, users can interactively manage their product inventory and respond proactively to availability changes, supporting overall inventory optimization efforts within the InvenTrack system.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Product Availability Dashboard after logging into the InvenTrack system to check the status of their preferred products.

Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Product Availability Dashboard, then they should see a list of all their preferred products with corresponding stock availability statuses and notifications.

The user receives a notification for a product that has just been restocked by their preferred supplier while they are actively monitoring the Product Availability Dashboard.

Given a product has been restocked, when the user views the Product Availability Dashboard, then the dashboard should display the updated stock level and highlight the product with an active notification of its availability.

User applies filters on the Product Availability Dashboard to view only the products that are currently out of stock from their preferred suppliers.

Given the user selects 'Out of Stock' from the filter options, when they apply the filter, then the dashboard should display only those products that are currently out of stock along with their preferred suppliers.

User interacts with the Product Availability Dashboard to identify trending products that frequently go out of stock.

Given the user accesses the Product Availability Dashboard, when they view the stock history for their products, then they should see a visual representation indicating which products have experienced stockouts in the last 30 days.

User wants to understand when their favorite products will next be restocked and views the restock timeline on the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Product Availability Dashboard, when they look at the upcoming restocks section, then they should see a chronological list of products along with anticipated restock dates for all their preferred products.

User logs into InvenTrack from a different device and visits the Product Availability Dashboard to verify their preferences and alerts.

Given the user logs into InvenTrack from a new device, when they access the Product Availability Dashboard, then they should see a personalized view with all their preferred products and associated alerts regardless of the device used.

User wants to receive alerts via email when a product they are interested in is back in stock.

Given that the user has set their notification preferences to receive email updates, when a preferred product is restocked, then the user should receive an email alert containing the product name, updated stock level, and a link to view it on the dashboard.

Feedback and Rating System for Suppliers

"As a user, I want to rate and provide feedback on my suppliers so that I can share my experiences and help others choose reliable suppliers based on product availability."

Description

This requirement aims to implement a feedback and rating system that allows users to review their suppliers based on product availability reliability, quality, and service. This feature will help users make better-informed decisions about their suppliers and could also guide suppliers in improving their service, creating a collaborative environment that enhances the overall effectiveness of the supply chain. Integrating this feature into InvenTrack will provide valuable insights for users in selecting suppliers based on historical performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits a feedback review for a supplier after a successful transaction, detailing their experience regarding product reliability and service quality.

Given the user is logged in, When they navigate to the supplier's page and click on 'Submit Feedback', Then they should be able to fill out a rating from 1 to 5 stars and leave a textual review which gets successfully saved.

User views supplier ratings and reviews before making a purchasing decision for a product.

Given the user is on the product page, When they click on 'View Supplier Ratings', Then they should see a list of suppliers for that product along with their average ratings and most recent reviews.

Supplier receives an alert for new feedback posted by a user about their service or product.

Given a user has submitted feedback, When the supplier logs into their account, Then they should receive a notification indicating new feedback has been posted along with the details of the feedback.

User filters suppliers based on their average ratings while searching for products.

Given the user is searching for a product, When they apply the filter for supplier ratings, Then they should see a refined list of suppliers ranked by their average rating.

User edits their previously submitted feedback for a supplier to reflect updated thoughts or experiences.

Given the user has previously submitted feedback, When they navigate to their feedback history and click 'Edit', Then they should be able to modify their rating and review, with changes being saved successfully.

System generates a summary report of supplier ratings for the past quarter to help users make informed decisions.

Given the admin requests a supplier ratings report, When the system processes the request, Then a downloadable report should be generated containing average ratings, total reviews, and comments for each supplier over the past quarter.

Barcode Scanning

With the Barcode Scanning feature, users can quickly and efficiently update inventory levels by scanning barcodes on products. This feature minimizes manual data entry, reduces the risk of errors, and accelerates stocktaking processes. Users can effortlessly check stock availability, streamline receiving processes, and enhance order accuracy, ultimately leading to improved inventory management efficiency.

Requirements

Real-time Inventory Update

"As a store manager, I want inventory levels to update automatically when I scan items so that I can avoid manual data entry and ensure accurate stock tracking."

Description

The Real-time Inventory Update requirement ensures that inventory levels are automatically updated in InvenTrack whenever a barcode is scanned. This feature minimizes manual data entry, allowing users to account for newly received stock, goods sold, or returned items instantaneously. By maintaining up-to-date records, businesses can prevent stock discrepancies and improve accuracy in inventory management, leading to better decision-making regarding stock levels and orders.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a stock update by scanning a barcode of a newly received product in the inventory management system.

Given a barcode scanner is connected to the InvenTrack application, when the user scans the barcode of the new product, then the inventory level for that product should increase by the received quantity and reflect in real-time without any delay.

User scans a barcode for a product that has been sold to ensure the inventory reflects the sale accurately.

Given the inventory is currently set to a certain level for the product, when the user scans the barcode of the sold product, then the inventory count for that product should decrease by one unit and update immediately in the system.

User returns a product to the inventory after a sale, requiring an update to the inventory levels.

Given the product being returned has its barcode scanned by the user, when the return process is initiated, then the inventory count for that specific product should increase by one unit instantly, indicating the return has been processed correctly.

A user performs a stocktake using barcode scanning to check inventory accuracy against the system records.

Given the user has a list of products to check, when the user scans the barcodes of those products, then the system should display any discrepancies between scanned quantities and recorded inventory levels in real-time to ensure accuracy.

The user receives bulk inventory shipments that require multiple barcodes to be scanned for efficient restocking.

Given the user has a batch of products with unique barcodes, when the user scans all the barcodes in quick succession, then all corresponding inventory levels should update simultaneously, reflecting the total quantities received accurately.

In case of a scanning error, the user should be able to correct the inventory count effectively.

Given the user scans an incorrect barcode by mistake, when the user confirms the error and rescans the correct barcode, then the inventory level should update to reflect the correct quantity without additional manual entry needed.

Barcode scanning is utilized during the stock replenishment process to ensure efficient inventory management.

Given a user is in the process of restocking inventory during checklist verification, when the user scans barcodes for each item as it is restocked, then the inventory levels should reflect changes in real-time and provide alerts if the quantities exceed set thresholds.

Bulk Barcode Scanning

"As a warehouse associate, I want to scan multiple products at once so that I can quickly update inventory without wasting time on individual scans."

Description

The Bulk Barcode Scanning requirement enables users to scan multiple barcodes simultaneously using compatible scanning devices. This functionality streamlines processes such as inventory receiving and stocktaking by allowing users to quickly add or update stock quantities in bulk, reducing the time spent on inventory management tasks. This feature is crucial for businesses with high inventory turnover, as it enhances operational efficiency and accuracy.

Acceptance Criteria

Bulk Barcode Scanning for Inventory Receiving

Given the user is on the inventory receiving page, when they scan multiple product barcodes using a compatible device, then all scanned products should be automatically added to the current inventory with their respective quantities adjusted accordingly.

Bulk Barcode Scanning for Stocktaking

Given the user is conducting a stocktake, when they scan multiple product barcodes in a single action, then the system should accurately reflect the updated quantities in the inventory database without errors.

Error Handling During Bulk Scanning

Given the user scans multiple barcodes, when one or more barcodes are invalid or unrecognized, then the system should display a clear message indicating which barcodes failed to scan and allow the user to proceed with the valid scans.

Real-time Inventory Update

Given the user has successfully scanned multiple barcodes, when the scanning is completed, then the inventory levels should be updated in real-time on the dashboard, allowing users to see the latest stock levels instantly.

Compatible Device Functionality

Given the user is using a barcode scanner that is listed as compatible with InvenTrack, when they perform a bulk scan, then the scanner should function correctly without delays or malfunctioning during the process.

User Permissions on Bulk Scanning

Given the user role is defined in the system, when a user attempts to access bulk barcode scanning, then the system should restrict or allow access based on their permissions defined in the user role settings.

Performance Benchmarking for Bulk Scanning

Given a maximum of 100 barcodes, when the user scans these barcodes using the bulk scanning feature, then the scanning process should complete within 5 seconds, demonstrating efficient performance under high-volume conditions.

Barcode Scanning History Log

"As a business owner, I want to view a history of all barcode scans so that I can track inventory changes and ensure accuracy in my records."

Description

The Barcode Scanning History Log requirement provides a log of all barcode scans performed within the system. This feature enables users to track changes in inventory levels over time, allowing them to identify patterns, discrepancies, and audit trails for inventory transactions. This capability enhances accountability and provides valuable insights into inventory management practices, ultimately helping businesses maintain better control over their stock.

Acceptance Criteria

User scans a product barcode to update inventory levels during stocktaking.

Given that the user has scanned a valid barcode, when the scan is processed, then the inventory level for that product should be updated in real-time in the system.

User views the history log of scanned barcodes after performing multiple scans throughout the day.

Given that various barcodes have been scanned, when the user accesses the Barcode Scanning History Log, then they should see a chronological list of all scans with timestamps and product details.

User analyzes inventory discrepancies by reviewing the history log of barcode scans.

Given that there are discrepancies in the inventory count, when the user filters the Barcode Scanning History Log by date range, then they should be able to identify specific scans that correspond to inventory changes that led to the discrepancies.

User audits inventory transactions using the history log for compliance purposes.

Given that the system maintains a detailed record of all barcode scans, when an auditor requests a report, then the system should generate a comprehensive log of all transactions associated with scanned barcodes for the specified period.

User attempts to scan a barcode that does not exist in the inventory database.

Given that the user scans a nonexistent barcode, when the scan is processed, then an error message should be displayed indicating that the product is not found, and the inventory level should remain unchanged.

User scans multiple barcodes in quick succession during receiving processes.

Given that the user scans multiple product barcodes, when all scans are completed, then the system should reflect the correct inventory levels without delay, maintaining accurate logs for each scanned item.

Customizable Scan Notifications

"As an inventory manager, I want to receive notifications when stock levels are low after scanning certain items so that I can reorder in a timely manner and avoid stockouts."

Description

The Customizable Scan Notifications requirement allows users to set up alerts or notifications triggered by specific barcode scans. For instance, if a particular product's stock levels drop below a predefined threshold after a scan, the system can generate a notification to prompt reordering. This feature is essential for proactive inventory management, helping users react promptly to stock issues and avoid stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a customizable scan notification for a product with a low stock threshold during the inventory management process.

Given the user is on the inventory management page, when they scan a barcode of a product with defined low stock levels, then the system should trigger an alert to notify the user that the stock is below the defined threshold.

User scans a product's barcode when the stock level is sufficient, thereby confirming that notifications are only generated for low stock.

Given the user scans a barcode of a product that is above the low stock threshold, when the scan is successful, then no notification should be generated by the system.

User receives a notification after scanning a product with a stock level below the predefined threshold to prompt reordering.

Given the user has scanned a barcode of a product that is under the predetermined minimum stock level, when the scan is processed, then the system should display a notification prompting the user to reorder the product.

User attempts to customize the stock level threshold for notifications and saves their settings successfully.

Given the user is in the settings menu, when they change the low stock threshold and save the settings, then the new threshold should be reflected accurately in the inventory management system and trigger the correct notifications accordingly.

User checks the history of scan notifications to review past alerts triggered by barcode scans.

Given the user navigates to the notifications history section, when they access the past alerts, then they should see a complete list of notifications triggered by barcode scans, including timestamps and product details.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an online seller, I want my inventory to automatically update when I scan items so that my online store accurately reflects what is in stock at all times."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement ensures that barcode scanning functionalities seamlessly connect with major e-commerce platforms utilized by businesses. This integration facilitates automatic updates of online inventory levels as products are scanned, syncing physical inventory with e-commerce listings in real-time. This feature is crucial for sellers who operate both in physical locations and online, helping maintain accuracy across all sales channels.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Barcode Scanning with E-commerce Platforms for Inventory Updates

Given that a product is scanned using the Barcode Scanning feature, when the scan is successfully processed, then the corresponding inventory level on the integrated e-commerce platform should automatically update in real-time.

Real-time Synchronization of Physical and Online Inventory Levels

Given that inventory levels are adjusted through barcode scanning, when the update is made, then both physical and online inventory levels should reflect the same quantities within 5 seconds of the scan.

Error Handling for Scanning Non-existent Barcodes

Given that a user scans a barcode that does not exist in the inventory system, when the system processes the scan, then the user should receive a clear error message indicating that the barcode is invalid and a prompt to either add the product or correct the barcode.

Compatibility with Multiple E-commerce Platforms

Given the implementation of the barcode scanning integration, when a product is scanned, then inventory updates must reflect accurately across at least three major e-commerce platforms (e.g., Shopify, WooCommerce, Magento) without errors.

User Notifications for Inventory Updates

Given that an inventory level has been updated through barcode scanning, when the update occurs, then the user should receive a notification confirming the update and current inventory status for that product.

Audit Log for Barcode Scanning Activities

Given that barcode scans are conducted, when a scan is processed, then an entry should be automatically created in the audit log detailing the time of scan, user ID, product ID, scanned quantity, and any adjustments made to the inventory levels.

Seamless User Experience During High Traffic Times

Given that multiple users are utilizing barcode scanning simultaneously during peak business times, when scans are conducted, then the system must handle at least 100 scans per minute without performance degradation or errors.

Real-Time Stock Alerts

The Real-Time Stock Alerts feature keeps users informed about critical inventory levels while they are on the move. Users receive instant notifications when stock levels fall below preset thresholds or when items are running low. This proactive approach allows businesses to respond quickly to inventory needs, preventing stockouts and ensuring that they always have the right products available.

Requirements

Threshold Notification Settings

"As an inventory manager, I want to set custom stock thresholds for each product so that I receive notifications when stock levels are low, allowing me to react promptly to avoid stockouts."

Description

The Threshold Notification Settings requirement allows users to define specific stock level thresholds for different products within the InvenTrack system. Users can set minimum stock levels that will trigger real-time alerts, ensuring they are informed whenever stock falls below the set limits. This feature enhances the management of inventory by preventing stockouts and ensuring that inventory levels meet customer demand. It also allows businesses to customize settings based on unique product requirements, which can alleviate the burden on managers and optimize stock levels efficiently.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a minimum stock threshold for a product in the InvenTrack system.

Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack system, when they navigate to the product settings page and input a minimum stock level for a selected product, then the system should save this threshold and respond with a confirmation message that the threshold has been set successfully.

User receives an alert when stock falls below the defined threshold.

Given a user has previously set a minimum stock threshold and inventory of that product falls below the defined level, when the stock level is updated, then the system should send a real-time notification alerting the user that the product is running low on stock.

User can modify an existing stock threshold for a product.

Given a user is on the product settings page, when they select a product with an existing stock threshold and change the threshold value, then the system should update the threshold value and display a success message confirming the change.

User attempts to set a threshold lower than current stock levels.

Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack system, when they attempt to set a minimum stock threshold that is higher than the current stock level of that product, then the system should prevent the action and display an error message indicating that the threshold must be lower than the current stock level.

User can view all products and their associated threshold levels.

Given a user is viewing the inventory list, when they navigate to the thresholds section, then the system should display a list of all products along with their current stock levels and set minimum thresholds side by side for easy comparison.

User receives a summary of threshold settings for auditing purposes.

Given a user is on the settings dashboard, when they request a report of all threshold settings, then the system should generate and display a summary report including product names, current stock levels, and defined thresholds in a clear format.

Mobile Push Notifications

"As a business owner, I want to receive mobile push notifications about low stock levels so that I can ensure timely reordering without constantly checking the application."

Description

The Mobile Push Notifications requirement enables users to receive instant notifications on their mobile devices whenever stock levels reach critical limits. This functionality ensures that users can stay informed and manage inventory effectively, even when they are away from their desks. The alerts can be tailored based on user preferences and can include specific actions to take when notified. This requirement not only promotes prompt responses to inventory needs but also enhances user engagement with the InvenTrack platform by keeping users updated on crucial information.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a mobile push notification when inventory levels for a specific product fall below the defined threshold.

Given a user has set a low stock threshold for a product, when the inventory level of that product falls below this threshold, then a mobile push notification is sent to the user’s device.

User can customize the types of alerts they want to receive for their inventory.

Given a user is in their notification settings, when they select the types of alerts (such as stock low, stock replenished), then the system saves these preferences and applies them immediately for future notifications.

User receives a push notification detailing recommended actions based on inventory levels.

Given a product has reached a critical stock level, when the push notification is sent, then it includes actionable steps like 'order more' or 'notify supplier'.

User can receive notifications for multiple products based on their individual stock thresholds.

Given a user has set different threshold levels for multiple products, when any of these products reach their set thresholds, then the user receives individual push notifications for each product.

User's mobile device can receive push notifications regardless of the app being in the foreground or background.

Given the InvenTrack app is installed on the user’s mobile device, when the app is not actively being used, then the user still receives push notifications for stock alerts in real-time.

User can view a history of received stock alerts to track inventory alerts over time.

Given a user opens the notifications history tab, when they view the past alerts, then it displays a list of all stock notifications received, including timestamps and product details.

Stock Level Reports

"As a retail manager, I want to generate reports on stock levels to analyze trends so that I can make better purchasing decisions based on historical data."

Description

The Stock Level Reports requirement allows users to generate detailed reports on stock levels over time, showing trends and patterns in inventory usage. These reports can be customized to filter by product categories, time periods, or specific stock items. By providing insights into inventory performance, this feature helps businesses make informed decisions about restocking, product discontinuation, or promotional strategies. This functionality is essential for enhancing decision-making capabilities and overall inventory management effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a stock level report for a specific product category over the last month to analyze inventory trends.

Given the user selects a product category and a date range of the last month, when they request a stock level report, then the system generates a report displaying stock levels, trends, and patterns for that category within the specified date range.

User customizes a stock level report to include specific stock items and exports it to PDF format.

Given the user selects specific stock items and customizes the report, when they choose to export the report, then the system exports the report to PDF format, maintaining all customizations and formatting.

User views stock level reports on the dashboard with graphical representations of data.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they navigate to the stock level reports section, then the system displays graphical representations of stock level trends, along with numerical data for easy analysis.

User applies multiple filters on stock level reports to view specific insights concerning overstocked items.

Given the user applies multiple filters such as date range, product category, and stock level thresholds, when they generate the report, then the system only displays data that meets all selected filter criteria, enabling focused insights.

User schedules a recurring stock level report to be sent via email every week.

Given the user configures a stock level report to be sent via email weekly, when the schedule is saved, then the system automatically sends the report to the specified email every week without user intervention.

User accesses historical stock level reports to compare inventory data from different time periods.

Given the user selects two different time periods for comparison, when they request a comparison report, then the system provides a report that highlights differences in stock levels between the two selected periods.

User queries the total stock levels for a specific product across all categories and receives instant feedback.

Given the user searches for a specific product name, when they submit the query, then the system displays the current total stock level of that product across all categories in real-time.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want my inventory levels to sync automatically with my online store so that I don't have to manually update stock and avoid stockouts or overselling."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement enables InvenTrack to sync inventory data in real-time with major e-commerce platforms like Shopify and WooCommerce. This integration ensures that stock levels are accurately reflected across all sales channels, reducing the risk of overselling or stockouts. By keeping online stores updated with accurate inventory data, businesses enhance their operational efficiency and improve customer satisfaction by providing reliable product availability information.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when inventory for a specific product drops below the threshold set in InvenTrack while managing inventory on the go.

Given that a product has a stock threshold set, When inventory for that product drops below the threshold, Then the user should receive a real-time notification on their mobile device.

InvenTrack synchronizes inventory levels with Shopify in real-time during peak sales events.

Given that a sale occurs on Shopify, When a product's inventory level changes due to a sale, Then InvenTrack should update the stock level in less than 5 minutes and reflect it on both platforms accurately.

Users can configure multiple product stock thresholds within InvenTrack based on different sales strategies.

Given that a user is managing their products in InvenTrack, When they set different stock thresholds for multiple products, Then the system should successfully save the configurations and the user should be able to view them in the dashboard.

User checks for synchronizations status between InvenTrack and WooCommerce to ensure there are no errors.

Given that users want to check synchronization status, When they navigate to the integration settings screen, Then they should see the synchronization status along with any recent error notifications.

A regular report is generated detailing stock levels and alert history for all products integrated with e-commerce platforms.

Given that a user requests a stock report, When they generate the report, Then it should include current stock levels, the number of alerts triggered in the last month, and any products that are currently below threshold.

InvenTrack allows users to customize alert preferences for different product categories.

Given that a user is managing category settings, When they adjust alert preferences for a specific category, Then they should receive alerts tailored to the selected category settings without affecting others.

Users can test the integration functionality with e-commerce platforms to ensure it operates as expected before going live.

Given that a user is in the integrations section, When they initiate a test for the integration, Then the system should confirm that the test was successful or provide error messages for any failure points, allowing the user to make necessary adjustments.

Automated Restocking Alerts

"As a warehouse supervisor, I want to receive automated alerts when stock needs to be reordered so that I can streamline the purchasing process and prevent stockouts."

Description

The Automated Restocking Alerts requirement sends automatic reminders to users to reorder stock when it’s forecasted that inventory will fall below the set minimum levels based on historical sales patterns. This proactive feature reduces the likelihood of stockouts by reminding business owners to replenish inventory before it runs low, thereby optimizing the ordering process. Combining sales forecasting with inventory management ensures that businesses maintain sufficient stock levels at all times, promoting operational efficiency and customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automated restocking alert when the inventory for a specific product falls below the preset threshold based on historical sales data.

Given the user has set a minimum stock level for a product, when the inventory for that product falls below this level, then the user should receive an alert notification via email and in-app notification.

User can customize the minimum stock level for different products in the inventory management system.

Given the user accesses the product settings, when the user updates the minimum stock level for a product and saves the changes, then the updated stock level should be saved successfully and reflect accurately in the inventory dashboard.

User receives a summary report of all products that require replenishment based on the automated restocking alerts feature at the end of the week.

Given the week has concluded, when the user selects the 'Weekly Inventory Report' option, then the user should receive a report displaying all products that fall below the minimum stock level along with suggested reorder quantities.

User has the ability to turn on and off automated restocking alerts for specific products as needed.

Given the user needs to disable alerts for particular products, when the user accesses the alert settings for a product and turns off the automated reminder, then the system should not send alerts for that product until the user enables it again.

User can view historical sales data to determine optimal restocking thresholds for inventory items.

Given the user navigates to the 'Sales History' section, when the user selects a product, then they should be able to view a graphical representation of sales over the past months to help inform restocking decisions.

System integrates with external sales data sources to adjust the automated restocking alerts based on real-time sales trends.

Given the integration is enabled, when the system receives new sales data from an external source, then the automated restocking alert thresholds should adjust automatically based on the latest sales patterns and inventory levels.

User can access help documentation related to setting up automated restocking alerts within the application.

Given the user seeks assistance, when they click the 'Help' icon in the automated restocking alerts settings, then the user should be taken to a comprehensive help section that explains how to set up and modify restocking alerts.

Stock Level Visualization Dashboard

"As a store manager, I want a visual dashboard that shows me my current inventory status so that I can quickly identify which products need restocking without sifting through data manually."

Description

The Stock Level Visualization Dashboard requirement provides users with a graphical interface that displays real-time insights into current stock levels across all products. This feature includes visual representations such as graphs and indicators to quickly convey inventory status at a glance. By enabling users to easily understand stock levels, this dashboard enhances user experience and aids in fast decision-making regarding inventory management, including recognizing items that may soon need restocking.

Acceptance Criteria

Stock Level Visualization Dashboard displays the current stock level data accurately when the user accesses the dashboard through the InvenTrack application.

Given a user has logged into the InvenTrack application, when they access the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard, then they should see real-time data reflecting current stock levels for all products.

Users receive an accurate visual representation of low-stock items on the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard through color-coded indicators.

Given the user is on the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard, when stock levels are at or below the preset thresholds, then the affected items should be highlighted in red to indicate low stock.

The Stock Level Visualization Dashboard updates automatically to reflect real-time changes in inventory levels without requiring manual refresh.

Given the user is viewing the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard, when an inventory change occurs (such as a sale or new stock arrival), then the dashboard should update automatically within 5 seconds to reflect the change.

Users can easily interpret graphical representations of stock levels on the dashboard without confusion or misinterpretation.

Given the user is on the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard, when they hover over any graphical element (like a bar or pie chart), then a tooltip should provide detailed information about the stock level of the respective item, including the exact number of units in stock.

The Stock Level Visualization Dashboard allows users to filter stock levels based on specific criteria, such as product categories or stock status.

Given the user is on the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard, when they apply a filter for specific categories (like 'Electronics') or stock statuses (like 'Low Stock'), then only relevant stock levels corresponding to their filter choice should be displayed.

The dashboard maintains high performance and complies with usability standards for fast loading and user navigation experience.

Given the user accesses the Stock Level Visualization Dashboard, when they interact with different visual elements, then the response time for each action should not exceed 3 seconds to ensure an efficient user experience.

Order Fulfillment Tracker

The Order Fulfillment Tracker enables users to monitor and manage orders from their mobile devices. Users can view the status of incoming and outgoing shipments, track delivery times, and receive alerts for any delays. This feature enhances operational efficiency by providing insights into order processes, ensuring timely fulfillment, and improving customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Real-time Shipment Updates

"As a retail business owner, I want to receive real-time updates on my shipments so that I can keep my customers informed and manage their expectations regarding delivery times."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing users with real-time updates on the status of their shipments, including notifications for when orders are processed, shipped, out for delivery, and delivered. This feature will enhance user experience by keeping users informed about their order status and expected delivery times, thus improving transparency and enabling better planning for inventory management. The requirement will involve integrating with shipping carriers' APIs to pull shipment tracking data and display it within the InvenTrack platform, ensuring users have seamless access to parcel statuses directly from their mobile devices.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when their order status changes from 'Processed' to 'Shipped'.

Given an order is processed, when the status changes to 'Shipped', then the user should receive an immediate notification on their mobile device indicating the new status.

User can view real-time shipment tracking information from a mobile device.

Given that a shipment is being tracked, when the user accesses the Order Fulfillment Tracker, then they should see up-to-date tracking information including the current status and estimated delivery time.

User is alerted about any delays in their shipment.

Given a shipment is delayed, when the tracking information is updated, then the user should receive a notification alerting them about the delay as soon as the update is available.

User should be able to access shipment history for their orders.

Given that a user has previously placed orders, when the user accesses their shipment history, then they should see a list of past shipments along with their respective statuses and timestamps.

Integration with multiple shipping carriers.

Given that the platform supports various shipping carriers, when a user inputs a tracking number, then the system should be able to retrieve and display the correct tracking information from the respective carrier's API.

User can refresh shipment tracking information.

Given that a user is viewing their shipment details, when they press the refresh button, then the system should fetch the latest tracking data and update the display accordingly.

Delivery Delay Notifications

"As a fulfilled orders manager, I want to receive notifications for delivery delays, so that I can proactively communicate with customers and manage their expectations about their orders."

Description

This requirement aims to implement a notification system that alerts users to any delays in the delivery of their orders. By proactively communicating delays, users can take necessary actions such as updating customers or adjusting inventory management strategies. The system will trigger alerts based on tracking information from carriers and will allow customization of notification preferences, ensuring users are alerted via their preferred method (e.g., push notifications, email, SMS). This feature will help maintain customer satisfaction by allowing users to communicate potential delays effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification about a delivery delay for an order they placed, ensuring they can take action.

Given a delayed shipment is detected by the system, when the user has enabled delivery delay notifications, then the user should receive an alert via their preferred method (push notification, email, SMS).

User customizes notification preferences within the InvenTrack application for delivery delays to fit their business needs.

Given the user is in the notification preferences section of InvenTrack, when they modify their alert settings for delivery delays, then these settings should be saved and applied for all relevant notifications going forward.

User verifies that the notification they received about a delivery delay includes accurate order and tracking information.

Given the user receives a delivery delay notification, when they open the notification, then the message should contain the order ID, expected delivery date, new estimated delivery date, and the reason for the delay.

A retailer wants to ensure that customers are informed proactively about delays after receiving delivery delay notifications from InvenTrack.

Given that a delay notification has been triggered for an order, when the user views the delivery delay alert, then they should have the option to send pre-written customer communication messages directly from the alert interface.

User checks their notifications history to see past alerts regarding delivery delays.

Given the user accesses the notifications history tab in the InvenTrack application, when the tab is opened, then the user should see a list of all past delivery delay notifications with timestamps and order details.

User encounters a scenario where the notification settings do not correspond to their preferences after a system update.

Given a system update has been implemented, when the user checks their notification preferences, then all previously set preferences for delivery delay notifications should remain intact and functional.

Users want to ensure that they can turn off delivery delay notifications if they choose not to receive them anymore.

Given the user is in the notification preferences section, when they disable delivery delay notifications, then they should no longer receive alerts for any future delivery delays for their orders.

Mobile Order Management Interface

"As a business owner, I want to manage my orders from my mobile device so that I can efficiently handle operations while away from my desk."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a dedicated mobile interface that allows users to manage orders directly from their smartphones or tablets. Users should be able to view, edit, and manage incoming and outgoing shipments, including easy access to shipment details, invoice information, and order status. The mobile interface should also facilitate quick decision-making on inventory levels and order adjustments while on the go, enabling greater operational efficiency. This feature will involve responsive design and optimizations for various mobile devices to ensure a seamless user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into the InvenTrack mobile application to manage orders while out for a business meeting.

Given the user is authenticated, when they navigate to the 'Order Management' section, then they should see a list of all incoming and outgoing shipments with their current status displayed clearly.

A user needs to edit shipment details directly from their mobile device due to a last-minute change in an order.

Given the user selects a specific shipment from the 'Order Management' list, when they tap on 'Edit', then they should be able to modify shipment details such as destination address, delivery date, and quantity, and save these changes successfully.

The user receives a notification regarding a delay in shipment while on the go.

Given the user has enabled notifications, when there is a delay in any outgoing shipment, then the user should receive a push notification with details about the delay and an expected resolution time.

A user wishes to view comprehensive details about an order while at a vendor's location.

Given the user taps on a specific order, when they access the order details page, then the page should display shipment details, exact invoice information, and order status in a clear and readable format.

The user is checking inventory levels while managing orders from their mobile interface to make quick decisions.

Given the user is on the order management interface, when they tap on a product linked to an incoming shipment, then they should see real-time inventory levels and projections regarding stock depletion based on current orders placed.

The user attempts to manage orders from various mobile devices to validate the responsiveness of the interface.

Given the user accesses the mobile interface from different smartphones and tablets, when they navigate through the 'Order Management' section, then the interface should remain fully functional and visually consistent across all devices.

User Customizable Alert Settings

"As a logistics manager, I want to customize my alert settings for order statuses, so that I receive notifications that are relevant and timely for my workflow without being overwhelmed by excessive alerts."

Description

This requirement allows users to customize their alert settings based on their preferences for notifications regarding various order statuses (e.g., shipped, delivered, delayed). The customization options should include frequency, channels (push notifications, email, SMS), and specific order conditions that trigger alerts. By empowering users with flexibility in their notification settings, this feature enhances user engagement, reduces notification fatigue, and improves the overall user experience with the InvenTrack platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User Sets Up Alert Preferences for Delayed Shipments

Given a user is logged into their account, when they navigate to the alert settings page and select 'Delayed Shipments', then they should be able to customize frequency options (daily, weekly, instant), choose channels (push notifications, email, SMS), and save their settings successfully.

User Receives Alerts for Shipped Orders

Given a user has set up push notifications for shipped orders, when an order status changes to 'Shipped', then the user should receive a push notification on their mobile device within 5 minutes of the status change.

User Modifies Alert Settings for Multiple Order Conditions

Given a user has previously set up alert settings for 'Shipped' and 'Delayed' orders, when they update their settings to add alerts for 'Delivered' orders, then all settings should be saved and reflect the new preferences appropriately in the alert summary.

User Chooses Notification Channels for Alerts

Given a user is on the alert settings page, when they select multiple notification channels (push notification, email, SMS) for 'Delayed Orders', then alerts should be sent through all selected channels when the order status triggers a delay condition.

User Verifies Alerts are Consistent Across Devices

Given a user has set alert preferences on their mobile device, when they log into the InvenTrack platform from a desktop and check the alert settings, then the alert preferences should match those set on the mobile device without any discrepancies.

User Receives No Alerts when Preferences are Turned Off

Given a user has turned off all notification preferences for their account, when an order status changes (e.g., shipped, delayed), then the user should not receive any notifications through the selected channels.

Historical Order Tracking Reports

"As a data analyst, I want to access historical order tracking reports, so that I can analyze delivery performance and make informed decisions to enhance our fulfillment processes."

Description

This requirement involves generating reports that provide insights into historical order fulfillment performance, including metrics such as average delivery time, frequency of delays, and order accuracy. Users can access these reports to analyze trends, identify issues, and improve future fulfillment strategies. The reports will be customizable, allowing users to select specific date ranges and filter data by order status, region, or product category. This feature will contribute to better decision-making by providing actionable insights that help optimize inventory management and fulfillment processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Historical Order Tracking Reports feature to analyze order fulfillment performance data for a specific time period and to gain insights into average delivery times and accuracy rates.

Given that the user selects a specific date range and applies filters by order status, then the report should generate metrics showing average delivery time, frequency of delays, and order accuracy.

User generates a historical report and wants to compare the data between two different product categories to evaluate fulfillment performance.

Given that the user filters the report by two distinct product categories, when the report is generated, then the performance metrics for each category should be displayed side by side for comparison.

User receives a report that indicates a high frequency of delays in certain regions and wants to utilize this information to improve fulfillment strategies.

Given that the historical report shows a high frequency of delays filtered by region, when the user views the episode details, then the specific order numbers and average delay times should be accessible for further analysis.

User needs to export the historical order tracking report for presentation to management.

Given that the user generates a historical order tracking report, when the user selects the export option, then the report should be downloadable in multiple formats, including PDF and Excel.

User wants to set a predefined filter in the Historical Order Tracking Reports to quickly access relevant data for frequent analysis.

Given that the user saves a predefined filter for date ranges and order statuses, when the user accesses the Reporting feature again, then the saved filter options should be available for quick application.

User intends to share historical order tracking report insights with team members via email directly from the application.

Given that the user generates a historical report, when the user selects the email sharing option, then the report should be sent directly to the specified email addresses with a summary of key metrics included in the body of the email.

User is reviewing the historical order tracking reports and wants real-time updates if any metrics exceed preset thresholds.

Given that the user sets threshold values for metrics such as average delivery time and order accuracy, when those metrics exceed the preset thresholds, then the system should send an alert notification to the user.

Mobile Dashboard

The Mobile Dashboard offers a comprehensive view of inventory metrics and KPIs right at users' fingertips. Retail owners and warehouse managers can access real-time data on stock levels, sales trends, and performance analytics. This user-friendly interface allows for quick decision-making and effective monitoring of inventory health while on the go.

Requirements

Real-time Stock Monitoring

"As an inventory manager, I want to monitor stock levels in real-time so that I can quickly respond to low inventory and maintain optimal stock levels to meet customer demand."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a real-time stock monitoring capability in the Mobile Dashboard, allowing users to view current stock levels across all inventory locations instantly. The functionality will provide alerts and notifications when stock levels reach designated thresholds, helping prevent stockouts and ensuring optimal inventory turnover. Integration with the existing inventory database will enable accurate, up-to-date information to be displayed on the dashboard, increasing user confidence in decision-making and enhancing operational efficiency by allowing for quick adjustments based on real-time data.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Mobile Dashboard from a mobile device to check current stock levels before making a purchase order.

Given the user is logged into the Mobile Dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Stock Monitoring' section, then they should see real-time stock levels updated at most every 5 seconds for all inventory locations.

A retail owner receives a stock alert notification when levels of a particular item fall below a defined threshold.

Given the inventory level for a selected item falls below the designated threshold, when the user accesses the Mobile Dashboard, then they should see a visual alert for that item along with a notification in their app alert tab.

Warehouse managers use the Mobile Dashboard to review historical sales trends to inform stock replenishment decisions.

Given the user selects the 'Sales Trends' option within the Mobile Dashboard, when they view the data, then they should see graphical representations of sales trends over the past 30 days, updated in real-time with the latest sales data.

The Mobile Dashboard displays alerts for multiple items that are approaching stockout status.

Given multiple items are nearing their low stock thresholds, when the user opens the Mobile Dashboard, then an aggregated list of items with low stock alerts should be displayed prominently at the top of the screen.

A user wants to customize the stock alert thresholds for different inventory items through the Mobile Dashboard.

Given the user navigates to the 'Settings' in the Mobile Dashboard, when they modify the low stock threshold for an item and save the changes, then the new thresholds should be reflected in the stock monitoring alerts immediately.

The Mobile Dashboard integrates with the existing inventory database to provide accurate stock levels.

Given the Mobile Dashboard is connected to the inventory management system, when a change in stock level occurs in the database, then the Mobile Dashboard should reflect the updated stock level within 5 seconds.

Sales Trend Visualization

"As a retail owner, I want to visualize sales trends so that I can forecast future inventory needs and make informed purchasing decisions."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing dynamic visualizations of sales trends within the Mobile Dashboard, enabling users to identify patterns and seasonal fluctuations in product sales easily. The implementation will include graphs and charts that reflect sales data over custom time periods, helping business owners make informed inventory decisions based on historical performance. This feature enhances the understanding of sales dynamics and helps in predicting future inventory needs, ultimately supporting better demand forecasting and inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales trend analysis for optimal reordering decisions.

Given a user accesses the Mobile Dashboard, when they navigate to the Sales Trend Visualization, then they must see a graphical representation of sales data for the selected product over the last six months, displaying both volume and revenue trends.

Comparison of sales trends across different time periods to identify patterns.

Given a user selects a custom time range in the Sales Trend Visualization, when they choose two different time periods for comparison, then the dashboard displays side-by-side graphs that clearly highlight differences in sales performance.

Real-time updates of sales data reflecting inventory decisions.

Given a warehouse manager reviews the Sales Trend Visualization on the Mobile Dashboard, when an order is processed that affects stock levels, then the sales trend visuals must automatically refresh to reflect the latest data without needing to manually reload.

User ability to export sales trend data for reporting purposes.

Given a user utilizes the Mobile Dashboard, when they select the export option for the Sales Trend Visualization, then they must receive a downloadable report in CSV format containing all relevant sales metrics for the specified time period.

Interactive elements to drill down into specific sales data.

Given a user clicks on a specific data point within the Sales Trend Visualization, when they request more information, then a detailed tooltip or modal must appear showing underlying transaction details such as sale date, quantity, and customer information.

User access to historical performance analytics for informed decision-making.

Given an inventory manager uses the Sales Trend Visualization, when they select a product, then the dashboard must provide historical sales analytics, including trends over the previous year, to help anticipate future needs.

KPI Tracking and Reporting

"As a warehouse manager, I want to track KPIs related to inventory so that I can evaluate our performance and identify areas for improvement in our inventory processes."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a feature within the Mobile Dashboard that allows users to track key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory management, such as turnover rates, stockouts, and restock alerts. Users can customize their KPI reports and receive insights that help evaluate business performance over time. This functionality aids in strategic planning and following trends, enabling users to optimize inventory processes and improve operational efficiency through timely reporting.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile dashboard users need to view real-time inventory turnover rates to assess product performance and make informed purchasing decisions during peak shopping hours.

Given the user is logged into the Mobile Dashboard, when they navigate to the KPI tracking section, then they should see real-time turnover rates for all products displayed, updated at least every 15 minutes.

Users want to receive automated alerts when stock levels drop below a defined threshold to prevent stockouts during high demand periods.

Given the user has set a minimum stock level for a product, when the stock level reaches that threshold, then an automated alert should be sent to the user's mobile device within 5 minutes.

Management wishes to analyze stockout occurrences to identify trends and improve inventory strategies over the last quarter.

Given the user selects the stockout report for the last quarter, when the report is generated, then it should display detailed statistics with trend analysis, including frequency and duration of stockouts for each product.

Supply chain managers need to customize KPI metrics displayed on their mobile dashboard to focus on specific performance indicators relevant to ongoing projects.

Given the user accesses the KPI customization settings, when they select their desired KPIs to display and save the settings, then the Mobile Dashboard should reflect those changes immediately.

Users are interested in understanding sales trends over specific time periods to make data-driven decisions for future inventory orders.

Given the user selects the sales trend report for a specified time period, when the report is generated, then it should provide visual graphs depicting sales data with clear comparative indicators for the selected timeframe.

A retail owner wants to evaluate historical inventory data to compare performance before and after implementing inventory optimization strategies.

Given the user requests historical inventory data analysis, when they specify their chosen date range and press generate report, then the system should return a comprehensive report comparing key performance indicators from the selected periods.

Users require access to insights on inventory health metrics to monitor overall performance and efficiency while on the move.

Given the user is on the mobile dashboard, when they access the inventory health section, then the system should present a summary of key metrics including availability, turnover, and restock alerts in a visually intuitive format.

User Alerts for Inventory Changes

"As a product manager, I want to receive alerts for significant inventory changes so that I can take immediate action and ensure our stock levels are maintained appropriately."

Description

This requirement aims to implement a notification system within the Mobile Dashboard that alerts users to important changes in inventory conditions, such as low stock levels, spikes in sales, or completion of inventory cycles. Alerts can be customized based on user preferences, enabling more proactive inventory management. This feature ensures users remain informed of critical inventory updates, reducing the risk of oversight and allowing for timely actions.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a low stock alert when inventory of a specific product falls below the predefined threshold set in their account settings.

Given the stock level of a product is reduced to below the defined threshold, when the system checks inventory levels, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the low stock condition.

User is able to customize the type of alerts they want to receive regarding inventory changes based on their preferences.

Given a user accesses the alert settings in the Mobile Dashboard, when they select their preferences for notifications, then the system should save these preferences and only alert the user according to their selections.

User receives an alert on the Mobile Dashboard when there is a spike in the sale of a particular item over the last 24 hours.

Given sales data shows a significant increase in the quantity sold of a product, when the sales exceed the predefined spike threshold, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the sales spike.

User receives alerts for completion of inventory cycles for products that have specific re-order points.

Given an item has reached its re-order point after completing a sales cycle, when the cycle is completed, then the user should receive a notification indicating that it’s time to restock the item.

User can view a history of alerts to ensure they are aware of past inventory changes.

Given a user accesses the alerts history section on the Mobile Dashboard, when they view this section, then they should see a list of past alerts with timestamps and details of each change.

User receives an alert for stock replenishment when inventory is automated to restock after reaching a certain threshold.

Given the automated restocking process is triggered, when inventory levels drop below the set threshold, then the user should receive an alert confirming that the re-order has been initiated.

User can disable specific types of alerts to reduce notification overload.

Given a user is in the alert settings, when they uncheck specific alert types, then the system should confirm these changes and stop sending alerts for the selected conditions.

Mobile Accessibility and Usability Enhancements

"As a retail operator, I want an easy-to-use mobile dashboard so that I can manage inventory on-the-go without encountering usability issues."

Description

This requirement focuses on improving the overall mobile interface of the dashboard for better accessibility and user experience. Enhancements may include simplified navigation, improved loading times, and more intuitive design elements that cater to the on-the-go needs of users. By providing a more user-friendly interface, this feature helps ensure that users can quickly access the information they need, driving greater engagement and more effective use of the Mobile Dashboard.

Acceptance Criteria

User navigates the Mobile Dashboard to check stock levels while in transit to a supplier meeting.

Given that the user is logged into the Mobile Dashboard, when they tap on the 'Stock Levels' section, then they should see an updated list of inventory items with current stock levels displayed in real-time without exceeding a loading time of 3 seconds.

A warehouse manager reviews sales trends using the Mobile Dashboard while monitoring replenishment activities on-site.

Given that the warehouse manager is on the Mobile Dashboard, when they access the 'Sales Trends' feature, then they should be able to view graphical representations of sales data for the last month, with no delays over 2 seconds in loading the information.

A retail owner performs a quick inventory health check on the Mobile Dashboard during a busy sale day.

Given that the retail owner is using the Mobile Dashboard, when they select 'Inventory Health', then they should be able to view a summary of low stock alerts and excessive stock items clearly within a single view without having to scroll more than one screen.

A user adjusts their notification settings for restocking alerts on the Mobile Dashboard while in a store.

Given that the user is in the settings section of the Mobile Dashboard, when they toggle the restocking alerts option, then confirmation of the changes should be displayed within 1 second, and the new settings should take effect immediately.

A store manager accesses performance analytics to assess team performance through the Mobile Dashboard while attending a team meeting.

Given that the store manager is in the performance analytics section of the Mobile Dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Team Performance' tab, then they should be able to view the performance metrics of each team member, updated in real-time with a refresh rate of no more than 5 seconds.

A small business owner attempts to use the Mobile Dashboard in a location with limited internet connectivity.

Given that the user is in a low connectivity area, when they access the Mobile Dashboard, then the system should offer cached data that is up to date as of the last successful sync and inform the user of the data status clearly at the top of the screen.

Users share their Mobile Dashboard insights via a messaging app while attending a trade show.

Given that the user is in the Mobile Dashboard, when they choose to share an insight from the dashboard, then the system should provide a functioning 'Share' button that allows users to send a summary of the insights directly to a messaging application without any errors.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want to integrate my online store’s data with the Mobile Dashboard so that I can monitor sales and inventory from one place."

Description

This requirement involves enabling seamless integration of the Mobile Dashboard with various e-commerce platforms that users may be utilizing, such as Shopify or WooCommerce. This integration will allow for automated data synchronization regarding sales and inventory levels, ensuring that the information displayed in the Mobile Dashboard reflects real-time data across all sales channels. By facilitating this integration, users will have a comprehensive view of their inventory status and performance metrics from multiple sources in one central location.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Mobile Dashboard with Shopify platform allows users to view real-time inventory levels and sales data.

Given the user has linked their Shopify account to the Mobile Dashboard, When sales are made on Shopify, Then the inventory levels in the Mobile Dashboard should update within 5 minutes to reflect the current stock.

Mobile Dashboard allows users to synchronize inventory data from WooCommerce automatically.

Given the user has integrated the WooCommerce platform, When the inventory is updated in WooCommerce, Then the Mobile Dashboard should display the updated inventory levels within 10 minutes.

Users can access the Mobile Dashboard on a mobile device to check KPIs and sales trends while away from the office.

Given that the user is logged into the Mobile Dashboard on their mobile device, When the user navigates to the KPIs section, Then they should be able to view real-time data on stock levels and sales trends without lag.

Mobile Dashboard provides alerts for inventory restocking based on connected e-commerce platforms data.

Given the user has set a restock threshold for a product, When inventory levels fall below this threshold from data received from Shopify or WooCommerce, Then the Mobile Dashboard should generate an automated alert to the user.

Users can customize the view of their Mobile Dashboard to prioritize metrics they find most important.

Given the user has logged into the Mobile Dashboard, When the user selects metrics to display on the dashboard, Then the interface should reflect these selections immediately without needing a refresh.

Mobile Dashboard displays historical sales data to identify trends over time.

Given the user has accessed the historical sales data section of the Mobile Dashboard, When the user selects a specific date range, Then the Mobile Dashboard should accurately display sales data for that time period, allowing users to identify trends.

Mobile Dashboard syncs reliably with multiple e-commerce platforms simultaneously, ensuring data consistency.

Given the user has integrated both Shopify and WooCommerce, When sales occur across both platforms simultaneously, Then the Mobile Dashboard should reflect consistent and accurate inventory data from both platforms without discrepancies.

Inventory Adjustment Tool

The Inventory Adjustment Tool empowers users to make quick adjustments to inventory levels directly from their mobile devices. Whether correcting discrepancies or conducting regular audits, this feature simplifies the process of updating stock information. Users can ensure accuracy in their inventory records, reduce administrative workload, and enhance accountability.

Requirements

Mobile Integration

"As a store manager, I want to adjust inventory levels from my mobile device so that I can quickly correct discrepancies and keep our stock records accurate while on the go."

Description

The Mobile Integration requirement ensures that the Inventory Adjustment Tool operates seamlessly on mobile devices, allowing users to access and modify inventory levels irrespective of their location. This function improves user accessibility and convenience, enabling real-time updates in inventory status, which is critical for maintaining accurate records. With this capability, users can execute adjustments quickly during stock audits or when discrepancies are noted, thereby enhancing operational efficiency and accuracy. The feature must support all major mobile operating systems and be compatible with various screen sizes, ensuring a smooth user experience across devices.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile User Adjustments for Inventory Audits

Given that a user is logged into the InvenTrack app on a mobile device, when they access the Inventory Adjustment Tool, then they should be able to adjust inventory levels in real-time without any lag or delay.

Compatibility Across Mobile Operating Systems

Given the requirement for mobile integration, when the Inventory Adjustment Tool is tested on both Android and iOS devices, then it must function seamlessly across both operating systems without any discrepancies in performance or user experience.

User Experience on Varied Screen Sizes

Given that users may access the Inventory Adjustment Tool from various mobile devices, when the Tool is used on different screen sizes, then the user interface should adjust appropriately and remain fully functional without any loss of usability or features.

Real-Time Inventory Updates

Given that a user adjusts the inventory levels through the mobile app, when the adjustment is submitted, then the inventory records must reflect the change in less than 5 seconds across all system interfaces.

Error Handling and User Feedback

Given that a user attempts to adjust inventory levels, when there is an error in their adjustment (e.g., invalid quantity), then the app must display a clear error message and not proceed until the input is corrected.

Audit Trail Logging

Given that a user makes an adjustment to the inventory through the mobile app, when the adjustment is completed, then a log of the adjustment must be recorded with the user's ID, timestamp, and adjusted quantities accessible for future reference.

User Permissions and Security

Given that different users have varied roles within the InvenTrack system, when a user attempts to access the Inventory Adjustment Tool, then their access must be validated against their permissions, preventing unauthorized adjustments.

Audit Tracking

"As an inventory manager, I want to see a history of all inventory adjustments so that I can track changes and ensure accountability within my team."

Description

The Audit Tracking requirement allows users to maintain a history of all adjustments made to inventory levels, capturing user details, timestamps, and reasons for adjustments. This functionality is essential for enhancing accountability and transparency within inventory management processes. By tracking changes, users can review past adjustments, identify patterns, and prevent future discrepancies, fostering a culture of responsibility in managing stock levels. Additionally, the feature should enable the generation of reports based on historical adjustment data, aiding in compliance and operational reviews.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates an inventory adjustment to correct a discrepancy found during a routine check and wants to log the reason for the change.

Given a user is logged into the Inventory Adjustment Tool, when the user modifies the inventory levels and provides a reason for the adjustment, then the adjustment is recorded with a timestamp, user ID, and reason in the audit log.

A manager reviews the audit log to investigate discrepancies in inventory levels discovered during a quarterly review.

Given a user is viewing the audit log, when the user filters the log by date and user ID, then the system displays all relevant adjustments made within the selected timeframe along with user details and reasons for each adjustment.

A user wants to generate a report of all inventory adjustments made over the last month for compliance purposes.

Given a user requests a report for inventory adjustments from the last month, when the report is generated, then it includes a summary of adjustments with total counts, types of adjustments, and specific details of each entry in a downloadable format.

During training, a new employee learns how to use the Inventory Adjustment Tool and wants to understand how to access the audit tracking feature.

Given a new employee is using the Inventory Adjustment Tool, when they navigate to the audit tracking section, then help documentation is accessible, explaining the purpose of the audit log and how to interpret the data within.

A compliance officer audits the inventory management system for accuracy and requires evidence of previous adjustments made.

Given a compliance officer requests a history of inventory adjustments, when they access the audit log, then they can view all entries including user ID, timestamps, and reasons for each adjustment without any missing records.

A store manager needs to ensure that previous inventory adjustments are not tampered with and requires a verification mechanism.

Given a user is viewing the audit log, when they attempt to edit any entries for inventory adjustments, then the system should prevent any modifications and provide an error message indicating that the log is immutable.

User Permissions

"As a business owner, I want to control who can make inventory adjustments so that I can prevent unauthorized changes and protect my inventory data."

Description

The User Permissions requirement involves implementing roles and access controls to manage who can make adjustments to inventory levels within the Inventory Adjustment Tool. By defining user roles such as admin, manager, and staff, organizations can ensure that only authorized personnel have access to make critical inventory changes. This feature enhances security and minimizes the risk of unauthorized adjustments, which can lead to significant discrepancies in inventory records. The implementation should include customizable permissions settings to align with various organizational hierarchies and workflows.

Acceptance Criteria

Admin User Role Access for Inventory Adjustments

Given that a user with the admin role attempts to access the Inventory Adjustment Tool, when they navigate to the tool, then they should be able to view, edit, and save changes to inventory levels without restrictions.

Manager User Role Access for Inventory Adjustments

Given that a user with the manager role attempts to access the Inventory Adjustment Tool, when they navigate to the tool, then they should be able to view and edit inventory levels, but not delete inventory items.

Staff User Role Access for Inventory Adjustments

Given that a user with the staff role attempts to access the Inventory Adjustment Tool, when they navigate to the tool, then they should only be able to view inventory levels and not make any edits or changes.

Customizable Permissions Settings

Given that an admin user wants to modify permissions settings, when they access the User Permissions configuration interface, then they should be able to customize permissions for each user role, ensuring only selected roles can make inventory adjustments.

Unauthorized Access Prevention

Given that a non-authorized user attempts to access the Inventory Adjustment Tool, when they try to view or edit inventory levels, then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

Audit Trail of Inventory Adjustments

Given that an authorized user makes changes to inventory levels, when they save adjustments, then the system should log the user's ID, timestamp, and nature of the change in an audit trail for future reference.

Role-Based Notifications for Adjustments

Given that an inventory adjustment is made by an authorized user, when the change is saved in the Inventory Adjustment Tool, then all users with manager or admin roles should receive a notification of the change made.

Barcode Scanning

"As a stock auditor, I want to scan barcodes to adjust inventory levels so that I can update stock information quickly and accurately during audits."

Description

The Barcode Scanning requirement allows users to easily adjust inventory levels by scanning product barcodes using their mobile devices. This feature simplifies the process of updating stock information, reducing manual entry errors and speeding up the adjustment process. Implementing barcode scanning integration will enhance user efficiency by allowing quick identification of products during audits or inventory counts, ensuring that adjustments are accurate and timely. The system must support common barcode formats and integrate seamlessly with existing inventory databases to ensure accuracy in adjustments.

Acceptance Criteria

User scans a product barcode to adjust inventory levels during a stock audit in a retail store.

Given the user has a mobile device with the InvenTrack app installed, when the user scans a valid product barcode, then the system should display the current inventory level and prompt the user to enter the new quantity.

User attempts to scan a barcode for a product that is not in the inventory database.

Given the user scans a barcode for a product not listed in the inventory database, when the scan is processed, then the system should display a message indicating that the product cannot be found.

User successfully adjusts inventory levels after scanning a barcode for a product.

Given the user scans a valid barcode and enters a new quantity for the product, when the user confirms the adjustment, then the system should update the inventory database with the new quantity and display a confirmation message.

User scans a product barcode to check if the system supports multiple barcode formats.

Given the user has products with different barcode formats (UPC, EAN, etc.), when the user scans each format, then the system should successfully recognize and process all valid formats without errors.

User reviews the history of adjustments made using the barcode scanning feature.

Given the inventory has been adjusted multiple times using the barcode scanning feature, when the user navigates to the adjustment history, then the system should display a list of all adjustments made, including timestamps and adjusted quantities.

User encounters a network issue while scanning a product's barcode.

Given the user attempts to scan a barcode while offline or with poor network connectivity, when the scan is processed, then the system should allow the user to save the adjustment locally and synchronize it later when connectivity is restored.

User scans a barcode and exceeds the available quantity in the inventory.

Given the user scans a barcode for a product with a low inventory level, when the user attempts to adjust the quantity to more than what is available, then the system should display a warning message and prevent the adjustment from being completed.

Real-time Notifications

"As a team member, I want to receive real-time alerts when inventory adjustments are made so that I can stay updated and respond quickly to maintain inventory accuracy."

Description

The Real-time Notifications requirement implements alerts for users when inventory discrepancies are detected or when adjustments are made. This feature is vital for keeping team members informed and ensuring immediate action is taken to rectify issues. Notifications should be customizable based on user preferences and sent via their preferred channels, such as in-app notifications, emails, or SMS. By providing timely information about inventory adjustments, users can act swiftly to maintain stock integrity and reduce potential losses due to inaccuracies.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an in-app notification when an inventory discrepancy is detected during a routine audit.

Given a user is actively auditing inventory levels, when a discrepancy is detected in the system, then the user should receive an in-app notification immediately stating the nature of the discrepancy and suggested actions.

User customizes their notification preferences for inventory adjustments.

Given a user accesses their notification settings, when they select their preferred notification methods (in-app, email, SMS), then their preferences should be saved and applied to future inventory adjustment alerts without error.

User receives an email notification when an inventory adjustment is made after the closing hours.

Given an inventory adjustment is made after business hours, when the adjustment logs are updated, then the system should automatically send an email notification to the user that details the adjustment made and the new inventory levels.

User accesses the notification history to review past alerts regarding inventory discrepancies.

Given a user accesses the notification history section, when they request to view past notifications, then the system should display a chronological list of all alerts with details on discrepancies and adjustments made within the last 30 days.

User receives an SMS alert for a critical stockout notification.

Given an inventory level falls below the threshold defined by the user, when the system detects this condition, then an SMS notification should be sent to the user immediately, including the affected product details and suggested restock actions.

Supplier Order Requests

With Supplier Order Requests, users can directly place orders with suppliers right from the mobile app. By streamlining order requests and communication, this feature eliminates the need for lengthy email exchanges and improves procurement efficiency. Users can manage supplier relationships on the go, ensuring timely restocking and enhanced operational fluidity.

Requirements

Direct Supplier Communication

"As a store manager, I want to communicate directly with suppliers through the app so that I can quickly resolve any order issues and ensure timely delivery of our products."

Description

This requirement allows users to initiate and manage direct communication with suppliers via the InvenTrack mobile app. Implementing instant messaging features will streamline conversations, enabling users to clarify order details quickly and resolve issues without delay. Enhanced communication tools will facilitate better supplier relationships and contribute to more efficient procurement processes, ultimately leading to faster restocking of inventory and reduced downtimes.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a chat with a supplier to clarify a product order that was previously discussed.

Given the user has selected a supplier, when the user sends a message, then the message should be successfully delivered and the user should receive a confirmation notification.

User receives a message from a supplier regarding a clarification needed on an order.

Given the user has an active chat with the supplier, when the supplier sends a message, then the user should receive a push notification and see the message in the chat interface instantly.

User wants to review past communications with a supplier regarding previous orders.

Given the user is in the supplier chat section, when the user selects a supplier's chat history, then they should be able to view all past messages sorted by date.

User attempts to send a message to a supplier but the supplier is currently offline.

Given the user is trying to send a message, when the supplier is offline, then the message should display a notification that the supplier is unavailable and the message should be queued for delivery once they are online.

User wants to modify an existing order and needs to communicate changes to the supplier quickly.

Given the user is in the order detail view, when the user selects 'Edit Order' and sends a message to the supplier, then the system should update the order details accordingly and notify the supplier of the changes in real time.

User is managing multiple supplier chats simultaneously and wants to switch between them.

Given the user has multiple active chats, when the user selects a different supplier's chat, then the chat interface should update to display the selected supplier's conversation without lag.

Inventory Adjustment Alerts

"As a business owner, I want to receive alerts when my inventory is low so that I can reorder supplies before running out and avoid lost sales."

Description

Users will receive alerts within the app when inventory levels reach a predefined threshold that necessitates an order from suppliers. These alerts will provide users with actionable insights, ensuring that they can proactively manage stock levels and avoid potential stockouts. This feature will integrate seamlessly with the existing inventory tracking capabilities, empowering users with timely information for efficient inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when inventory levels drop below the predefined minimum threshold set for specific products.

Given an inventory item has a minimum threshold set, when the inventory level drops below that threshold, then the user should receive an alert notification within the app.

Users can customize the threshold levels for inventory items according to their business needs.

Given the user is in the settings section for inventory alerts, when the user adjusts the threshold level for an inventory item, then that new threshold is saved and reflected in the alert system.

Users receive alerts during non-business hours to ensure they can manage inventory effectively.

Given an inventory item has reached the minimum threshold, when the current time is outside of business hours, then the user should still receive a push notification alert.

User can view a summary of all alerts in a single dashboard to prioritize their actions.

Given that the user is logged into the app, when they access the inventory alerts dashboard, then all active alerts should be displayed, showing the product name, current inventory level, and threshold.

User receives alerts for multiple inventory items that reach their respective thresholds simultaneously.

Given multiple inventory items have exceeded their threshold levels, when those conditions occur, then the user should receive individual alerts for each item in the app without duplicates.

Users can set their preferred notification method for inventory alerts (e.g., push notifications, email notifications).

Given the user is in the notification settings, when they select their preferred method for receiving inventory alerts, then that preference should be saved and applied in the alert system.

Order History Tracking

"As a procurement officer, I want to view my past orders with suppliers so that I can analyze ordering patterns and make informed decisions on future purchases."

Description

This requirement will enable users to access a comprehensive history of all orders placed through the Supplier Order Requests feature. Users will be able to view order dates, items ordered, quantities, and supplier details. Such tracking will allow for better inventory planning, easier supplier evaluations, and insight into purchasing patterns, contributing to informed decision-making and negotiation strategies with suppliers.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to view the order history after placing multiple supplier orders over several weeks to analyze purchasing trends and optimize inventory.

Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack mobile app, when the user navigates to the Supplier Order Requests section and selects 'Order History', then the app displays a list of all past orders with corresponding dates, items, quantities, and supplier details.

User wishes to filter the order history by specific suppliers to evaluate performance and negotiate better terms.

Given the user is on the Order History page, when the user selects a specific supplier from the filter options, then the app shows only the orders placed with that supplier, maintaining the ability to view date, items, and quantities.

User needs to assess their purchasing behavior over a given time period for strategic planning.

Given the user is on the Order History page, when the user sets a custom date range filter, then the app displays all orders placed within that timeframe, complete with order details such as dates, items, quantities, and supplier names.

User wants to analyze the efficiency of procurement by comparing quantities ordered versus quantities sold.

Given the order history is displayed, when the user compares the quantities ordered with corresponding sales data for the same items, then the app provides insights or alerts if there are discrepancies that indicate overstocking or stockouts.

User needs to generate a report on supplier performance based on historical order data to prepare for vendor meetings.

Given the order history is accessible, when the user requests to download a report, then the app generates and provides a downloadable file that includes key metrics such as total orders, total spent, average order value, and supplier rating based on order history.

User wants to quickly identify any orders that were placed but not fulfilled to address supplier issues.

Given the user is viewing the order history, when the user selects a filter for 'Pending' or 'Not Fulfilled' orders, then the app highlights these orders with clear indicators showing their status and expected fulfillment dates.

Supplier Ratings and Reviews

"As an inventory manager, I want to rate and review suppliers based on their service so that I can choose the best suppliers for our needs and maintain high stocking levels."

Description

Users will have the ability to rate suppliers based on their experiences with order accuracy, delivery times, and product quality. This requirement will allow businesses to build a knowledge base of supplier performance, assisting in future purchasing decisions. Integrating a rating and review system will foster accountability and encourage suppliers to improve their service standards, ultimately enhancing the user's procurement experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier ratings submission via mobile app

Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack mobile app, when they access the Supplier Ratings feature, then they must be able to submit a rating between 1 and 5 stars and provide optional comments about their experience.

Viewing ratings and reviews of suppliers

Given a user is viewing a supplier's profile in the InvenTrack app, when they access the ratings and reviews section, then they should see an average star rating and a list of all comments submitted by other users.

Editing a submitted rating or review

Given a user has previously submitted a rating and review for a supplier, when they navigate to their submitted reviews section, then they must be able to edit or delete their review successfully.

Filtering suppliers by rating

Given a user wants to select suppliers based on ratings, when they apply a filter to show only suppliers with a rating of 4 stars and above, then the list should update to display only those suppliers.

Supplier feedback notifications

Given a supplier receives a rating or review from a user, when the review is submitted, then the supplier must receive a notification in their dashboard about the new submission.

Reporting inappropriate reviews

Given a user finds a review that violates community guidelines, when they click the 'Report' button, then they should see a confirmation message indicating that the review has been reported successfully.

Aggregating supplier performance data

Given multiple ratings and reviews have been submitted for suppliers, when the user requests a performance report, then the report should accurately reflect the aggregated ratings and reviews for each supplier over a specified timeframe.

Order Customization Options

"As a buyer, I want to customize my order requests so that I can tailor the orders to our specific inventory needs and supplier capabilities."

Description

This requirement allows users to customize their order requests based on specific needs, such as altering quantities, adding items, or including special instructions for suppliers. Providing flexibility in order placements will enhance user satisfaction and ensure that they can tailor their procurement to meet unique business needs, improving overall operational efficiency within the system.

Acceptance Criteria

A user opens the InvenTrack mobile app and navigates to the Supplier Order Requests feature to create a new order. They select a supplier, add various items to their order, adjust the quantities, and include special delivery instructions before submitting the order. The scenario illustrates the user's ability to customize their order to meet specific needs contextual to their business operations.

Given the user has accessed the Supplier Order Requests feature, when they select items and modify quantities as well as provide additional instructions, then the system should allow the user to submit the order successfully and receive a confirmation notification. Additionally, the customized order details should be reflected in the supply history for future reference.

A user wants to place a repeat order from a previous supplier request. They access the order history, select a past order, and make necessary adjustments to item quantities and instructions before resubmitting it to the supplier.

Given the user selects a previous order from their order history, when they modify the item quantities and add or change any special instructions, then the order should update correctly and allow the user to resubmit with a confirmation message displayed that indicates the order has been successfully updated.

An administrator reviews the supplier order requests submitted by users to ensure that all necessary information is provided and that there are no errors before sending them to suppliers. They need to ensure compliance with business standards.

Given the administrator accesses the pending supplier order requests, when they review each request for completeness and accuracy without errors in quantities or instructions, then the administrator should be able to approve or reject the order requests with appropriate feedback provided to the user for any rejected orders.

Users need to edit a supplier order after submission due to changing requirements (e.g., quantity adjustments or timeline changes). They must access the submitted order from their order history to make these changes.

Given that the user attempts to modify an already submitted order, when they access the order details with edit functionality, then the user should be able to change quantities, items, or instructions, and re-submit the order, receiving an updated confirmation message after submission.

A user is uncertain about how to customize their supplier order and wants to access help or instructional support within the app. They look for guidance on how to use the customization options effectively.

Given that the user is in the Supplier Order Requests section and needs assistance, when they select the help icon or assistance link, then they should be directed to a comprehensive guide or video tutorial explaining the step-by-step process for customizing their supplier orders with clarity and visual support.

Cross-Platform Synchronization

"As a retail associate, I want to synchronize my order requests between my mobile app and desktop platform so that I can manage supplier orders from anywhere without losing information."

Description

The Supplier Order Requests feature must sync seamlessly between desktop and mobile platforms, ensuring that users can manage orders consistently across devices. This requirement is critical for maintaining accessibility and usability, as it allows users to initiate orders, check order status, and communicate with suppliers from any device, providing a cohesive user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a Supplier Order Request on the mobile app while in the store and expects the order to appear on the desktop application.

Given a user is logged into the InvenTrack mobile app, When the user submits a Supplier Order Request, Then the order should be reflected in real-time on the desktop application without delay.

A user updates an existing Supplier Order Request from the desktop app while checking inventory levels and expects the update to sync to the mobile app.

Given a user has an existing Supplier Order Request open on the desktop app, When the user updates the order and saves changes, Then the updated order should immediately sync and be visible on the mobile app.

User checks the order status on the mobile app after placing a Supplier Order Request using the desktop application.

Given a user has placed a Supplier Order Request using the desktop app, When the user opens the mobile app, Then the order status should be accurately displayed with all relevant details such as order number and expected delivery date.

A user switches from the mobile app to the desktop app and navigates to the Supplier Order Requests section to verify that the synchronization has occurred successfully.

Given a user is logged into both the mobile and desktop app, When the user places a Supplier Order Request on the mobile app and switches to the desktop, Then the user should see the same request in the Supplier Order Requests section with the correct information.

User cancels a Supplier Order Request from the mobile app and expects to see this change reflected on the desktop application instantly.

Given a user has submitted a Supplier Order Request via the mobile app, When the user cancels the request in the mobile app, Then the cancellation should be reflected on the desktop application immediately and removed from the active orders list.

A user receives notifications about Supplier Order Requests on both mobile and desktop applications under varying network conditions.

Given a user places a Supplier Order Request while on a mobile network with limited connectivity, When the network is restored, Then the user should receive confirmation notifications on both mobile and desktop apps regarding the order status without manual refresh.

Integration with Accounting Software

"As a finance manager, I want my supplier orders to integrate with our accounting software so that I can easily track expenses and manage our budget effectively."

Description

This requirement establishes the integration of Supplier Order Requests with popular accounting software to facilitate easy tracking of procurement expenses. By linking order data to financial systems, users will have streamlined access to expense reports, helping them manage budgets and improve financial oversight. This integration will enhance operational efficiency and allow for better financial planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a supplier order request through the mobile app while managing inventory on the go.

Given the supplier integration is configured, When the user places an order request, Then the request should be sent to the supplier's system without errors and confirmation should be received in the app.

User views expense reports linked to supplier order requests after integration with accounting software is established.

Given the user has placed multiple orders through the app, When the user accesses the expense report section, Then the expense reports should reflect all procurement expenses accurately categorized by supplier and date.

User edits an existing supplier order request to update quantities or item details before final submission.

Given a user selects an existing order request, When the user updates the quantities or details, Then the changes should be saved and displayed correctly on the order summary before submission.

User receives automated alerts for procurement expenses that exceed pre-set budget thresholds linked to the accounting software.

Given the budget threshold is set in the accounting software, When the total expenses for a supplier order request exceed this threshold, Then an alert should be generated and notified to the user through the app.

User integrates the mobile app with popular accounting software and tests data synchronization between systems.

Given the accounting software is selected and integration settings are configured, When the user triggers a data sync, Then order data should be accurately reflected in both the app and accounting software with no data discrepancies.

User generates a report summarizing all supplier relationships and order histories for financial audits.

Given the user accesses the reporting feature, When they select the date range and supplier, Then a comprehensive report listing all transactions should be generated and can be exported in multiple formats (e.g., PDF, CSV).

User cancels a supplier order request and checks the integration's response in the accounting system.

Given an order is placed and then canceled by the user, When the cancellation is processed, Then the cancellation should be recorded properly in both the app and the accounting software, ensuring no financial records are affected erroneously.

Customizable Inventory Reports

The Customizable Inventory Reports feature allows users to generate and view tailored reports based on specific inventory needs. Users can easily analyze data, track performance, and identify trends using filters that suit their operational strategies. This flexibility helps users to make data-driven decisions that enhance their inventory management practices.

Requirements

Dynamic Filter Options

"As a store manager, I want to apply filters to my inventory reports so that I can focus on specific trends and issues relevant to my operations."

Description

The Dynamic Filter Options requirement enables users to customize their inventory report generation process by applying various data filters such as date range, product category, supplier, or sales volume. This functionality enhances user experience by allowing for targeted, detailed analysis of inventory data, facilitating quicker identification of trends and issues. Such granular reporting capabilities support data-driven decision-making, improve inventory management methodologies, and ultimately lead to more efficient business operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a report filtered by date range to analyze inventory levels for a specific month.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when the user selects a date range filter from January 1 to January 31, then the report should display only items with transactions within that date range.

User filters inventory reports by product category to identify sales trends.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when the user selects the 'Electronics' category filter, then the report should show only products belonging to the Electronics category.

User applies a filter based on supplier to track products sourced from a specific vendor.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when the user selects 'Supplier A' from the supplier filter options, then the report should only include items that are sourced from Supplier A.

User uses a sales volume filter to identify underperforming products.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when the user sets the sales volume filter to 'less than 50 units', then the report should highlight products with sales less than 50 units.

User combines multiple filters to create a detailed inventory analysis report.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when the user selects the 'Date Range' as January 1 to January 31, 'Product Category' as 'Toys', and 'Sales Volume' as 'more than 100 units', then the report should reflect only the toys sold over 100 units during January.

User saves a filter configuration for future reports.

Given the user has applied various filters to generate a report, when the user selects the 'Save Filters' option and names the configuration 'January Toy Sales', then the filter setup should be stored and available for future report generation.

Scheduled Report Generation

"As an inventory analyst, I want to schedule my inventory reports to be generated automatically so that I can consistently stay up-to-date without manual effort."

Description

The Scheduled Report Generation requirement allows users to automate the report creation process by setting specific time intervals for reports to be generated and delivered via email or user dashboard notifications. This feature streamlines operations by ensuring users receive timely updates on inventory status without needing to manually run reports, ultimately saving time and reducing the risk of overlooking critical data.

Acceptance Criteria

Scheduled Daily Report Generation for Low Stock Alerts

Given that a user has set up a daily scheduled report for low stock items, When the scheduled time occurs, Then the report is generated and sent to the user's email with the relevant data on low stock items.

Scheduled Weekly Performance Reports

Given that a user selects a weekly schedule for performance reports, When the scheduled time falls on a week-ending day, Then the system generates performance reports and uploads them to the user's dashboard.

User Customization of Scheduled Reports

Given that a user wants to customize the scheduled report content, When the user accesses the report settings, Then they can select different inventory metrics and filters before saving the schedule.

Report Delivery Confirmation Notifications

Given that a scheduled report is generated and sent, When the report is delivered successfully, Then the user receives a notification confirming the delivery via email.

Error Handling for Failed Report Generation

Given that the system fails to generate a scheduled report due to an internal error, When the error occurs, Then the user receives an error notification indicating the problem and suggesting corrective actions.

Report Generation Frequency Options

Given that a user is setting up scheduled reports, When the user selects the frequency for report generation, Then the system provides options for daily, weekly, and monthly frequencies to choose from.

Audit Trail of Generated Reports

Given that reports are generated through the scheduled process, When a user accesses the report history, Then they can view an audit trail listing all reports generated, including timestamps and report types.

Exportable Report Formats

"As a business owner, I want to export my inventory reports in different file formats so that I can share them with my accountant and team more easily."

Description

The Exportable Report Formats requirement provides users with the ability to export their customizable inventory reports in various formats (such as PDF, Excel, and CSV). This requirement ensures that users can easily share reports with stakeholders and integrate the data into other systems or presentations. By supporting diverse output options, this feature enhances collaboration and data utilization, making it easier for users to present their findings.

Acceptance Criteria

User applies custom filters to inventory data and chooses to export the resulting report.

Given that the user has selected specific filters for their inventory data, when they choose to export the report, then the system should generate the report in the selected format (PDF, Excel, or CSV) and provide a download link.

User exports a customizable inventory report in different formats to share with stakeholders.

Given that the user has generated an inventory report, when they select the export option for PDF, Excel, or CSV, then the report should be accurately formatted and include all data corresponding to the applied filters.

User attempts to export a report with excessive data and checks for system handling.

Given that the user has generated a customizable inventory report that exceeds a predetermined size limit (e.g., 10,000 rows), when they attempt to export the report, then the system should notify the user of the limitation and suggest applying additional filters to reduce the dataset.

User requires verification that exported reports maintain data integrity across formats.

Given that the user exports a report in different formats, when they open these export files, then the data in each format should retain the same values, formatting, and any applied calculations or summaries.

User checks the ease of integration of exported reports into another system.

Given that the user has exported a report in CSV format, when they attempt to upload this file into a third-party accounting system, then the file should import successfully without errors, with all data fields mapping correctly.

User explores options for exporting scheduled reports in bulk.

Given that the user has scheduled multiple inventory reports for export, when they access the scheduled export section, then there should be an option to download all scheduled reports as a single ZIP file.

Visual Data Representation

"As a retail manager, I want to view my inventory reports in visual formats so that I can quickly grasp important trends and discuss them in team meetings."

Description

The Visual Data Representation requirement enables users to generate charts and graphical representations from their inventory data within the reports. By providing visual insights such as graphs and pie charts, users can quickly interpret data trends and make informed decisions about inventory management. This feature enhances report comprehension and effectiveness, making it easier for users to communicate inventory insights to others.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a visual report for a specific product category to analyze sales trends over the past quarter.

Given the user is logged in and has access to inventory reports, when they select the product category and timeframe, then the system displays a graphical representation of the sales data for that category, including line graphs and bar charts.

User wants to customize a report to include only certain data fields and visuals for a comprehensive overview.

Given the user selects specific data fields and visual types (e.g., pie chart, bar graph), when they generate the report, then the system outputs a report containing the chosen fields and displays the selected visual types accurately.

A user intends to compare inventory performance across different time periods using visual data.

Given the user selects two different time periods for comparison, when they generate the visual report, then the system provides a dual-axis graph that clearly illustrates differences in inventory performance metrics for the selected periods.

User needs to share visual reports with team members for collaborative decision-making.

Given the user generates a visual report, when they select the share option, then the system allows them to export or share the report via email or shared workspace with the intended recipients successfully.

A user wants to print a visual report and ensure proper formatting for physical distribution.

Given the user has generated a visual report, when they choose the print option, then the system formats the report correctly for printing, preserving the integrity of the charts and visuals.

User conducts peer feedback sessions using the visual reports generated from their inventory data.

Given a user is displaying a visual report during a meeting, when peers review the report, then they should be able to interpret the visual data accurately and provide constructive feedback based on the trends and insights presented.

User Access Control for Reports

"As an administrator, I want to control who can access certain inventory reports so that I can ensure sensitive information is secure and only shared with appropriate team members."

Description

The User Access Control for Reports requirement allows administrators to set permissions for different user roles regarding who can generate, view, or modify inventory reports. This security feature ensures that sensitive inventory data is protected and only accessible to authorized personnel. Implementing robust access control enhances overall system security and aligns with compliance requirements, providing users with peace of mind.

Acceptance Criteria

Administrators need to manage user roles and permissions effectively to ensure that only authorized personnel can access sensitive inventory reports. This occurs in the admin panel where the admin selects a user role and defines permissions for generating and viewing reports.

Given an administrator is logged into the admin panel, when they select a user role and set permissions for generating and viewing reports, then the system should save these permissions and only allow users with appropriate roles to generate or view the reports as per the set permissions.

A store manager wants to access a customizable inventory report to analyze stock levels but is restricted due to user access controls set by the administrator. This scenario tests the enforcement of user permissions based on role definitions.

Given a store manager attempts to view a customizable inventory report, when their user role does not have permission to access that report, then the system should display an appropriate access denied message and not show the report.

An employee needs to generate an inventory report to check stock on hand. The access control should allow or restrict this action based on the permissions assigned by the administrator.

Given an employee tries to generate an inventory report, when their role has been granted permission to generate reports, then the system should allow the report generation. Conversely, if permission is not granted, the system should prevent report generation and notify them accordingly.

After an administrator updates user roles and permissions, they need to verify that these changes take effect immediately across the system. This ensures real-time updates and security compliance.

Given an administrator updates the permissions for a user role, when they log in as that user, then the changes to permissions should be reflected immediately, and the user should only be able to perform actions according to their updated permissions.

To ensure compliance and security, an external auditor is reviewing the user access control logs. The system should maintain robust logging features to track modifications made to user permissions.

Given an external auditor requests access to user activity logs, when they access the logs, then the system should provide a detailed report of all permissions changes, including timestamps, user details, and the actions performed to ensure transparency and compliance.

Performance Metrics Integration

"As a logistics manager, I want to see inventory performance metrics alongside my reports so that I can evaluate our performance against our strategic goals."

Description

The Performance Metrics Integration requirement allows users to compare inventory data against key performance indicators (KPIs) directly within the reports. This integration provides users with a comprehensive view of their inventory health and aligns operational activities with business strategies. By having KPIs integrated into reports, users can identify performance gaps and opportunities for improvement more readily.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a customizable inventory report that includes performance metrics to analyze inventory health over the past month.

Given the user has selected the desired inventory period and KPI filters, when they click 'Generate Report', then the system should present a report displaying the relevant inventory data alongside the selected performance metrics.

User accesses a customizable inventory report and modifies the KPIs to reflect their operational goals and current inventory strategies.

Given the user is on the report generation page, when they adjust KPI filters and click 'Apply', then the report should dynamically update to reflect the new KPIs without needing to reload the page.

User wants to export a customizable inventory report that includes performance metrics in a standard format for sharing with stakeholders.

Given the user has generated a report with the desired inventory and KPI data, when they click the 'Export' button, then a downloadable file in CSV format should be generated and made available to the user.

User analyzes trends in inventory health by accessing the customizable inventory report over several months to spot discrepancies.

Given the user selects a range of months and relevant KPIs, when they generate the report, then the report must include a graphical representation (like a line chart) comparing the KPIs over the selected months.

User reviews the customizable inventory report to ensure it aligns with their business strategies and identifies areas for improvement.

Given the generated report contains the selected performance metrics, when the user reviews the report, then they should be able to easily identify any KPIs that fall below target thresholds and generate actionable insights based on these findings.

User navigates to the customizable inventory report to check the impact of a recent marketing campaign on inventory turnover rates.

Given the user has input the relevant time frame for the marketing campaign, when the report is generated, then it should indicate the inventory turnover rates pre- and post-campaign using the chosen performance metrics for comparison.

Demand-Driven Pricing

This feature dynamically adjusts product prices in real time based on current demand trends and sales velocity. By analyzing customer purchasing behavior, it helps users maximize sales potential during peak times and push inventory during slow sales, ensuring optimal revenue generation.

Requirements

Real-Time Pricing Adjustment

"As a retail manager, I want the ability to automatically adjust product prices based on real-time demand so that I can optimize sales and revenue without manual intervention."

Description

This requirement entails the functionality to adjust product prices dynamically in real-time based on the analysis of current demand trends and sales velocity. The adjustment will occur automatically through a predefined algorithm that considers factors like previous sales data, market fluctuations, and customer purchasing behaviors. This feature will enable businesses to optimize revenue by increasing prices during high demand periods and lowering them to stimulate sales when inventory is aging. Integration with existing sales tracking systems and customer analytics is critical to ensure accurate data feeding into the pricing mechanism. This will provide business owners with a competitive edge while fully automating the pricing strategy to align with demand fluctuations.

Acceptance Criteria

A retail business experiences a surge in demand for a seasonal product. The system automatically increases the price of the product based on the predefined algorithm to maximize revenue during this peak sales period.

Given that the current sales velocity exceeds the historical average for a seasonal product, when the sales data is processed, then the product price should be increased by at least 10% within 5 seconds of the demand increase being detected.

An e-commerce company notices that certain items are not selling well and have been in inventory for a prolonged period. The system triggers a price reduction to incentivize sales and clear out old stock.

Given that a product has been in inventory for over 60 days with less than 20% of the target sales volume achieved, when the latest sales data is analyzed, then the product price should be decreased by at least 15% automatically without manual intervention.

A user checks the administrative dashboard during a promotional event to ensure that prices have automatically adjusted according to the demand-driven pricing algorithm.

Given that the promotional event has started, when the user accesses the pricing dashboard, then they should see that all participating products have updated prices reflecting either increases or decreases based on demand trends, and the updates should happen in real-time within 10 seconds of data changes.

A business owner wants to evaluate the success of the pricing adjustments after a holiday season. The system should provide a detailed report on revenue generated from dynamically adjusted pricing during that period.

Given that the holiday season has ended, when the business owner requests the pricing report, then the system should present a comprehensive report that details the percentage of revenue increase attributed to dynamic pricing adjustments, compared to the same period in the previous year, with an accuracy rate of at least 95%.

An inventory tracking system integrates with an external sales tracking system to ensure accurate real-time data feeding for price adjustments.

Given that the integration between the inventory management and sales tracking system is established, when a product sale occurs, then the new sales data should be reflected in the inventory management system within 1 second, ensuring immediate price adjustment capabilities.

A customer is browsing an e-commerce website and notices that the price of a frequently viewed product changes based on demand. They expect a fair price adjustment reflecting current market conditions.

Given that a customer views a product with fluctuating demand, when they come back to check the product page, then the customer should see a pricing change that accurately reflects the sales velocity and demand level as per predefined rules, and any change should be explained clearly as a 'Demand-Driven Pricing' adjustment.

Demand Analytics Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want a dashboard that visualizes demand trends and sales data so that I can make informed decisions about inventory and pricing."

Description

The Demand Analytics Dashboard will provide users with a comprehensive visualization of demand trends, inventory levels, and sales data over customizable periods. This requirement focuses on developing an intuitive interface that aggregates real-time data from various sources, including e-commerce platforms, POS systems, and market research, to present actionable insights. The goal is to allow users to make informed decisions regarding inventory replenishment and pricing strategies. Users should be able to filter data by product category, location, and consumer demographics, enhancing strategic planning while helping to identify patterns that drive sales and inventory turnover. Integrating this dashboard with existing InvenTrack functionalities will create a cohesive view of business performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User accesses the dashboard to view real-time inventory levels and sales data to make strategic pricing decisions.

Given the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they access the Demand Analytics Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of current inventory levels and sales trends across various product categories.

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User filters sales data by date range and product category to analyze demand patterns.

Given the user is on the Demand Analytics Dashboard, when they select a specific date range and product category from the filtering options, then the displayed data should update to reflect sales trends solely within the selected parameters.

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User uses the dashboard to identify inventory turnover rates across different locations.

Given the user is viewing the Demand Analytics Dashboard, when they select the ‘Turnover Rates’ option for multiple locations, then they should see updated metrics indicating inventory turnover rates for each selected location.

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User examines consumer demographics data to align inventory with target market preferences.

Given the user is on the Demand Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate to the ‘Consumer Demographics’ section, then they should be able to view detailed analytics on buying preferences and trends segmented by age, gender, and location.

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User integrates the dashboard with an external POS system for synchronized data tracking.

Given the user is in the settings of the Demand Analytics Dashboard, when they connect their POS system, then the dashboard should automatically update to reflect current sales data in real time from the connected system.

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User generates a report based on dashboard data for presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user is viewing the Demand Analytics Dashboard, when they select the ‘Generate Report’ option, then they should receive a downloadable report in PDF format containing key insights derived from the dashboard data.

Demand Analytics Dashboard - User receives alerts for inventory levels falling below a defined threshold based on demand analytics.

Given the user has set threshold levels for inventory in the Demand Analytics Dashboard, when any product's inventory level drops below this threshold, then the user should receive an instant notification alerting them of the low stock status.

Automated Restocking Recommendations

"As an inventory manager, I want automated restocking recommendations to maintain optimal stock levels so that I can reduce manual monitoring and prevent stockouts."

Description

This requirement seeks to implement an automated recommendation system that suggests restocking quantities for products based on their sales velocity, current inventory levels, and historical demand data. The system should analyze previous patterns to forecast future inventory needs, thus preventing stockouts and overstock situations. Integration with the existing inventory management system will allow for seamless tracking and adjustment of stock levels, pushing notifications to users when products fall below designated thresholds. The automation of these recommendations will help users maintain optimal stock levels without constant manual oversight, increasing operational efficiency and reducing lost sales due to stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Restocking Recommendations Triggered by Low Inventory.

Given the current inventory level of a product is below the designated threshold, when the system analyzes historical sales data and recognizes consistent sales velocity, then it should recommend a specific restocking quantity to the user.

User Notification for Restocking Recommendations.

Given that a product's inventory level falls below the defined threshold, when the automated recommendation system generates restocking suggestions, then a notification should be sent to the user within 5 minutes via email and within the application.

Integration with Existing Inventory Management System.

Given that the automated restocking recommendation system is operational, when it analyzes inventory levels, then it should seamlessly update the existing inventory management system with the recommended quantities without manual intervention.

Forecasting Accuracy Measurement over a Sales Period.

Given a 30-day sales period, when the automated recommendation system suggests restocking quantities, then at least 90% of recommended items should be successfully stocked without resulting in excess inventory or stockouts.

User Review and Validation of Recommendations.

Given that a restocking recommendation is generated, when the user reviews the recommendations within the application, then the user should be able to accept or modify each recommendation before finalizing the restocking order.

Demand Fluctuation Impact Assessment.

Given the historical sales data is integrated, when demand for a product fluctuates significantly, then the system should dynamically adjust recommendations to reflect the new trends within 24 hours.

Reporting of Stock Levels and Recommendations.

Given the user accesses the inventory report, when reviewing the report, then it should clearly display current stock levels, historical sales data, and recommended restock quantities for each product in a user-friendly format.

User Role-Based Access Control

"As a system administrator, I want to set up role-based access control so that each user can only access the information necessary for their job responsibilities."

Description

This requirement focuses on establishing a role-based access control system within InvenTrack to ensure that users can only access data relevant to their roles. Different roles, such as administrators, sales staff, and managers, will have distinct permissions and capabilities to safeguard proprietary business information. The implementation will include an easy-to-use interface for assigning roles and adjusting permissions depending on a user's responsibilities. This integration will enhance security measures within the system, preventing unauthorized access and promoting a collaborative work environment where sensitive information is adequately protected.

Acceptance Criteria

Role-Specific Data Access Verification for Managers

Given a user assigned the Manager role, when they log into InvenTrack, then they can access inventory reports and sales data but cannot access user role settings or accounting data.

Admin Role Permission Adjustment

Given a user with Admin role, when they navigate to the user management section, then they are able to add, edit, or delete user roles and permissions without errors while also seeing an audit log of changes made.

Sales Staff Access for Product Management

Given a user assigned the Sales Staff role, when they attempt to access the product pricing section, then they are restricted from making changes to pricing and see an appropriate error message indicating insufficient permissions.

Access Control for Unauthorized Users

Given a user not assigned any role, when they attempt to log in or access the InvenTrack system, then they receive an access denied message and are unable to view any dashboard or data.

Dynamic Permissions Update Reflection

Given an active user with modified roles, when the administrator updates their role from Sales Staff to Manager, then the user immediately sees updated permissions upon their next login without needing to refresh the system.

Audit Trail for Role Changes

Given a user with Admin role, when they change the role of another user, then an entry is logged in the audit trail with details of the change such as user ID and timestamp, accessible for review.

User Friendly Interface for Role Management

Given a user with Admin privileges, when they navigate to the role assignment interface, then they should see a clear and intuitive layout that enables efficient role assignment with minimal clicks.

Integration with Third-Party E-Commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want seamless integration with my platform so that my inventory management stays up-to-date automatically, reducing manual entry errors."

Description

This requirement is focused on the development of robust APIs that allow InvenTrack to integrate seamlessly with various third-party e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento. This integration will enable automatic syncing of inventory levels, sales orders, and pricing updates between the inventory management system and the e-commerce platforms. The goal is to ensure data consistency and real-time updating capabilities, which will enhance the user experience for both business owners and their customers. This requirement will also include documentation and support for users to facilitate smooth data migration and integration processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Shopify for real-time inventory syncing

Given that a Shopify store is connected to InvenTrack, when a product's inventory level is updated in InvenTrack, then the corresponding product inventory in Shopify should reflect the change within 5 minutes.

Bulk updating of product pricing based on demand analytics

Given that demand-driven pricing is enabled in InvenTrack, when a bulk update is performed on product prices based on real-time demand trends, then all selected products' prices should be adjusted accurately according to the defined pricing strategy, confirmed by a price comparison report.

User documentation for third-party platform integration

Given that the user accesses the integration section of InvenTrack, when they download the integration guide, then the document should provide clear instructions for connecting to various e-commerce platforms, including common troubleshooting tips and FAQs, and should not exceed 10 pages.

Automatic syncing of sales orders from WooCommerce to InvenTrack

Given that a WooCommerce store is integrated with InvenTrack, when an order is placed in WooCommerce, then the order details including product IDs, quantities, and customer information should be automatically synced to InvenTrack within 2 minutes.

Real-time pricing updates during peak sales periods

Given that a peak sales period is identified by InvenTrack, when real-time demand increases for specific products, then those products' prices should automatically adjust to the predefined pricing rules and reflect changes on the e-commerce platform within 3 minutes.

Error handling during data synchronization with Magento

Given that an error occurs during the sync process between InvenTrack and Magento, when the error is detected, then a descriptive error message should be logged in the system, and a notification should be sent to the admin detailing the issue and suggested corrective action.

Competitor Price Tracker

Competitor Price Tracker continuously monitors competitor pricing strategies and alerts users to significant changes. By enabling users to stay competitive without manual checks, this tool enhances pricing decisions and ensures products remain appealing to price-sensitive customers.

Requirements

Real-time Price Monitoring

"As a small retail owner, I want to receive instantaneous alerts about my competitors' price changes so that I can adjust my pricing strategies in real-time and maintain my market competitiveness."

Description

The Real-time Price Monitoring requirement involves implementing a feature that continuously tracks competitor prices across various e-commerce platforms. This requires integration with web scraping tools and APIs to gather current pricing information. The functionality enables users to receive instant alerts when competitor prices fluctuate significantly, ensuring they can adjust their pricing strategies accordingly. Benefits include enhanced competitiveness, reduced manual workload for price checks, and the ability to capitalize on market changes swiftly. This feature integrates seamlessly into the existing InvenTrack dashboard, presenting users with a clear overview of competitor pricing trends alongside their own inventory data.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when a competitor's price drops significantly below their own price.

Given the user has set a price threshold for receiving alerts, When a competitor's price falls below the defined threshold, Then the system should send an immediate notification to the user's dashboard and via email.

User can view a historical trend of competitor pricing on the InvenTrack dashboard.

Given the user accesses the Competitor Price Tracker section, When they select a competitor's product, Then a graphical representation of price trends over the past month should be displayed, showing fluctuations day by day.

User sets up a new competitor for monitoring prices through the InvenTrack dashboard.

Given the user is on the Competitor Price Tracker setup page, When they input the competitor's URL and product details, Then the system should successfully save the competitor details and start monitoring the prices for that product.

User adjusts the alert settings for competitor price tracking.

Given the user is on the alert settings page, When they change the price threshold and save the settings, Then the system should update the alert configurations successfully and notify the user of the changes.

System performance under high load while monitoring multiple competitors.

Given the system is monitoring prices for at least ten competitors simultaneously, When significant pricing changes occur, Then the system should process and alert users within two minutes without performance degradation.

User receives alerts only for significant price changes defined by their parameters.

Given the user has defined what constitutes a significant price change (e.g., 10% drop), When a competitor's price changes exceed this percentage, Then the system sends an alert; otherwise, no alert is sent.

Price Change Alert System

"As a store manager, I want to set personalized alerts for significant price drops from competitors so that I can quickly respond and ensure my products remain competitively priced without missing potential sales."

Description

The Price Change Alert System requirement specifies the creation of a notification mechanism that informs users when a competitor's price drops below a predefined threshold. This customization allows users to set alerts for specific products, saving them time and ensuring they stay relevant in a competitive market. The system must send notifications via email or in-app messaging, providing relevant details such as product comparisons and suggestions for pricing adjustments. This requirement supports businesses in maximizing their pricing strategies and enhancing customer satisfaction by maintaining appealing pricing.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a price drop alert for a specific product they have set a threshold for.

Given a user has set a price drop threshold for a product, When the competitor drops their price below the set threshold, Then the user receives an email notification containing the product details and suggested adjustments.

User receives in-app notifications for price changes of tracked products.

Given a user has tracked multiple products, When any competitor's price for those products changes significantly, Then the user receives an in-app message alerting them to the price change with details for each product.

User can customize the threshold for price change alerts for specific products.

Given a user is in the settings for price alert thresholds, When the user adjusts the price threshold for a specific product, Then the system updates the alert threshold and confirms the change to the user.

User receives notifications only for competitors they have selected to track.

Given a user has selected specific competitors, When a tracked competitor's price changes, Then the user receives an alert only if the price change pertains to products they are monitoring from those selected competitors.

User can view a history of price alerts in their account dashboard.

Given a user has received multiple price change alerts, When they access the alert history section in their account dashboard, Then they can see a list of all previous alerts sorted by date and product.

User can turn on/off price change alerts for specific products at any time.

Given a user is managing their product alerts, When they choose to toggle the alert settings for a specific product, Then the system reflects this change and enables/disables alerts accordingly.

User receives alerts with comparative pricing data from competitors.

Given a user receives a price drop alert, When they open the alert, Then the notification includes comparative pricing data showing the new competitor price, the user’s current price, and suggested pricing adjustments to remain competitive.

Competitor Pricing Dashboard

"As an e-commerce manager, I want a comprehensive dashboard that visually displays competitor pricing trends so that I can easily analyze data and make informed pricing decisions."

Description

The Competitor Pricing Dashboard requirement entails the development of a user-friendly interface that aggregates all competitor pricing data into a single, visually appealing report. This dashboard will use graphs and charts to display trends, make comparisons easier, and highlight key insights regarding pricing strategies. Users can filter by product categories or specific competitors, facilitating informed decision-making concerning their pricing tactics. This feature enhances usability and provides businesses with a strategic overview, empowering them to respond quickly to market changes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Competitor Pricing Dashboard to review competitor pricing data for a specific product category.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Competitor Pricing Dashboard and select a specific product category, then the dashboard should display a visual report of competitor prices for that category, including graphs and charts.

User filters the Competitor Pricing Dashboard by specific competitors to compare prices directly.

Given a user is on the Competitor Pricing Dashboard, when they select one or more competitors from the filter options, then the dashboard should update to display pricing information only for the selected competitors, ensuring the data is accurate and up-to-date.

User attempts to export competitor pricing data for offline analysis.

Given a user is viewing the Competitor Pricing Dashboard, when they click on the export button, then the system should generate and download a CSV file containing all displayed competitor pricing data without errors.

User utilizes the dashboard to visualize trends in competitor pricing over the last month.

Given a user is on the Competitor Pricing Dashboard, when they select a date range, then the dashboard should display a line chart showing price trends for the selected competitors over that time period.

User receives an alert for significant price changes from competitors displayed on the dashboard.

Given a user has set up price change alerts, when a competitor's price changes significantly, then the system should notify the user via email and display the alert prominently on the dashboard.

User interacts with the Competitor Pricing Dashboard and provides feedback on its usability.

Given a user has spent at least 10 minutes using the dashboard, when they submit feedback through the provided form, then the system should successfully record the feedback submission and display a confirmation message to the user.

User refreshes the Competitor Pricing Dashboard to view the most current pricing data.

Given a user is on the Competitor Pricing Dashboard, when they refresh the page, then the dashboard should reload with the latest competitor pricing data without any errors or delays.

Automated Price Adjustment Recommendations

"As a business owner, I want to receive automated recommendations for my pricing based on competitor analysis so that I can optimize my sales strategy without manually reviewing price data."

Description

The Automated Price Adjustment Recommendations requirement involves creating an algorithm that analyzes competitor price changes and suggests optimal price adjustments for the user's inventory. This feature leverages historical sales data, current trends, and competitor pricing to provide actionable insights into pricing strategies. It aims to assist users in maximizing revenue while remaining competitive in the market. The integration of this feature within the InvenTrack platform is crucial for enhancing decision-making capabilities, ultimately leading to increased profitability and customer retention.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification alerting them of a competitor’s price drop for a specific product they carry after updating their inventory in InvenTrack.

Given that the user has enabled price tracking for a product, When a competitor reduces their price, Then the user should receive a notification of the price drop within 5 minutes.

User wants to adjust prices based on suggestions provided by the Automated Price Adjustment Recommendations feature after integrating competitor pricing data.

Given that the user has logged into InvenTrack and accessed the price adjustment recommendations, When the user reviews the suggested price changes, Then the recommended prices should be calculated using at least the last month of competitor price data and historical sales trends.

User successfully implements the recommended price adjustments suggested by the feature and monitors the changes in sales performance over the following week.

Given that the user applies the recommended price adjustments, When they review sales data post-implementation, Then there should be at least a 10% increase in sales volume compared to the previous week.

User is analyzing price recommendation accuracy after 30 days of implementation of the feature.

Given that the user has been using price recommendations for 30 days, When the user compares sales data now against previous pricing strategies, Then at least 75% of the recommended prices should have resulted in an increase in sales or market competitiveness.

User wants to disable notifications for any future price adjustments after having set them up.

Given that the user has previously enabled notifications, When the user selects to disable price adjustment notifications, Then the system should confirm the deactivation and cease all further notifications for price changes immediately.

User discovers a discrepancy between the competitor price tracking data and the Automated Price Adjustment Recommendations output.

Given that the user has reported a discrepancy, When they submit their feedback through the provided channel, Then the system should log the incident and respond to the user within 24 hours for investigation.

Competitor Price History Tracking

"As a retail analyst, I want access to historical pricing data from competitors so that I can identify trends and adjust my pricing strategy based on long-term insights rather than just immediate changes."

Description

The Competitor Price History Tracking requirement focuses on storing and displaying historical pricing data of competitors over time. By implementing this feature, users can observe changes in competitor pricing patterns and assess the impact on their sales. This data will enable informed decision-making based on trends rather than just current prices. Users will also be able to generate reports for analysis, helping to identify peak pricing periods and optimal pricing strategies. The integration with existing reporting tools within InvenTrack will ensure a cohesive experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Competitors' historical pricing data is regularly displayed on the user dashboard.

Given a user accesses the dashboard, when the Competitor Price Tracker feature is active, then the dashboard should display a historical pricing chart for each monitored competitor showing prices over the last 30 days.

Users can filter competitor pricing data by date range.

Given a user is viewing the pricing history, when they use the date range filter, then the system should accurately display only the historical pricing data for the selected date range.

Users receive alerts for significant price changes in competitor products.

Given an active competitor tracking configuration, when a monitored competitor's price changes by more than 10%, then a notification alert should be sent to the user within 5 minutes of the change.

Users can generate reports on competitor pricing trends.

Given a user selects the 'Generate Report' option, when they choose the criteria for the report, then the system should compile a report that includes historical price trends, peak pricing periods, and a comparison of price changes over the last quarter.

Competitor pricing history is integrated with existing reporting tools.

Given that the user opens a historical price report, when they click to integrate with the reporting tool, then the system should seamlessly transfer the historical pricing data into the user's selected reporting format without data loss.

Users can view historical pricing alongside their sales data for analysis.

Given a user accesses the pricing history page, when they enable the 'Compare with Sales Data' option, then the historical pricing chart should overlay the user’s sales performance data, allowing for visual comparison of trends.

Inventory-Level Pricing Adjustments

This feature allows users to set specific price thresholds based on inventory levels. When stock is high, prices can be reduced to stimulate sales, and when stock is low, prices can be increased to maximize profit margins, facilitating better inventory turnover management.

Requirements

Dynamic Pricing Engine

"As a retail manager, I want the ability to adjust prices automatically based on inventory levels, so that I can maximize sales during high stock periods and optimize profit margins during low stock periods."

Description

The Dynamic Pricing Engine is a crucial component that allows users to establish price thresholds based on real-time inventory data. This feature will enable automated adjustments of product prices; reducing prices when inventory is high to drive sales and increasing prices when inventory is low to enhance profit margins. The integration of this engine into InvenTrack will significantly improve inventory turnover rates, ensuring that businesses can respond agilely to market demand. This not only aids in maximizing revenue but also supports better inventory management by aligning stock levels with customer purchasing patterns. The engine will leverage existing inventory data and market trends, creating a responsive pricing strategy that optimizes sales performance while preventing overstock and stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a low inventory threshold for a particular product in their InvenTrack account, and when the inventory level drops below this threshold, the pricing engine automatically increases the price to maximize profit.

Given the inventory level is low (below the set threshold), When the Dynamic Pricing Engine is activated, Then the product's price should increase by at least 10%.

A user has set a high inventory threshold, and when the inventory level exceeds this threshold, the pricing engine adjusts the pricing to stimulate sales.

Given the inventory level is high (above the set threshold), When the Dynamic Pricing Engine is activated, Then the product's price should decrease by at least 15%.

The user wants to monitor the changes in product pricing based on inventory levels over a 24 hour period to ensure that prices are adjusting as expected.

Given the Dynamic Pricing Engine has been in operation for 24 hours, When the user checks the pricing log, Then all price changes should reflect inventory levels accurately and show timestamps of adjustments.

A business owner regularly reviews inventory levels and the responsive pricing strategy must ensure that prices are competitive yet profitable based on market trends.

Given the integration with market trend analysis is in place, When inventory levels fluctuate, Then the pricing engine should adjust prices within 30 minutes considering competitor pricing.

The user tests the Dynamic Pricing Engine to see if it correctly adjusts prices for multiple products simultaneously based on their individual inventory thresholds.

Given multiple products are set with different pricing thresholds, When the inventory levels change, Then all applicable products’ prices should adjust accordingly within 5 minutes without errors.

Upon reaching the specified inventory levels, the pricing policy must notify the user about price changes via email.

Given a price adjustment has occurred due to inventory levels, When the adjustment is made, Then the user should receive an automated email notification detailing the changes.

Threshold Configuration Interface

"As a business owner, I want to configure my own price adjustment thresholds based on my inventory levels, so that I can create a pricing strategy that suits my specific business requirements and goals."

Description

The Threshold Configuration Interface allows users to define specific inventory thresholds for price adjustments directly through an intuitive user interface. Users can easily set high and low stock levels for their products, which triggers the pricing adjustments. This personalized control empowers users to tailor their pricing strategies according to their unique business needs. The interface will provide clear guidance and explanations for setting thresholds and will ensure that any adjustments made are reflected in real-time across the inventory system. This feature enhances user engagement by giving them direct input into revenue optimization strategies while ensuring that they are not burdened with complex configurations.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a low inventory threshold for a specific product and observes that the price automatically adjusts based on the defined rules when stock levels drop below that threshold.

Given the user has defined a low inventory threshold for a product, when the stock level goes below this threshold, then the system will automatically increase the product price by the specified amount to maximize profit margins.

User configures a high inventory threshold for a product and checks the pricing adjustments in the system after the stock levels are updated.

Given that the user has set a high inventory threshold for a product, when the stock level exceeds this threshold, then the system will automatically reduce the product price by the specified percentage to encourage sales.

User accesses the Threshold Configuration Interface to adjust pricing thresholds for multiple products and verifies that the changes are reflected in real-time across the inventory management system.

Given the user has adjusted the pricing thresholds for multiple products, when these changes are made, then all products should reflect the new pricing rules in real-time across the inventory management system without delays or errors.

User utilizes the help feature within the Threshold Configuration Interface while setting thresholds to ensure they understand how to configure pricing adjustments correctly.

Given the user accesses the help feature, when they view the guidance on configuring thresholds, then the information provided should clearly explain how to set low and high inventory thresholds and their implications for pricing adjustments.

User who makes adjustments to inventory thresholds wants to confirm that all automated alerts for pricing changes function as expected prior to going live.

Given the user has adjusted the thresholds, when the inventory levels trigger the pricing rules, then the system should send automated alerts to the user about these price changes in a timely manner as predetermined in settings.

User wants to ensure that any pricing adjustments made are compliant with their overall business strategy before finalizing the thresholds.

Given the user has set the thresholds, when they review the summary of pricing adjustments, then the system should allow the user to preview and confirm that all adjustments align with their business strategy before saving any changes.

User seeks to validate that historical data is utilized for pricing adjustments based on past inventory turnover rates.

Given the user has activated the pricing adjustment feature, when the inventory turnover rate is analyzed, then historical data should inform the pricing adjustments automatically based on previous trends of stock levels and sales velocities.

Sales Performance Analytics

"As a marketing analyst, I want to analyze sales performance data after implementing pricing adjustments, so that I can understand the impact of my pricing strategy and make informed decisions for future inventory management."

Description

The Sales Performance Analytics feature provides users with detailed insights into how pricing adjustments impact sales dynamics. By analyzing sales data alongside inventory levels, this feature enables users to track the effectiveness of their dynamic pricing strategies. Users will receive reports and analytics that showcase trends, sales volume changes, and revenue comparisons pre- and post-adjustment. Having access to actionable insights fosters data-driven decision-making, allowing users to refine their pricing tactics and inventory management practices continually. The integration of comprehensive analytics enhances the value of InvenTrack as it supports proactive adjustments to better align inventory with market demand.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Performance Review During High Stock Levels

Given high inventory levels, when a user adjusts prices downwards, then the system should reflect a decrease in pricing and generate a report showing an increase in sales volume within 2 weeks of adjustment.

Sales Performance Review During Low Stock Levels

Given low inventory levels, when a user raises prices, then the system should show a report of adjusted pricing and an increase in revenue within 2 weeks post-adjustment, confirming effective price management.

Effectiveness Analysis of Dynamic Pricing Strategies

Given a set of dynamic pricing changes, when the user requests an analytics report, then the system should provide a comparative analysis of sales before and after adjustments, including visual trend data within 3 business days.

User Dashboard Access to Sales Analytics

Given a user login to the InvenTrack dashboard, when they navigate to the Sales Performance Analytics section, then they should see a clear and visually engaging report summarizing pricing impacts on sales and stock levels.

Automated Report Generation for Inventory Pricing Changes

Given any pricing adjustments made, when the user saves the changes, then an automated report should be generated and emailed to the user within 24 hours summarizing the key metrics of the pricing adjustments.

Integration with E-commerce Platform for Pricing Adjustments

Given a connection between InvenTrack and an e-commerce platform, when the user inputs price adjustments based on inventory levels, then those changes should be automatically reflected in the e-commerce listings immediately after saving.

Comparison of Sales Data Against Historical Performance

Given the new sales performance analytics, when the user selects a specific time frame for historical comparison, then the system should display side-by-side charts showing trends and performance relative to past data.

Seasonal Pricing Strategies

Seasonal Pricing Strategies enable users to create price adjustments that align with seasonal demand. Whether it’s discounts during off-peak seasons or premium pricing during peak demand, this feature ensures pricing strategies are adaptive and capitalize on seasonal trends.

Requirements

Dynamic Pricing Adjustments

"As a retail business owner, I want to automatically adjust prices based on inventory levels so that I can optimize sales and reduce excess stock."

Description

The Dynamic Pricing Adjustments requirement enables users to automate price changes based on predefined criteria, such as inventory levels, competitor pricing, and customer demand. This feature integrates with InvenTrack’s real-time inventory monitoring to provide seamless pricing alterations that help maximize revenue while minimizing stockouts and overstock. It allows users to set rules for price adjustments, ensuring effective pricing strategies are maintained without manual intervention. This improves efficiency, enhances customer satisfaction by providing timely offers, and allows businesses to quickly respond to market changes.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets automated price adjustments based on low inventory levels for seasonal items, triggering discounts to clear stock before the end of the season.

Given the inventory level of a seasonal item falls below the threshold set by the user, when the defined price adjustment rule is activated, then the system applies a discount of 20% immediately.

Users receive alerts for price adjustments in response to competitor pricing changes detected through the system integration.

Given competitor pricing is monitored, when a competitor lowers their price on a similar item by more than 10%, then the system automatically adjusts the user's price to match or beat the competitor's price within a predefined range.

Users want to implement dynamic pricing during high-demand periods, such as holidays or promotional events, to maximize revenue.

Given it is a high-demand season as marked in the system, when a product’s demand increases by 30% compared to the previous month, then the system increases the product price by 15% automatically.

A retailer wants to validate if the system can handle multiple pricing rules simultaneously without conflicts.

Given multiple dynamic pricing rules are set for the same product, when an automated price adjustment is triggered by different rules, then the system can successfully resolve the rules and implement the most profitable price adjustment without errors.

Users need to manually review and adjust pricing based on system recommendations to ensure the strategy aligns with their business goals.

Given the system provides pricing recommendations based on market data, when a user reviews the recommendations, then they can approve or modify the suggested price adjustments within the user interface without any glitches.

Users intend to utilize historical sales data to inform future pricing adjustments more effectively.

Given the historical sales data is accessible in the system, when users analyze this data to set up future price adjustments, then they can apply adjustments that reflect sales trends effectively, with a clear report generated showing the expected impact.

Users want to ensure that price adjustments are reflected in all integrated sales channels immediately after adjustments are made in InvenTrack.

Given a price adjustment is made, when the update occurs in InvenTrack, then the new price should be automatically updated and displayed across all integrated e-commerce platforms within 5 minutes.

Custom Seasonal Pricing Templates

"As a marketing manager, I want to use seasonal pricing templates so that I can quickly adjust our pricing strategies and take advantage of seasonal trends."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing users with customizable templates to easily create and implement seasonal pricing strategies. With predefined settings for peak and off-peak seasons, users can modify these templates according to their specific business needs, allowing for efficient pricing management without needing extensive design or marketing knowledge. This feature also allows for scheduling of price updates, ensuring that businesses can effortlessly switch pricing in line with seasonal changes, which is critical for maximizing sales during high-demand periods and maintaining competitive pricing during slow periods.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new seasonal pricing template for an upcoming holiday sale.

Given a user is in the pricing management interface, when they select 'Create Seasonal Pricing Template', then they should see predefined settings for peak and off-peak seasons that can be modified.

User schedules a price update for a holiday season on a specific date.

Given a user has created a seasonal pricing template, when they set a start date for the price adjustment, then the system should automatically apply the new prices at the scheduled time without requiring manual intervention.

User modifies the percentage discount for an existing seasonal pricing template.

Given a user accesses an existing seasonal pricing template, when they change the discount percentage and save the template, then the updated pricing should reflect immediately in the pricing preview section.

User applies discounts to a category of products during an off-peak season using a seasonal pricing template.

Given the user has a seasonal pricing template set for off-peak discounts, when they select a product category and apply the template, then all products in that category should reflect the new discounted prices.

User views the historical effectiveness of past seasonal pricing templates.

Given a user accesses the seasonal pricing report section, when they select a seasonal pricing template from previous seasons, then they should see sales metrics comparing performance before, during, and after the promotional period.

User receives a confirmation upon successfully saving a seasonal pricing template.

Given the user creates or modifies a seasonal pricing template, when they click 'Save', then a confirmation message should appear, indicating that the template has been successfully saved, along with an option to view or edit immediately.

User deletes a seasonal pricing template that is no longer needed.

Given a user has an existing seasonal pricing template, when they select the delete option and confirm, then the template should be removed from the list of available templates without affecting other templates.

Competitor Price Monitoring

"As a store manager, I want to receive alerts when competitor prices change so that I can adjust our pricing strategy accordingly and remain competitive."

Description

This requirement involves the integration of a competitor price monitoring tool, which will automatically track and analyze the pricing strategies of competitors within the market. By providing users with insights and alerts related to their rivals' pricing moves, InvenTrack empowers users to make informed pricing decisions that can enhance competitiveness. This feature will include customizable alerts that notify users of significant price changes by competitors, helping businesses remain agile and proactive in adapting their pricing strategies to capture market share.

Acceptance Criteria

Competitor Price Monitoring during Peak Season

Given that a user activates competitor price monitoring during a peak season, when a competitor reduces their price on a monitored product, then the user receives an alert notification within 30 minutes of the price change.

Customizable Alerts for Competitor Pricing Changes

Given that a user accesses the settings for competitor pricing alerts, when the user customizes the alert thresholds, then the system must reflect these thresholds accurately and trigger alerts based on the specified criteria.

Analysis of Competitor Pricing Strategies

Given that the user has initiated a competitor price monitoring report, when the user views the report, then it should display a clear analysis of pricing trends, including at least three price changes for each monitored competitor over the past month.

Integration with Seasonal Pricing Strategies

Given that the user employs the seasonal pricing strategies feature, when competitor prices fluctuate during seasonal events, then the system must suggest price adjustments based on the competitor data and the user's defined seasonal strategy.

Real-time Data Synchronization with Competitor Pricing

Given that a user subscribes to the competitor price monitoring service, when there is a price update from any competitor, then the system must synchronize and display the updated pricing information in real-time in the user’s dashboard.

User Training on Competitor Price Monitoring Feature

Given that the competitor price monitoring feature has been released, when users access the help documentation, then they should find comprehensive guides and tutorials on how to set up and use the feature effectively.

Reporting Competitor Impact on Sales

Given that the user has enabled competitor price alerts, when a significant price drop occurs, then the system should capture any subsequent sales data and, within 24 hours, present a report of sales performance in relation to competitor pricing changes.

Performance Analytics for Seasonal Strategies

"As a data analyst, I want to view performance analytics on our seasonal pricing strategies so that I can make data-driven recommendations for future pricing models."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a comprehensive analytics dashboard dedicated to evaluating the effectiveness of seasonal pricing strategies. By aggregating sales data, customer feedback, and inventory levels, this feature helps users analyze which strategies yielded the best results in terms of sales and profitability. The insights gained from this analysis can guide future pricing decisions and help refine seasonal strategies. Moreover, it allows for the generation of reports that can be used for strategic planning and forecasting, significantly aiding decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User accessing the performance analytics dashboard for the first time to evaluate the effectiveness of their seasonal pricing strategies.

Given the user has logged into the InvenTrack system, when they navigate to the Performance Analytics section, then they should see an overview of seasonal pricing strategies with key metrics such as sales performance, customer feedback scores, and inventory levels displayed.

User generates a detailed report on seasonal pricing effectiveness for the last quarter.

Given the user selects the last quarter in the analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a comprehensive report is produced showing sales data, profitability metrics, and visual analysis of successful pricing strategies with an option to download the report as a PDF.

User reviews the historical sales performance of products under different seasonal pricing strategies.

Given the user accesses a specific product's performance metrics, when they filter by seasonal pricing strategy, then they should see a comparative analysis of sales performance for each pricing strategy implemented during specified seasonal periods.

User wants to understand customer sentiment related to seasonal pricing adjustments.

Given the user is on the performance analytics dashboard, when they view customer feedback associated with seasonal pricing strategies, then they should be able to see aggregated positive and negative feedback, along with customer comments, categorized by pricing strategy.

User evaluates overall profitability and stock levels after implementing seasonal pricing strategies.

Given the user has accessed the profitability overview in the analytics dashboard, when they select a specific seasonal pricing strategy period, then they should see a detailed breakdown of profit margins alongside inventory levels during that period, represented in a graphical format.

User collaborates with team members to assess the performance of pricing strategies through shared dashboards.

Given the user chooses the 'Share Dashboard' option, when they input team member emails and send access invitations, then all invited members should receive an email prompt allowing them to view the shared performance analytics dashboard.

User integrates the performance analytics data with external business intelligence tools.

Given the user selects the 'Export Data' option from the analytics dashboard, when they choose a file format compatible with external BI tools (e.g., CSV, Excel), then the data related to seasonal pricing performance should be exported successfully and formatted correctly for import into those tools.

Automated Customer Segmentation

"As a marketing specialist, I want to automatically segment customers based on their buying habits so that I can offer targeted pricing and promotions."

Description

This requirement allows users to segment customers based on their purchasing behaviors and preferences, enabling tailored pricing strategies that enhance customer loyalty and maximize sales. By analyzing historical purchase data, the system can automatically create customer segments, allowing for personalized pricing offers that cater to different buyer personas during seasonal price adjustments. This feature supports targeted marketing efforts and ensures that promotions are relevant to the most responsive customer segments, increasing the overall effectiveness of seasonal pricing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Customer Segmentation for Promotional Campaigns

Given a user has uploaded historical purchase data, when the automated segmentation process runs, then the system should create distinct customer segments based on purchasing behaviors and preferences with at least 80% accuracy as validated by historical data comparison.

Real-time Segment Adjustments for Seasonal Pricing

Given a user has set seasonal pricing strategies, when significant changes in customer purchasing behavior occur, then the system should automatically adjust customer segments and notify the user with the updated segmentation report within 30 minutes.

Integration of Segmentation with Pricing Strategies

Given the system has generated customer segments, when the user creates a promotional pricing strategy for a specific segment, then the system should successfully apply the specified pricing adjustments to the relevant customer group without errors.

Testing for Customer Response to Segmented Offers

Given a promotional campaign has been launched targeting specific customer segments, when the campaign duration is completed, then the system should provide analytics showing a minimum of 20% increase in engagement and conversion rates compared to previous campaigns.

User-Friendly Interface for Viewing Segmented Data

Given a user accesses the customer segmentation feature, when they view the segmented data, then the UI should display clear and understandable segment summaries with visual aids that can be interpreted by a user with no technical background.

Feedback Loop for Continuous Improvement of Segmentation

Given the system has implemented customer segmentation, when the user provides feedback regarding the relevance and effectiveness of the segments, then the system should collect this feedback and incorporate it into future segmentation criteria within the next system update.

Automated Price Optimization

This feature leverages machine learning algorithms to analyze historical sales data, market conditions, and inventory levels, recommending ideal price points for products. Automated Price Optimization helps users to maximize profit margins while ensuring competitiveness in the market.

Requirements

Real-time Price Adjustment

"As a retail manager, I want the system to automatically adjust prices in real-time so that I can stay competitive and maximize profits without manually monitoring the market."

Description

The Real-time Price Adjustment requirement enables the Automated Price Optimization feature to dynamically modify product prices based on real-time market data, competitor pricing, and changes in inventory levels. This functionality ensures that users can remain competitive and responsive to market conditions by adjusting prices immediately as fluctuations occur. By implementing this requirement, businesses can maximize their profit margins, minimize overstock situations, and respond swiftly to competitor pricing strategies. Overall, this will enhance the ability of businesses to make data-driven decisions that optimize revenue potential.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a price adjustment for a product based on a competitor's price reduction during a promotional campaign.

Given a price change from a competitor, when the user inputs the competitor's new price, then InvenTrack should instantly recommend an adjusted product price that maintains the user's desired profit margin.

The system automatically adjusts prices in response to fluctuations in product inventory levels, ensuring optimal stock turnover rates.

Given a low inventory alert for a product, when the inventory level falls below the defined threshold, then the system should automatically increase the product price to manage demand and encourage sales without stockout situations.

A user reviews the price adjustment history for an item to analyze pricing effectiveness over time.

Given the user accesses the price adjustment report, when the user selects a specific product, then the report should display a detailed history of all price changes made for that product, along with sales data and competitor prices at each point of adjustment.

The Automated Price Optimization feature updates prices based on real-time market conditions and competitor pricing feeds.

Given that real-time market data is available, when the competitor's pricing changes, then InvenTrack should automatically adjust the user's product prices within 5 minutes to reflect competitive market rates based on the configured pricing strategy.

The user sets pricing rules within the Automated Price Optimization feature to govern price adjustments for specific product categories.

Given that the user defines pricing rules, when the rules are saved, then the system should enforce these rules during the next price adjustment cycle, ensuring compliance with user-defined constraints.

A user can manually override automated price adjustments to ensure pricing alignment with business strategy.

Given that the user requires a manual price override, when the user selects a product and enters a new price, then that new price should be applied immediately, and the system should log the override action for auditing purposes.

The user evaluates the impact of price adjustments on sales performance over a specific timeframe.

Given the user requests a report on sales performance following price adjustments, when the user specifies the timeframe, then the report should show a comparative analysis of sales volume and revenue before and after the price changes for the selected products.

User-defined Pricing Rules

"As a business owner, I want to create custom pricing rules so that I can align my pricing strategies with my business objectives and customer needs."

Description

This requirement allows users to create customizable pricing rules based on various parameters such as cost, demand elasticity, seasonality, and competitor pricing. Users can define their pricing strategies that align with their business goals and customer segments. The implementation of user-defined pricing rules enhances the flexibility and effectiveness of the Automated Price Optimization feature, enabling businesses to apply unique strategies that reflect their specific market dynamics and improve customer satisfaction through tailored pricing.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new pricing rule based on cost and competitor pricing.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the pricing rules section and enter a cost-based rule, then the system should save the rule and apply it to the relevant products correctly.

User modifies an existing pricing rule based on demand elasticity.

Given a user has an existing pricing rule based on demand elasticity, when they update the parameters of the rule, then the system should successfully save the changes and reapply the updated rules to all affected products.

User tests the effectiveness of a pricing rule during a sales promotion.

Given a user has activated a pricing rule for a sales promotion, when the promotion runs, then the system should accurately track sales data and compare it against expected outcomes to validate the rule's effectiveness.

User duplicates an existing pricing rule for a different product category.

Given a user is in the pricing rules section, when they select an existing rule and choose to duplicate it, then the system should create an identical rule that can be modified for a different product category without errors.

User receives an alert when a competitor changes their pricing.

Given a competitor has adjusted their pricing for items in the user’s inventory, when the change is detected by the system, then the user should receive an alert notification indicating the price change and suggested adjustments to their pricing rules.

User views a report on the performance of customized pricing rules.

Given a user has multiple active pricing rules, when they request a performance report, then the system should generate a comprehensive report displaying key metrics such as revenue changes and sales volume resulting from these rules.

User defines a pricing rule that includes seasonal adjustments.

Given a user creates a pricing rule that includes parameters for seasonality, when the specified season starts, then the system should automatically adjust prices according to the defined rule without user intervention.

Comprehensive Reporting Dashboard

"As a data analyst, I want to access a reporting dashboard that shows the impact of pricing changes on sales so that I can analyze performance and refine my pricing strategies accordingly."

Description

The Comprehensive Reporting Dashboard requirement entails the development of a user-friendly reporting interface that provides visual insights into the effectiveness of the Automated Price Optimization feature. This dashboard will display key performance indicators (KPIs) such as sales trends, profit margins, and pricing adjustments over time. By implementing this requirement, users will gain a better understanding of their pricing strategies' impact on overall business performance, allowing for informed decision-making and strategy refinement.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Comprehensive Reporting Dashboard after using the Automated Price Optimization feature to evaluate pricing strategies.

Given the user has access to the dashboard, when they open the reporting interface, then they should see visual representations of key performance indicators such as sales trends, profit margins, and pricing adjustments.

User customizes the date range on the Comprehensive Reporting Dashboard to analyze sales data during a specific promotional period.

Given the reporting dashboard is open, when the user selects a custom date range and applies it, then the dashboard should update to reflect the sales data for that specific range accurately.

User views the profit margins report after changes made to product pricing based on the Automated Price Optimization feature.

Given the user selects the profit margins KPI, when the dashboard refreshes, then the user should see an accurate representation of profit margin changes over time in relation to the applied pricing adjustments.

User reviews the effectiveness of pricing strategies using the comprehensive dashboard after implementing changes suggested by the Automated Price Optimization feature for a month.

Given that one month has passed since implementing pricing adjustments, when the user accesses the dashboard, then the sales trends should reflect the impact of the changes on sales volume and profitability accurately.

User analyzes the correlation between pricing adjustments made through the Automated Price Optimization and overall sales performance through the Reporting Dashboard.

Given the user is on the reporting dashboard, when they view the correlation metrics, then there should be a clear visual display indicating the relationship between pricing adjustments and changes in sales performance.

User identifies the top-performing products based on the data displayed in the Comprehensive Reporting Dashboard.

Given the dashboard is loaded with sales data, when the user filters for top-performing products, then they should see a ranked list of products based on sales volume and profitability.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want the pricing adjustments to sync automatically across all my online stores so that I can avoid manual updates and potential errors."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement ensures that the Automated Price Optimization feature seamlessly connects with major e-commerce platforms like Shopify, WooCommerce, and BigCommerce. This integration is critical for synchronizing pricing changes across multiple sales channels, ensuring that all listings reflect the optimized prices in real-time. By implementing this requirement, businesses can streamline their operations and reduce the likelihood of pricing errors, maintaining consistency and trust with their customers.

Acceptance Criteria

Integrating InvenTrack's Automated Price Optimization feature with Shopify to reflect real-time price adjustments based on optimized price recommendations for various product categories during a major sales event.

Given that the Automated Price Optimization feature has generated new price points for products, when the integration with Shopify is triggered, then the prices on all relevant product listings in Shopify should be updated to reflect the new optimized prices within five minutes.

Ensuring that the Automated Price Optimization feature's price adjustments are correctly synchronized across WooCommerce store when inventory levels change after a stock replenishment.

Given that a product's inventory level has increased due to a recent stock replenishment, when the price optimization algorithm runs, then the updated price should be correctly reflected in the WooCommerce store without any manual intervention.

Connecting InvenTrack with BigCommerce to allow automated price updates during the peak holiday shopping season, ensuring that competitive pricing remains consistent across all platforms.

Given that the Automated Price Optimization feature has adjusted prices based on competitor analysis, when the integration process runs, then all price changes should be propagated to BigCommerce listings in real-time, validating that no discrepancies remain between InvenTrack and BigCommerce pricing.

Validating the error handling mechanism of the Integration with E-commerce Platforms when there is a failure in price sync with Shopify due to network issues.

Given that a network error occurs during the price synchronization process with Shopify, when the error occurs, then an appropriate error message should be logged in InvenTrack, and the system should attempt to retry the synchronization automatically after a defined interval.

Testing the user experience of setting up price optimization settings in InvenTrack for products sold in multiple e-commerce platforms.

Given that a user configures the Automated Price Optimization settings for a product, when the user saves the settings, then the system should generate confirmation feedback indicating successful configuration and updated settings across all linked e-commerce platforms.

Analyzing the impact of the Automated Price Optimization feature on sales performance post-implementation across various platforms.

Given that the Automated Price Optimization feature has been active for 30 days, when a user views the sales report, then there should be a measurable increase in sales volume for products whose prices were adjusted by the feature compared to the previous 30-day period.

Alerts for Price Changes

"As a business manager, I want to receive alerts when prices are adjusted so that I can stay informed and make strategic decisions without having to check the system constantly."

Description

The Alerts for Price Changes requirement includes a notification system that informs users of significant price changes, either suggested or applied, based on the Automated Price Optimization feature. Users can receive alerts via email or within the application, helping them to stay informed about market conditions and pricing strategies without constantly monitoring. This requirement enhances user engagement and ensures that stakeholders can respond to pricing shifts quickly and effectively, fostering a proactive approach to inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an email alert for a significant price increase on one of their products after the Automated Price Optimization system analyzes market conditions.

Given the user has enabled email notifications for price changes, when a significant price increase occurs based on the recommendations from the Automated Price Optimization feature, then an email alert should be sent to the user with details of the price change and product information.

User checks the application and sees notified price changes in the dashboard summary after price adjustments have been applied.

Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when a significant price change is applied, then the user should see a notification badge on their dashboard indicating the number of new price alerts and access to detailed changes.

User configures their alert preferences to control how they are notified about price changes and evaluates if the settings are respected.

Given the user is in the settings menu, when they adjust their preference for receiving alerts (either email or application notifications), then the system should save and apply these preferences for all future price change notifications.

User receives an alert for a suggested price decrease and decides to apply it to improve competitiveness in the market.

Given the user receives a notification for a suggested price decrease, when they click on the alert, then the system should provide an option to apply the suggested change directly with a confirmation prompt before the action is completed.

User evaluates the effectiveness of price change alerts over a set period to determine if they have led to improved sales.

Given the user accesses the analytics dashboard, when they review the sales data for the month following the implementation of price change alerts, then they should see an increase in sales performance directly correlated with the times they received alerts for price changes.

User wants to unsubscribe from price change alerts and successfully completes the process in the application.

Given the user is in the notifications settings, when they choose to unsubscribe from price change alerts and confirm their choice, then the system should remove them from the alert list and display a confirmation message that alerts have been turned off.

User is curious about recent price changes and looks up the price change history for their products.

Given the user accesses the price change history section in the application, when they request to see the past price changes for a specific product, then the system should display a chronological list of all recent price changes including dates, previous prices, and new suggested prices.

Historical Price Analysis

"As a marketing strategist, I want to review historical pricing data so that I can understand past trends and inform our future pricing strategies effectively."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling users to analyze historical pricing data to evaluate the effectiveness of past pricing strategies. By visualizing historical price movements against sales data, users will be able to identify trends, understand the impact of seasonal changes, and refine their future pricing strategies. Implementation of this feature will empower businesses to make more informed decisions based on historical performance and anticipated market conditions, driving better overall financial outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Historical Price Analysis feature to view pricing trends for a selected product over the past year.

Given that the user has logged into InvenTrack and selected a product, when they navigate to the Historical Price Analysis section, then they should see a visual representation of the product's historical prices alongside corresponding sales data for the last twelve months.

User filters historical price analysis data by date range to evaluate a specific seasonal impact on pricing.

Given that the user is in the Historical Price Analysis section, when they select a custom date range for analysis, then the system should update the visualization to reflect historical prices and sales data only for that specified date range.

User evaluates the impact of historical pricing adjustments on sales volume to determine effectiveness of past strategies.

Given that the user has selected a product and a specific time period, when they analyze the provided data, then they should be able to compare sales volume variations pre-and-post price changes explicitly shown in the report.

User generates a report summarizing their historical price analysis findings for presentation or further review.

Given that the user has completed their historical price analysis, when they click on the 'Generate Report' button, then a downloadable PDF report should be created, detailing historical prices, sales data, and key insights of the analysis.

User accesses tooltips within the Historical Price Analysis feature to get additional context about data visualizations.

Given that the user is viewing the Historical Price Analysis, when they hover over any data point on the visualization, then a tooltip should appear showing detailed information about the price and sales data associated with that point.

User receives insights and recommendations based on historical analysis to optimize future pricing strategies.

Given that the user has completed their analysis of historical pricing data, when they click on the 'Insights' section, then they should receive actionable recommendations for future pricing strategies based on historical trends and performance metrics.

Customer Segment Pricing

"As a sales manager, I want to set different prices for various customer segments so that I can maximize sales and enhance customer satisfaction through personalized pricing strategies."

Description

The Customer Segment Pricing requirement allows users to set different pricing strategies based on distinct customer segments (e.g., VIP customers, first-time buyers, etc.). This functionality provides businesses with the agility to tailor pricing based on customer profiles and purchasing behavior, enhancing customer loyalty and increasing conversion rates. By meeting this requirement, the Automated Price Optimization feature can significantly boost revenue by optimizing prices for individual customer segments.

Acceptance Criteria

As a user, I want to be able to create pricing strategies for VIP customers to ensure that they receive exclusive discounts when they log into their account, enhancing their loyalty and encouraging repeat purchases.

Given that the user has identified a customer segment labeled 'VIP Customers', When the user sets a discount percentage for this segment, Then the discount should be applied automatically at checkout for all VIP customers making a purchase.

As a retailer, I want first-time buyers to see special promotional prices that encourage them to make a purchase, making the checkout process tailored to them.

Given that a customer is classified as a 'first-time buyer', When the user sets a specific promotional price for that segment, Then the price should reflect the promotional amount during the checkout process for first-time buyers only.

As an inventory manager, I want to evaluate how each customer segment responds to the changes in pricing, allowing us to adjust our strategies effectively based on their purchasing behavior.

Given that pricing strategies have been applied to distinct customer segments, When an inventory manager runs the sales report, Then they should see a breakdown of sales performance attributed to each customer segment, including conversion rates and revenue generated.

As a user, I need the system to support multiple segments with individualized pricing without any manual intervention to ensure efficiency and accuracy in pricing strategies.

Given that the user has created multiple customer segments with assigned pricing rules, When automatic pricing updates are triggered by inventory or market changes, Then all related segments should reflect the updated pricing without manual adjustments.

As a marketing manager, I want to ensure that promotional pricing for special events (like holidays or store anniversaries) is easily applied to specific customer segments to drive sales.

Given that a promotional event is identified, When the user applies a promotional price to a specific customer segment for the duration of the event, Then the promotional price should automatically apply at checkout for that segment during the event period.

Visual Pricing Analytics

Visual Pricing Analytics presents data on pricing performance and enables users to visualize the impact of pricing changes on sales and profitability. This feature enhances users’ understanding of pricing dynamics, allowing for informed decision-making based on clear visual insights.

Requirements

Dynamic Pricing Visualization

"As a pricing analyst, I want to visualize the impact of pricing changes on sales and profitability so that I can make informed recommendations for pricing strategies that maximize revenue."

Description

Dynamic Pricing Visualization enables users to analyze pricing changes in real-time, providing insights into how pricing strategies impact sales volume and profitability. This feature incorporates interactive charts and graphs that visualize historical data and project future trends, allowing businesses to make data-driven decisions regarding pricing adjustments. The ability to view the correlation between pricing changes and sales enables users to optimize their pricing strategies, thus enhancing revenue generation and competitive positioning. This requirement is crucial for small and medium-sized businesses to adapt quickly to market changes and consumer preferences, thereby maintaining a competitive edge in the market.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Price Adjustment Monitoring

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they access the Dynamic Pricing Visualization feature, then they should see real-time updates of pricing changes reflected in the charts and graphs within 3 seconds of a price adjustment.

Historical Price Data Comparison

Given a user selects a specific product in the Dynamic Pricing Visualization, when they view the historical pricing data, then they should be able to compare at least the last 12 months of pricing and sales data visually through interactive charts.

Impact Analysis on Sales Volume

Given a user has implemented a new pricing strategy, when they view the Dynamic Pricing Visualization, then they should see a clear correlation between the pricing changes and any shifts in sales volume within a specified timeframe.

Profitability Projection Features

Given a user inputs proposed pricing changes into the Dynamic Pricing Visualization, when they generate a profitability projection, then the system should calculate and display projected profits and losses accurately based on historical data and trends.

User Training and Documentation Access

Given a user accesses the Dynamic Pricing Visualization feature, when they click on the help icon, then they should be able to view or download training materials that explain how to effectively use the visualization tools.

Mobile Compatibility Testing

Given a user accesses InvenTrack through a mobile device, when they use the Dynamic Pricing Visualization feature, then all charts and graphs should be fully functional and visually consistent with the desktop version.

Pricing Impact Reports

"As a business owner, I want to generate reports that summarize pricing changes’ effects on sales so that I can assess the effectiveness of my pricing strategy and make informed adjustments."

Description

Pricing Impact Reports provide comprehensive summaries of the effects of pricing adjustments on overall sales performance. This module will generate customizable reports that include key performance indicators (KPIs), sales trends, and profitability assessments related to pricing changes. Users can access these reports to understand the effectiveness of their pricing strategies over specific periods and make necessary adjustments. Integration with existing inventory and sales data ensures that users have a holistic view of how pricing impacts the entire business operation. By empowering users with detailed analytics, this feature contributes to smarter decision-making and enhanced operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Manager generates a Pricing Impact Report for Q3 to analyze the effect of a recent price drop on sales performance.

Given that the user selects the time period for Q3, When they generate the report, Then the report should display total sales volume, average discount percentage, and profit margins for the selected period.

A Retail Owner wants to customize the Pricing Impact Report to include specific KPIs pertinent to their business.

Given that the user is on the report customization screen, When they select KPIs such as 'Customer Retention Rate' and 'Sales Growth Rate', Then the generated report must include these KPIs alongside the standard metrics.

An E-commerce Business Analyst reviews the Pricing Impact Report to assess the impact of promotional pricing on profitability.

Given that the user opens the Pricing Impact Report for the specified promotional period, When they compare the baseline profitability against promotional periods, Then the report should clearly show a visual representation of profitability changes through charts or graphs.

A Retail Manager needs to compare sales trends before and after a price change over different products.

Given that the user selects multiple products in their inventory, When they generate a Pricing Impact Report for those products, Then the report must provide a comparative analysis of sales volume and profit before and after the price change for each product.

A User accesses the Pricing Impact Report to share insights with the marketing team for strategy adjustments.

Given that the user selects the option to export the report, When they choose a file format and confirm, Then the report should download successfully in the selected format with all data intact.

An Operations Manager wishes to analyze the long-term effects of recurring pricing adjustments on overall profitability.

Given that the user requests a historical Pricing Impact Report spanning multiple quarters, When the report is generated, Then it should provide historical data trends and a cumulative summary of profitability linked to price adjustments over time.

Real-time Competitor Pricing Tracking

"As a retail manager, I want to track real-time competitor pricing so that I can adjust my pricing strategies dynamically and remain competitive in the market."

Description

Real-time Competitor Pricing Tracking allows users to monitor and analyze competitor pricing in relation to their own pricing strategies. This feature aggregates data from various competitor websites and provides alerts on significant pricing changes or promotions that could affect market share. By visualizing competitor pricing trends and comparing them against the user’s own prices, businesses can adjust their prices effectively to remain competitive in the market. This feature is vital for responding quickly to market fluctuations, ensuring that users can adapt their pricing strategies based on real-time information.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Real-time Competitor Pricing Tracking feature on InvenTrack to analyze competitor pricing trends during a peak sales season.

Given that the user is logged in and has navigated to the Real-time Competitor Pricing Tracking section, when they select a competitor from the list, then the system should display the competitor's current pricing, changes over the past week, and alerts for any significant pricing changes.

User receives an alert about a competitor's promotional pricing during a major sales event.

Given that tracking is active for a specific competitor, when that competitor initiates a promotional event or changes their pricing significantly, then the system should send a real-time notification to the user via email and within the app, detailing the new pricing information.

User wants to adjust their own pricing based on the competitor pricing insights provided by InvenTrack.

Given that the user has accessed the competitor pricing trend data, when they decide to adjust their prices, then the system should allow them to input new prices and automatically update their inventory pricing accordingly, with a record of the pricing change.

User evaluates the effectiveness of pricing strategies by analyzing the impact of competitor pricing changes on their sales performance.

Given that the user has access to their sales data and competitor pricing trends, when they generate a report, then the system should provide a visual representation comparing their pricing changes against competitor changes alongside their sales performance metrics over the same period.

User wants to ensure the accuracy of pricing data aggregated from competitor websites.

Given that competitor pricing data is being aggregated, when the user checks for a specific competitor, then the system should validate the accuracy of the data by conducting a refresh operation, comparing the aggregated data against the live competitor website data, and flagging discrepancies for user review.

User requires historical pricing data for analysis of long-term pricing strategies.

Given that the user has requested historical pricing data, when they select a time frame for analysis, then the system should display the historical pricing trends for the selected competitors, including charts and key data points for decisions.

User seeks to compare multiple competitors' pricing strategies side-by-side.

Given that the user wishes to compare pricing, when they select multiple competitors from the tracking list, then the system should produce a side-by-side comparison view of current pricing, trends, and alerts for all selected competitors.

Customizable Pricing Dashboards

"As a marketing manager, I want to customize my pricing dashboard to display the metrics most relevant to my sales strategies so that I can make quick and informed pricing decisions."

Description

Customizable Pricing Dashboards provide users with a personalized interface to visualize their key pricing metrics. This feature will allow users to choose which metrics are displayed, such as sales volume, average order value, and profit margins, and organize them according to their preferences. By having a tailored dashboard, users can easily access the most relevant information at a glance, enhancing their ability to make quick decisions regarding pricing. Integration with our existing analytics tools will ensure that the data presented is up-to-date and actionable, making this feature a cornerstone of effective pricing strategy management.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes their pricing dashboard with preferred metrics while logged into their account.

Given the user is authenticated, when they access the dashboard customization settings, then they should be able to select and drag-and-drop pricing metrics to their dashboard layout, and upon saving, those changes should be reflected on the main dashboard view.

User wants to view the real-time performance of their selected pricing metrics on the dashboard.

Given the user has saved their dashboard configuration, when they refresh the page, then the dashboard should display real-time data reflecting the latest sales volume, average order value, and profit margins accurately.

User identifies a need to adjust the displayed metrics based on seasonal changes in their business.

Given the user is on their pricing dashboard, when they navigate to the customization settings, then they should be able to remove existing metrics and add new ones relevant to their current pricing strategy, and those changes should be saved successfully.

User wishes to check the historical data for their selected pricing metrics.

Given the user has customized their dashboard, when they select a metric to view historical trends, then a graphical representation of the selected metric over time should be displayed, allowing them to analyze pricing performance.

User shares their customized dashboard with other team members for collaboration.

Given the user customizes their dashboard, when they select the option to share their configuration with specific user accounts, then those users should receive an invitation, and upon accepting, their dashboards should reflect the shared metrics and layout.

User experiences slow loading times when accessing the customized pricing dashboard.

Given the user attempts to access their dashboard, when they load the dashboard, then it should fully render within 3 seconds under normal conditions, ensuring a responsive user experience.

User wants to receive alerts based on significant changes in their pricing metrics.

Given the user has set preferences for alert conditions, when there are significant changes in any of the selected pricing metrics, then the user should receive notifications via email or in-app messages as configured.

Scenario Planning Tool

"As a financial planner, I want to simulate various pricing strategies and their potential impacts on sales so that I can determine the best approach for maximizing profitability."

Description

The Scenario Planning Tool offers users the ability to model different pricing strategies and simulate their potential impact on sales and profitability. Users can input various conditions such as price changes, discount levels, and market responses to see how these scenarios would play out based on historical data trends. This requirement is essential for strategic planning, allowing businesses to evaluate potential outcomes and make better-informed pricing decisions before implementing changes in the real market. By leveraging predictive analytics and machine learning algorithms, this feature enhances the user’s ability to forecast sales and optimize pricing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User defines a new pricing strategy using the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given a user has logged into the InvenTrack application, when they navigate to the Scenario Planning Tool, then they should be able to input various price changes, discount levels, and simulate the potential impact on sales and profitability.

User views the impact of price changes on historical sales data.

Given a user has set up a pricing strategy scenario, when they apply the changes and request a report, then the system should display a visual representation of projected sales and profit alongside historical data for comparison.

User wants to compare multiple pricing strategies simultaneously.

Given a user has created multiple scenarios, when they select the compare option, then they should be able to view all relevant metrics side by side, such as projected sales, profit margin, and stock levels for each strategy.

User interacts with the predictive analytics feature to forecast sales outcomes.

Given a user is utilizing the predictive analytics component, when they input a pricing strategy and relevant market conditions, then the system should provide a forecast report with a confidence interval for sales outcomes.

User saves a pricing scenario for future reference.

Given a user has finalized a pricing strategy simulation, when they choose to save the scenario, then they should have the option to name and categorize the scenario, allowing retrieval in future sessions.

User receives alerts on significant changes in market responses after testing a scenario.

Given a user has completed a pricing simulation, when the market conditions change significantly, then the user should receive an alert indicating the potential impact on their saved scenarios.

User accesses help documentation related to the Scenario Planning Tool.

Given a user is using the Scenario Planning Tool, when they click on the help icon, then they should be presented with relevant documentation and tutorials on how to effectively utilize the tool.

Customer Segmentation Pricing

Customer Segmentation Pricing enables users to set differentiated prices based on specific customer segment behaviors and preferences. By tailoring prices to target groups, this feature fosters customer loyalty and increases conversion rates.

Requirements

Dynamic Pricing Rules

"As a retail manager, I want to set dynamic pricing rules based on customer segments so that I can optimize profitability and respond to market trends effectively."

Description

This requirement involves creating a robust set of pricing rules that enable users to automatically adjust prices based on predefined criteria such as customer segments, purchase history, and inventory levels. By providing the ability to dynamically modify pricing strategies, this feature enhances revenue management and allows businesses to respond quickly to market changes. Additionally, it integrates seamlessly with the existing pricing engine in InvenTrack, ensuring that the adjustments are reflected across all sales channels in real-time. The expected outcome is improved profitability and customer satisfaction through targeted pricing.

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic pricing adjustment based on customer segment behavior during a promotional sale.

Given a customer in the 'VIP' segment and an ongoing 20% off promotion, when the VIP customer views pricing for featured products, then the system should display prices adjusted by 20% only for this customer segment while maintaining regular prices for other segments.

Real-time price updates based on inventory level changes.

Given an item in the inventory that has reached a low stock threshold, when the inventory level changes to below the threshold, then the system should automatically increase the price by 10% for all customer segments to promote urgency without impacting the pricing for high stock items.

Utilizing purchase history to offer personalized discount pricing.

Given a returning customer with a purchase history that includes more than five transactions in the last month, when the customer logs into their account, then they should be shown a personalized pricing suggestion of 15% off their most frequently purchased items.

Testing the integration of dynamic pricing rules with the e-commerce platform.

Given that dynamic pricing rules are enabled in InvenTrack, when a customer from the 'Regular' segment views products on an integrated e-commerce platform, then the pricing displayed should match the dynamic rules set in InvenTrack without discrepancies.

Assessment of revenue impact after implementation of dynamic pricing rules.

Given the dynamic pricing rules are implemented, when analyzing the sales data one month post-implementation, then there should be at least a 10% increase in average revenue per user compared to the previous month before the rules were active.

Validation of pricing updates across all sales channels in real-time.

Given the pricing rules adjust based on customer segments, when a price change is made for a specific segment, then the adjusted prices must reflect immediately on the website, mobile app, and in-store systems, ensuring consistency across all sales channels.

Customer Segment Creation Tool

"As a business owner, I want to create customer segments based on specific attributes so that I can tailor my pricing and marketing efforts to suit different customer needs."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a user-friendly interface that allows users to easily create and manage customer segments based on various attributes such as demographics, buying behavior, and preferences. The segmentation tool will enable users to categorize customers into meaningful groups that can be targeted with personalized pricing and marketing strategies. Through advanced filtering and tagging capabilities, users can enhance customer relationships and drive conversion rates. This feature is critical for effective price differentiation and marketing effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Creating a New Customer Segment Based on Demographics

Given the user is on the Customer Segment Creation Tool, when they input demographic attributes such as age, gender, and location, then a new customer segment should be created and displayed in the user interface.

Filtering Customers Based on Buying Behavior

Given the user has accessed the customer list, when they apply filters based on buying behavior metrics like frequency of purchase and average order value, then the system should return a list of customers matching the specified criteria.

Editing an Existing Customer Segment

Given a user selects an existing customer segment, when they modify its attributes or filters, then the changes should be saved, and the updated segment should reflect the new conditions immediately in the system.

Deleting a Customer Segment

Given the user is viewing the list of customer segments, when they select a segment and choose to delete it, then the segment should be removed from the system, and the list should update accordingly.

Applying Personalized Pricing to a Segment

Given a user has created a customer segment, when they set a differentiated price for that segment, then the system should apply the new price to all customers within that segment at checkout.

Preview of Targeted Marketing Strategies for a Segment

Given the user has defined a customer segment, when they access the marketing strategy suggestions, then the system should generate tailored marketing strategies based on the characteristics and preferences of that segment.

Viewing Customer Segmentation Analytics

Given the user has created multiple customer segments, when they access the analytics dashboard, then they should see performance metrics for each segment, including conversion rates and overall revenue contribution.

Real-time Analytics Dashboard

"As a marketing analyst, I want to access a real-time analytics dashboard so that I can evaluate the success of my customer segmentation pricing and make data-driven decisions."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a comprehensive analytics dashboard that provides users with real-time insights into pricing performance across different customer segments. The dashboard will feature key performance indicators such as conversion rates, average transaction values, and customer engagement metrics. By visualizing the impact of segmented pricing strategies, users can make informed decisions and quickly adjust their strategies as necessary. This integration is pivotal for tracking effectiveness and ensuring that pricing strategies align with overall business goals.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into the InvenTrack application and accesses the real-time analytics dashboard to view pricing performance metrics for a specific customer segment over the past month.

Given the user is logged in, when they select a specific customer segment from the dashboard, then the dashboard should display real-time metrics including conversion rates, average transaction values, and customer engagement metrics for that segment.

A user wants to compare the pricing performance between two different customer segments using the analytics dashboard.

Given the user is on the real-time analytics dashboard, when they select two customer segments for comparison, then the dashboard should generate a side-by-side comparison view of the key performance indicators for both segments.

The user needs to assess the impact of a recent pricing change on customer behavior and engagement metrics.

Given a pricing change has been implemented, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then the dashboard should reflect the updated performance metrics within 10 minutes of the change.

A user wants to visualize trends in pricing performance over an extended period to identify seasonal patterns.

Given the user accesses the analytics dashboard, when they select a date range of at least three months, then the dashboard should display a line graph showing trends in conversion rates and average transaction values for all customer segments during that period.

The user wants to export the analytics data to share with their team for internal discussions on pricing strategies.

Given the user is on the analytics dashboard, when they click the export button, then all displayed metrics should be downloadable in CSV format without data loss, preserving the current view and filters applied.

The user needs to customize the time frame for viewing analytics data on the dashboard to analyze a specific sales event.

Given the user is on the analytics dashboard, when they select a custom time frame using a date picker, then the dashboard should update to reflect the selected period's performance metrics accurately.

A user wants to receive alerts when certain performance metrics fall below predefined thresholds.

Given the user sets specific thresholds for key metrics on the dashboard, when those thresholds are breached, then the user should receive an automated notification via email indicating the specific metrics that have triggered the alert.

Customer Notification System

"As a customer relationship manager, I want to notify customers about personalized pricing changes so that they feel engaged and are more likely to make purchases."

Description

This requirement involves creating a notification system that alerts customers about personalized pricing changes based on their segment classification. Users can set up automated communications to inform customers of pricing benefits, promotions, or discounts tailored to their segment. This feature will enhance customer engagement and loyalty while driving awareness of customized offers. The implementation of this system is essential to ensure that customers feel valued and informed, which contributes to increased conversion rates.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives a notification about their personalized pricing change.

Given a customer is classified in a specific segment, when pricing changes occur for that segment, then the customer should receive a notification via email within 24 hours of the change.

User customizes notification settings for customer segments.

Given an admin user accesses the notification settings, when they customize the frequency and method of notifications for a specific segment, then the changes should be saved and reflected in the notification preferences immediately.

Customer views their personalized pricing on the website.

Given a customer logs into their account on the website, when they view the pricing page, then they should see prices that are specifically tailored to their segment based on the latest data.

Admin generates a report on the effectiveness of pricing notifications.

Given an admin user access the reporting dashboard, when they select the 'Pricing Notification Effectiveness' report, then they should receive metrics on open rates and conversion rates pre and post notifications.

Customer feedback collection on pricing notifications.

Given a customer receives a personalized pricing notification, when they interact with the notification, then they should have the option to provide feedback on its relevance and clarity, which gets recorded in the system.

Automated promotional alerts are triggered for seasonal sales.

Given a segment is defined for seasonal promotions, when a seasonal sale is launched, then all customers within that segment should receive an automated notification within 48 hours prior to the start of the promotion.

User tests notification delivery to ensure accuracy.

Given a user configures notification settings for a segment, when they run a test notification, then the test notification should be sent successfully to the intended recipient and received within 5 minutes.

A/B Testing for Pricing Strategies

"As a sales strategist, I want to conduct A/B testing on pricing strategies so that I can identify the most effective approach to maximize revenue and customer satisfaction."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing users with the capability to perform A/B testing on different pricing strategies within the system. Users can test variations of pricing within selected customer segments to determine which strategies yield the best results in terms of sales and customer response. By gathering data from these tests, businesses can refine their pricing tactics more effectively. This feature will not only optimize pricing strategies but also enhance overall marketing effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Testing A/B pricing strategies with a selected customer segment on the InvenTrack platform.

Given a user has set up two different pricing strategies for a selected customer segment, when the user initiates A/B testing, then the system should successfully apply the first pricing strategy to 50% of the target customer segment and the second pricing strategy to the remaining 50%.

Collecting sales data from A/B testing of pricing strategies for analysis.

Given the user has completed the A/B test on pricing strategies, when the user requests the sales data report, then the system should generate a report showcasing sales performance for each pricing strategy over the testing period, including conversion rates and total revenue generated.

Modifying pricing strategies based on A/B test outcomes in the InvenTrack system.

Given the user has reviewed the A/B test report, when the user decides to implement the pricing strategy that performed better, then the system should update the pricing for the selected customer segment accordingly and notify the user of the changes implemented.

Analyzing the customer feedback collected during the A/B testing of pricing strategies.

Given the user has enabled feedback collection during the A/B tests, when the user analyzes the feedback data, then the system should present a summary of customer responses for both pricing strategies, highlighting preferences and suggestions.

Ensuring users receive notifications regarding the outcomes of the A/B pricing tests.

Given the user has completed an A/B pricing test, when the results are available, then the system should automatically send a notification to the user summarizing the test results and suggesting next steps based on the findings.

Configuring the duration for each A/B pricing test in the InvenTrack platform.

Given the user is setting up an A/B test, when the user specifies the desired duration for the test, then the system should accept the input and display a countdown timer until the completion of the test period.

Predictive Sales Insights

Predictive Sales Insights harnesses machine learning to analyze historical data, seasonal patterns, and market trends, delivering forecasts on future sales performance. By understanding potential sales peaks and troughs, users can proactively manage inventory levels and marketing strategies, ensuring they meet customer demand without overstocking.

Requirements

Sales Forecasting Accuracy

"As a business owner, I want accurate sales forecasts so that I can make informed decisions about inventory management and marketing strategies to meet customer demand."

Description

The Sales Forecasting Accuracy requirement ensures that the Predictive Sales Insights feature utilizes advanced machine learning algorithms to analyze current and historical sales data effectively. This requirement emphasizes the importance of delivering precise forecasts, which will allow users to anticipate market demands accurately. By integrating seasonal trends, historical sales patterns, and external market conditions, the forecasts will provide actionable insights helping users optimize inventory levels and marketing campaigns. The expected outcome is a significant reduction in both overstocking and stockouts, enhancing overall business profitability and efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales Forecast Accuracy for Seasonal Peaks

Given historical sales data from the past three years, when the user inputs the upcoming seasonal promotion dates, then the predictive model shall output sales forecasts that meet at least 95% accuracy based on actual sales recorded during the same period in prior years.

Integrating External Market Conditions

Given the integration with external market data sources, when the user updates economic indicators (e.g., inflation rates, market trends), then the sales forecasts should automatically adjust to reflect these changes, demonstrating a model accuracy improvement by at least 10% during the following month.

Real-Time Forecast Adjustments

Given that the user is actively monitoring sales performance, when actual sales data is received in real-time, then the predictive insights should dynamically update, showing adjustments to forecasted sales that fall within a 5% margin of error compared to actual sales.

User Interface for Forecast Access

Given a user interface designed for accessing sales forecasts, when the user navigates to the 'Predictive Insights' section, then they should be able to view forecasts in a graphical format that accurately represents the data, including trends and uncertainties, with an ease of use rating of at least 4 out of 5 from user testing.

Demonstration of Overstock and Stockout Reduction

Given that the business implemented the predictive sales insights, when analyzing inventory levels pre- and post-implementation over six months, then there should be a documented reduction of overstocking and stockouts by at least 30% as evidenced in inventory reports.

Validation of Prediction Algorithms

Given the use of machine learning algorithms, when validating the prediction models with a control group of users, then at least 80% of users should report that the predictions align with their inventory management needs, ensuring satisfactory implementation of the feature.

User-Friendly Analytics Dashboard

"As a user, I want an easy-to-navigate analytics dashboard so that I can quickly interpret sales forecasts and make data-driven inventory decisions."

Description

The User-Friendly Analytics Dashboard requirement focuses on creating an intuitive interface for users to visualize predictive sales data easily. This dashboard will integrate seamlessly with the Predictive Sales Insights feature, offering clear and concise representations of sales forecasts, historical trends, and key performance indicators. By providing filtering options and customizable views, users can quickly derive insights and make data-driven decisions. This requirement is fundamental to ensuring that users can access the information they need without unnecessary complexity, leading to improved operational decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the analytics dashboard to review last quarter's sales performance and trends.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the 'Analytics Dashboard', then they should be able to view a summary of last quarter's sales performance and trends, including visual graphs and historical data for the past 12 months.

User filters sales data for a specific product category to analyze performance.

Given a user is on the analytics dashboard, when they apply a filter to view sales data for a specific product category, then the dashboard should refresh and display only the relevant sales metrics for that category, including forecast and historical sales data.

User customizes the dashboard layout to prioritize the insights that matter most to their business.

Given the user is on the analytics dashboard, when they use the customization options to rearrange the displayed widgets, then the dashboard should save and reflect these changes on their next visit.

User wants to export the sales forecasts for a presentation.

Given a user is on the analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Export' button, then the system should allow them to download the sales forecast data in .csv format without errors.

User needs to quickly understand the overall trends without getting lost in details.

Given a user accesses the analytics dashboard, when they first arrive, then the dashboard should show a high-level overview of key performance indicators without overwhelming numerical details, ensuring clarity and ease of understanding.

User seeks support for a technical issue encountered on the analytics dashboard.

Given the user encounters a technical issue on the analytics dashboard, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then they should be directed to a support page with relevant FAQs or a contact form for additional support.

Automated Notification System

"As a store manager, I want to receive automated notifications regarding sales forecasts so that I can take timely actions to manage inventory effectively."

Description

The Automated Notification System requirement entails developing functionality that triggers notifications to users based on predictive insights into sales performance. This system will alert users about significant changes in sales forecasts, potential demand spikes, or required inventory restocking actions. By automating these alerts via email or in-app notifications, users can respond proactively to forecasted changes, which minimizes risks associated with understocking or overstocking. This requirement aims to enhance user responsiveness and operational agility within their inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification alerting them about a significant forecast decrease in sales for a specific product category, prompting them to adjust inventory levels accordingly.

Given that the sales forecast for a product category drops below a predefined threshold, when the forecast is updated, then the user should receive an email and in-app notification stating 'Sales forecast for [Product Category] has decreased. Please review inventory levels.'

The system automatically notifies users about impending stockouts for high-demand products based on predictive insights.

Given that the predicted demand for a product exceeds the available stock within the next 7 days, when the predictive model runs, then the user should receive a notification stating 'Urgent: Stock for [Product Name] is predicted to run out in less than 7 days. Consider reordering.'

Users receive a notification triggering them to evaluate and potentially adjust their marketing strategies in light of projected sales spikes.

Given that there is a projected sales spike of more than 20% for a product in the upcoming week, when the predictive model identifies this spike, then the user should receive a notification stating 'Forecast: Sales for [Product Name] are expected to increase by more than 20% next week. Review your marketing strategy.'

A user sets preferences for notification frequency regarding inventory updates and sales forecasts.

Given that the user configures their notification settings to receive alerts daily, when a significant change occurs in inventory levels or sales forecasts, then the user shall receive notifications once per day summarizing these changes instead of multiple notifications throughout the day.

Users are alerted when predictive analytics indicate that a product category is tracking higher than usual returns, potentially impacting sales forecasts.

Given that the analysis indicates return rates for a product category are trending above historical averages, when this calculation is made, then the user should receive a notification indicating 'Alert: Return rates for [Product Category] are higher than average. Assess reasons and potential impact on sales.'

The automated notification system correctly escalates notifications based on urgency as specified by user settings.

Given that a user has set notification preferences for urgency levels, when a sales forecast change occurs that meets the highest urgency level criteria, then the user should receive a high-priority notification both via email and in-app indicating 'Critical Alert: Immediate attention required for [Product Name] sales forecast.'

Users must be able to easily manage and update their notification preferences within the application settings.

Given that the user accesses the notification settings in the application, when the user updates their preferences and saves changes, then these preferences should be applied immediately, and the user must receive a confirmation notification stating 'Your notification preferences have been updated successfully.'

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce retailer, I want to integrate Predictive Sales Insights with my online store so that I can leverage comprehensive sales data for better forecasts."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement is crucial for ensuring that the Predictive Sales Insights feature can access and analyze sales data from various e-commerce systems. This requirement covers the incorporation of APIs and data connectors to integrate seamlessly with major platforms like Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon. By facilitating this integration, users can obtain a comprehensive view of their sales performance across all channels, thus improving forecasting accuracy and operational strategies. The goal is to enhance the overall value proposition of InvenTrack by connecting it closely to users’ existing systems.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of InvenTrack with Shopify to fetch sales data for Predictive Sales Insights feature.

Given that the user has configured their Shopify account within InvenTrack, when they request sales data, then InvenTrack should successfully retrieve and display the sales data without errors.

Enabling seamless synchronization between InvenTrack and WooCommerce to enhance inventory forecasting based on sales data.

Given that the user has linked their WooCommerce store, when the synchronization process is initiated, then the sales data from WooCommerce should be available in InvenTrack within 5 minutes.

Utilizing Amazon's API to ensure accurate sales data collection for the Predictive Sales Insights feature.

Given that the user has provided valid Amazon API credentials, when InvenTrack connects to Amazon, then it should successfully retrieve and refresh sales data daily without downtime.

Presenting a consolidated sales report in InvenTrack from multiple e-commerce platforms for users' analysis.

Given that sales data is integrated from Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon, when the user requests a consolidated sales report, then InvenTrack should generate a report that includes all sales data with clear breakdowns by platform.

Allowing users to customize their API integration settings for each e-commerce platform.

Given that the user navigates to the integration settings page, when they adjust the API settings for Shopify, WooCommerce, or Amazon, then the changes should be saved and reflected in real-time without requiring a page refresh.

Verifying error handling for scenarios where sales data retrieval fails from any integrated e-commerce platform.

Given that there is a connectivity issue with any e-commerce platform, when the user attempts to retrieve sales data, then InvenTrack should display an appropriate error message indicating the problem along with troubleshooting steps.

Implementing user notifications for successful integration of sales data from e-commerce platforms.

Given that the integration of an e-commerce platform is completed successfully, when the integration process finishes, then the user should receive a notification confirming the successful connection and data retrieval.

Customizable Forecasting Parameters

"As a business owner, I want to customize sales forecasting parameters so that I can tailor predictions to my business specifics and maximize accuracy."

Description

The Customizable Forecasting Parameters requirement allows users to adjust the parameters driving the predictive sales forecasts based on their specific business needs. Users can set criteria such as lead times, seasonal adjustments, and promotional impacts that can influence the predictions. This flexibility enables users to tailor the output of the Predictive Sales Insights feature, ensuring that it aligns closely with their operational realities and marketing strategies. The expected outcome is increased user satisfaction and improved forecast reliability as users can optimize the predictions based on unique business conditions.

Acceptance Criteria

Setting Custom Lead Times for Forecasting

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Predictive Sales Insights settings, and they adjust the lead time parameter, then the system should save the new lead time and all subsequent sales forecasts should reflect this adjustment.

Adjusting Seasonal Parameters for Forecast Accuracy

Given a user is analyzing their sales data, when they modify the seasonal adjustment parameter and apply it, then the updated forecasts should immediately incorporate the new seasonal factors accurately in the displayed results.

Incorporating Promotional Activity into Sales Forecasts

Given a user wants to predict sales around an upcoming promotion, when they enter promotional details into the forecasting parameters, then the forecasts should account for these promotion details and show an adjusted sales projection.

Resetting Forecast Parameters to Default Settings

Given a user has modified multiple forecasting parameters, when they choose to reset to factory settings, then all parameters should revert to their default values without affecting the historical data.

Validating Forecast Predictions Over Time

Given a user who has previously set their forecasting parameters, when they check the accuracy of past predictions against actual sales over a specific time frame, then the system should display a report highlighting discrepancies and overall accuracy rates.

Exporting Customized Forecast Reports

Given a user has customized their forecasting parameters and generated a report, when they initiate an export of the forecast report, then the system should provide the report in a chosen format (CSV, PDF) with all the applied parameters and predictions included.

Visual Trend Analysis

Visual Trend Analysis transforms complex data into intuitive graphs and charts that highlight key performance indicators over time. This feature allows users to quickly identify trends in sales, inventory turnover, and customer preferences, enabling them to make informed decisions swiftly and strategically.

Requirements

Dynamic Chart Generation

"As a retail manager, I want to automatically generate personalized charts from my sales data so that I can quickly identify trends and make data-driven decisions for my inventory management."

Description

The Dynamic Chart Generation requirement facilitates automatic creation of graphs and charts based on real-time inventory and sales data. This feature will allow users to select specific metrics they want to visualize, such as sales trends, inventory levels, or customer patterns, thus providing a customizable visual analysis of their performance indicators. By enabling businesses to visually interpret complex data, this requirement will support swift and effective decision-making, helping users to quickly spot trends and make informed adjustments to their strategies. It will integrate seamlessly with other data modules in InvenTrack, ensuring that users always have the most current data at their fingertips for accurate analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects specific sales metrics to visualize the sales performance over the last quarter, aiming to identify any upward or downward trends in sales for effective inventory restocking decisions.

Given the user accesses the Visual Trend Analysis feature, when they select sales metrics from the last quarter and generate the chart, then the system should display a dynamic graph reflecting the chosen sales data accurately.

The user wants to monitor inventory turnover by visualizing stock levels for the past month, to ensure inventory is being managed effectively and to prevent stockouts.

Given the user navigates to the inventory metrics section, when they choose inventory turnover and generate the chart, then the system must produce a clear bar graph indicating stock levels with accurate time-series data for the selected period.

A business owner uses the feature to analyze customer purchasing patterns over the last six months, to understand customer behavior and adjust marketing strategies accordingly.

Given the user enters the Visual Trend Analysis and selects customer purchasing patterns from the last six months, when they generate the visual, then the chart should accurately depict the purchasing trends with relevant annotations for spikes or drops.

The user requires a comprehensive overview of multiple inventory metrics, such as sales trends, inventory levels, and customer preferences to prepare a performance report.

Given the user opts to visualize multiple metrics simultaneously, when they select sales trends, inventory levels, and customer preferences, then the system should allow the user to generate a composite graph that displays all selected metrics in a comparative format.

A retail manager needs to print the visual analysis report from the Dynamic Chart Generation feature for team discussions in the upcoming meeting.

Given the user has generated the desired visual analysis, when they select the print option, then the system should format the chart correctly and print it with high resolution without any data distortion.

A user wants to compare this month's sales performance against the previous month to evaluate performance improvements or declines.

Given the user accesses the Visual Trend Analysis, when they input the parameters for this month versus last month, then the system should produce a side-by-side comparison chart highlighting the differences in sales performance clearly and effectively.

Trend Highlighting

"As a business owner, I want to receive alerts on significant sales trends so that I can respond quickly and optimize my inventory levels."

Description

The Trend Highlighting requirement involves implementing algorithms that can identify and highlight significant trends in sales and inventory turnover. This feature will provide alerts and visual cues on graphs to notify users of notable changes in inventory levels or sales patterns, such as sharp increases in demand or potential stockouts. This proactive feature will aid users in understanding market dynamics and adjusting their inventory management strategies accordingly, leading to reduced risks of overstocking and stockouts. Integrating this feature with visual trend analysis tools will enrich the user experience and deliver actionable insights based on real data.

Acceptance Criteria

User views sales data over the past three months and identifies spikes in demand for specific products.

Given the user has accessed the Visual Trend Analysis page, when they view sales data, then significant spikes in sales volume should be highlighted on the graph distinctly.

User receives an alert regarding a potential stockout due to declining inventory levels.

Given the inventory level falls below the defined threshold, when the algorithm detects the change, then an alert notification should be triggered for the user to take action.

User analyzes inventory turnover over the past year to adjust purchasing strategies.

Given the user selects the Inventory Turnover chart, when the data is displayed, then trends demonstrating high turnover rates should be visually emphasized for easy identification.

User integrates the trend analysis feature with their existing accounting software for seamless data synchronization.

Given the user has connected their accounting software, when real-time data is requested, then the trend analysis should reflect up-to-date sales and inventory figures accordingly.

User wants to compare different time periods to analyze performance trends.

Given the user selects two different time periods for comparison, when they request to generate comparison graphs, then the system should provide clear and accurate visual representations of the performance trends between the selected periods.

User needs to filter trend data by specific product categories to focus their analysis.

Given the user accesses filtering options on the Visual Trend Analysis section, when they select a product category, then the trend analysis visuals should update to reflect data only for the chosen category.

User reviews a summary report of significant trends before a strategic planning meeting.

Given significant trends have been identified over the last quarter, when the user requests a summary report, then the report should include highlighted trends with visual graphs that can be easily shared in the meeting.

Comparative Trend Analysis

"As an analyst, I want to compare sales performance data over different time periods so that I can identify effective strategies and improve future sales."

Description

The Comparative Trend Analysis requirement allows users to compare multiple performance metrics over user-defined periods, such as month-over-month or year-over-year analysis. This feature will help users to visualize how different variables impact their business, such as comparing sales during different promotional periods or measuring the effect of changes in stock levels on turnover rates. By providing side-by-side graphs and charts, users can derive deeper insights and make strategic decisions based on comparative performance data, enhancing their ability to react to changes effectively and holistically. This feature will also integrate well with existing visual trend analysis functionalities to provide a complete and comprehensive viewing experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Users can compare sales data from two different promotional periods to understand the effectiveness of each campaign and their impact on inventory turnover.

Given two defined promotional periods, when the user selects the metrics to compare (sales, inventory turnover), then the system displays side-by-side graphs reflecting the selected metrics for each period.

Users are able to visualize how changes in stock levels affect sales performance over a defined time period, enabling informed decision-making on inventory management.

Given a user-defined time span and selected metrics (stock levels vs sales), when the user initiates the comparison, then the system provides a visual representation (graphs/charts) displaying the relationship between stock levels and sales over that period.

Users want to assess whether changes in customer preferences are influencing their sales figures over time to make adjustments in their inventory strategy accordingly.

Given the selected time frame and metrics (sales and customer preferences), when the user generates a report, then the system shows a comparative analysis with visual graphs indicating trends and correlations between customer preferences and sales performance.

Users require the ability to compare year-over-year data to track business growth and seasonal trends, helping them plan future inventory strategies.

Given user-selected years for comparison, when the user selects year-over-year as the comparison type, then the system displays a dual graph comparing key performance indicators (KPIs) for the selected years.

Users need to analyze the impact of marketing strategies on sales and stock levels using comparative trend analysis for informed decision-making.

Given a set period of marketing activities, when the user selects relevant KPIs (sales before and after marketing initiatives), then the system presents a comparative analysis showing the effects of marketing strategies on sales data visually.

Users want the ability to export their comparative trend analysis for reporting purposes to stakeholders or for internal review.

Given the completed comparative trend analysis, when the user selects the export option, then the system provides options to export the data in various formats (PDF, CSV) for external sharing.

Users expect the comparative trend analysis feature to integrate seamlessly with existing visual trend analysis for benefits beyond single metrics.

Given the completion of both comparative and visual trend analyses, when the user utilizes both features, then the system must demonstrate functional integration, providing an enriched data visualization experience that combines insights from both analyses.

Customizable Reporting

"As a store manager, I want to customize my reports on inventory performance so that I can present tailored insights to my team and stakeholders."

Description

The Customizable Reporting requirement empowers users to create tailored reports focusing on the metrics that matter most to their business. Users will have the option to select specific data points, time frames, and graphical formats to present their unique insights. This feature aims to enhance user engagement and data utilization, allowing businesses to generate reports that can be easily shared with stakeholders or used in strategic planning sessions. Additionally, it promotes a deeper understanding of the data, as users can emphasize specific trends that are relevant to their operational goals. The integration with visual trend analysis will ensure that the reports are visually appealing and intuitive to navigate, showcasing the key findings effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects specific data points and time frames to generate a report focusing on sales performance over the last quarter.

Given the user is on the Customizable Reporting page, when they select data points for sales performance and choose a quarterly time frame, then a report reflecting those criteria is generated and displayed correctly.

User customizes the graphical format of a report and successfully saves it for future access.

Given the user has selected data points and a time frame, when they choose a graphical format (e.g., pie chart, bar graph), and save the report, then the report should be retrievable with the saved format intact at a later time.

User shares a generated report with stakeholders via email straight from the platform.

Given the report is generated and displayed, when the user selects the 'Share' option and enters recipient email addresses, then the report is successfully sent to all specified recipients, confirmed by a success message.

User wants to filter report results based on specific inventory items to analyze their turnover rates.

Given the user is on the reporting tool, when they apply filters for specific inventory items, then the report updates to show data only for those selected items, reflecting accurate turnover rates.

User accesses a report that integrates visual trend analysis features to emphasize specific data trends.

Given the user has generated a report, when they view the report, then it includes visual trend analysis elements (graphs/charts) that effectively highlight data trends relevant to the selected metrics.

User seeks to modify an existing report to add additional data points or change the display format.

Given the user is viewing a previously saved report, when they select the edit option and make modifications to the data points or display format, then the updates should be saved successfully, and the report should reflect the changes.

User interacts with the customizable report and checks the responsiveness of the graphical elements across different devices.

Given the user accesses the customizable report on a mobile device, when they view the report, then all graphical elements should be responsive and display correctly without loss of data or clarity.

Interactive Data Visualization

"As a user, I want to interact with my sales graphs so that I can explore my data to uncover deeper insights about customer behavior and inventory management."

Description

The Interactive Data Visualization requirement enhances user engagement by allowing users to interact with their data in real time through the graphs and charts provided within InvenTrack. Users should be able to mouse over data points to get detailed information or click on segments of graphs to drill down into specifics. This feature will transform static data presentations into dynamic tools for exploration, enabling users to gain a deeper understanding of their inventory trends and customer behaviors on demand. Integration with the visual trend analysis feature will provide an enriching experience, ultimately leading to improved decision-making and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interacts with Sales Data Graph

Given a user is viewing the sales data graph, when they mouse over a data point, then a tooltip displays detailed information about sales figures for that date.

User Drills Down into Inventory Trends

Given a user is viewing the inventory turnover chart, when they click on a segment of the graph, then the system displays a detailed breakdown of inventory changes for that period.

User Analyzes Customer Preference Trends

Given a user is analyzing customer preferences over time, when they interact with the preference trend graph, then the display updates to show related insights such as average purchase time and demographics.

User Customizes Data Visualization Settings

Given a user wants to modify the data visualization layout, when they adjust the viewing settings (e.g., change time frame, data categories), then the graphs refresh accordingly to reflect the new parameters.

User Exports Visual Data Reports

Given a user has generated visual reports from data, when they select the export option, then the system generates a downloadable file containing the visual data in the requested format (PDF, PNG, etc.).

User Receives Performance Alerts via Visualization

Given a user has set up performance thresholds, when inventory levels reach defined limits, then the system highlights relevant graphs in red and sends an alert to the user.

Automated Reporting Notifications

"As a business owner, I want to receive automated reports on my inventory trends so that I can stay informed without needing to manually check the system frequently."

Description

The Automated Reporting Notifications require implementation to regularly inform users of critical metrics and trends via automated reports. These reports will be scheduled at user-defined intervals (e.g., daily, weekly, or monthly) and can be sent via email or through the InvenTrack dashboard. This feature aims to ensure users stay updated with their inventory status and important trends without having to constantly log into the system, thus promoting proactive inventory management. The integration of this feature with the core visual trend analysis tools will enable users to receive timely insights that can inform their strategic decisions and keep them engaged with their inventory management process.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules a weekly automated report to be sent every Monday at 9 AM.

Given the user navigates to the report settings, when they select the weekly report option and set the time to 9 AM, then a notification should be received at the specified time every week.

User receives the automated report in their selected email inbox at the scheduled time.

Given the report is scheduled, when the specified time arrives, then the user should receive an email containing the latest report within 5 minutes.

User views the automated report within the InvenTrack dashboard after it has been sent.

Given the user is logged in and checks the dashboard after the report's scheduled time, when they navigate to the reports section, then they should see the latest automated report available for viewing.

User modifies the frequency of the automated reports to daily instead of weekly.

Given the user accesses the report settings, when they change the frequency option from weekly to daily, then the system should successfully save the new setting and send reports daily at the previously defined time.

User opts to receive automated reports via SMS instead of email.

Given the user updates their notification preferences, when they save their contact method as SMS, then the automated reports should be sent as SMS messages to the user's registered phone number at the scheduled time.

User checks the historical data of automated reports to track performance trends over time.

Given the user accesses the reports history section, when they select a specific date range, then the system should display a list of all automated reports generated during that period, showing key data points and trends.

User receives a notification if the automated report fails to send.

Given that a scheduled report fails to send, when the failure occurs, then the system should generate an error notification sent to the user's dashboard and email indicating the issue and suggested remedies.

Customer Behavior Segmentation

Customer Behavior Segmentation uses advanced analytics to classify customers based on purchasing habits, preferences, and engagement levels. By understanding distinct customer segments, users can tailor marketing campaigns and inventory offerings effectively, increasing satisfaction and boosting sales.

Requirements

Behavioral Data Collection

"As a marketing manager, I want to collect detailed behavioral data on my customers so that I can understand their purchasing habits and tailor my marketing efforts effectively."

Description

The Behavioral Data Collection requirement focuses on gathering comprehensive data related to customer interactions, purchases, and preferences through various channels. This functionality is essential for creating a robust customer behavior dataset that informs classification and segmentation efforts. By integrating with existing touchpoints like e-commerce platforms and customer relationship management (CRM) systems, this feature will enable InvenTrack to analyze trends and identify patterns in customer behavior. The expected outcome is a rich dataset that supports accurate segmentation and targeted marketing campaigns, ultimately leading to enhanced customer satisfaction and increased sales.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Behavior Data Collection from E-commerce Platforms

Given a connected e-commerce platform, when a customer makes a purchase, then the relevant behavioral data (purchase history, product preferences, and interaction frequency) must be automatically collected and stored in the InvenTrack database for at least 90% of transactions.

Integration with CRM Systems for Behavioral Analytics

Given a CRM system is integrated, when a customer interacts via any channel (email, chat, etc.), then the interaction data must be captured and updated in real-time to ensure a comprehensive customer profile is maintained, with no more than 5% data loss.

Behavioral Data Segmentation for Targeted Marketing Campaigns

Given a sufficient volume of collected behavioral data, when the segmentation algorithm is executed, then customers must be categorized into at least three distinct segments with over 75% accuracy based on their purchasing behavior and engagement level.

Real-time Tracking of Customer Interaction Touchpoints

Given the integration with multiple touchpoints, when a customer interacts through any channel, then this interaction must be recorded in the system within 5 seconds to ensure real-time access to customer engagement data.

Data Anonymization and Compliance with Privacy Regulations

Given the requirement for data privacy compliance, when behavioral data is collected, then it must be anonymized and securely stored, with 100% compliance to applicable regulations such as GDPR or CCPA.

User Interface for Behavioral Data Review

Given that the behavioral data has been collected, when a user accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should be able to view all relevant behavioral insights in a user-friendly format without any errors or data discrepancies.

Segmentation Algorithm Development

"As a data analyst, I want to develop and refine segmentation algorithms so that I can effectively identify customer groups for targeted marketing strategies."

Description

The Segmentation Algorithm Development requirement involves creating and implementing advanced algorithms that utilize machine learning techniques to classify customers into distinct segments based on their purchasing behavior and engagement levels. This feature will leverage the collected behavioral data to dynamically identify clusters of similar customers, allowing for precise targeting in marketing and inventory strategies. The integration of this algorithm into the InvenTrack ecosystem will enhance the product’s ability to offer personalized solutions and recommendations, thereby directly impacting sales performance and customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer logs into InvenTrack and accesses the Customer Behavior Segmentation feature to view customer segments based on recent purchasing behaviors and engagement metrics.

Given that the user is logged in, when they navigate to the Customer Behavior Segmentation feature, then they should see a list of customer segments categorized by purchasing behavior with at least five distinct segments displayed.

A marketing manager creates a targeted campaign tailored for a specific customer segment identified by the segmentation algorithm, focusing on a new product launch.

Given that the marketing manager selects a customer segment, when they create a marketing campaign targeting that segment, then the system should allow them to successfully save the campaign with personalized content for that segment.

The system analyzes customer purchase data over the past six months to update segment classifications for more accurate targeting.

Given that the algorithm has access to the customer purchase data, when the backend processing runs to update segments, then at least 90% of customers should be accurately classified into new segments based on the latest purchase data.

A user reviews engagement metrics of the segmented customers to assess the effectiveness of their targeted marketing efforts in the past month.

Given that the user selects a specific customer segment, when they view the engagement metrics report, then the report should display metrics such as open rates, conversion rates, and overall sales attributed to that segment for the last month.

The system automatically generates restocking alerts based on the purchasing behavior trends of newly segmented customers.

Given that the segmentation algorithm has identified a new customer segment, when a product trend indicates a high demand from that segment, then an automatic restocking alert should be triggered for relevant inventory items.

A user runs a data export of customer segments and associated metrics for external marketing review.

Given that the user navigates to the export feature, when they initiate the data export for customer segments, then a CSV file should be generated containing all relevant segment data without errors.

The algorithm is monitored for accuracy and effectiveness in segmenting customers over a defined time period.

Given that the segmentation algorithm is operational, when the effectiveness is assessed after one month, then at least 85% of users should report satisfaction with the segment accuracy during user testing.

Customizable Segmentation Criteria

"As a business owner, I want to customize the criteria for customer segmentation so that I can focus on the most relevant customer segments for my marketing campaigns."

Description

The Customizable Segmentation Criteria requirement should allow users to define their own parameters for customer segmentation. This functionality enables businesses to tailor segmentation rules according to their specific needs, such as targeting high-value customers or identifying those at risk of churning. By providing flexibility in segmentation options, users can create more relevant marketing campaigns and improve inventory management practices. This requirement integrates seamlessly with the existing segmentation features and empowers users to optimize their marketing efforts based on unique business objectives.

Acceptance Criteria

As an inventory manager, I want to configure customer segmentation based on multiple criteria like purchase frequency, average order value, and preferred product categories so that I can identify different customer groups for targeted marketing campaigns.

Given a user is on the Customizable Segmentation Criteria page, when they input and save parameters for purchase frequency, average order value, and preferred product categories, then the system should reflect the new segmentation criteria in the customer analytics dashboard.

As a marketing specialist, I aim to create a new customer segment targeting high-value customers who made purchases over $500 in the last month to run a special promotion for them.

Given the parameters for the high-value customer segment are defined, when the user applies these criteria, then the system should generate a list of customers who meet the defined criteria and display it in the segment management interface.

As a business owner, I need to set up segmentation rules that can automatically flag customers who have not purchased in the last 90 days, to proactively engage them and reduce churn.

Given a user configures criteria to identify customers who haven't purchased in the last 90 days, when the user saves these rules, then the system should automatically segment these customers and provide alerts for follow-up actions.

As a user, I want to edit existing customer segmentation parameters to refine the targeting of a new marketing campaign based on emerging purchasing trends.

Given a user is on the existing segmentation criteria list, when they select a segmentation rule to edit and update parameters, then the system should save the changes and update the affected customer segments accordingly.

As an analyst, I want to export the customer segments that I have created using customizable criteria to an Excel file for deeper analysis outside the platform.

Given a user has created one or more customer segments, when they choose to export these segments, then the system should generate and initiate a download of an Excel file containing the segmented customer data.

As a customer support representative, I need to understand how customizable segmentation criteria work so I can assist users effectively with their inquiries.

Given a support representative accesses internal documentation, when they reference the section on customizable segmentation, then they should find clear guidelines and examples on how to use this feature effectively.

Segmentation Report Generation

"As a business analyst, I want to generate detailed reports on customer segments so that I can present insights to my team and inform our marketing strategies."

Description

The Segmentation Report Generation requirement focuses on creating comprehensive reports that summarize the findings from customer segmentation analyses. These reports will present key insights into customer groups, including sizes, behaviors, and preferences, helping stakeholders understand the performance of various segments. By facilitating easy access to these reports, users can make informed decisions based on hard data, continuously refining their marketing strategies and inventory management processes. The integration of visual analytics tools within the reports will enhance usability and interpretation of data.

Acceptance Criteria

Segmentation Report Generation for marketing strategy refinement

Given that the user has completed a customer behavior segmentation analysis, when they request a Segmentation Report, then the system should generate a report that includes at least three distinct customer segments with their associated sizes, behaviors, and preferences, and present the data visually using charts and graphs.

Exporting Segmentation Reports for external analysis

Given that the user has generated a Segmentation Report, when they choose to export the report, then the system should allow the report to be exported in at least two formats (e.g., PDF and Excel) without loss of data or formatting.

Accessing Segmentation Reports in dashboard

Given that the user is logged into the InvenTrack application, when they navigate to the reports section, then they should be able to view all recently generated Segmentation Reports in a clear and organized dashboard format with timestamps.

Visual analytics integration within the Segmentation Report

Given that the Segmentation Report is generated, when the report is displayed, then it should include visual analytics tools (e.g., pie charts, bar graphs) that help interpret segmentation data effectively, enhancing the report's usability.

Performance metrics analysis in Segmentation Reports

Given that the user has generated a Segmentation Report, when they analyze it, then the report should include key performance metrics (e.g., conversion rates, average order value) for each customer segment to inform business decisions.

Regular schedule for automatic report generation

Given that the user has set up a schedule for periodic report generation, when the designated time arrives, then the system should automatically generate and email the Segmentation Report to the specified recipients without user intervention.

Integration with Marketing Automation Tools

"As a marketing specialist, I want to integrate customer segmentation data with our marketing automation tools so that I can automatically launch targeted campaigns to different customer segments."

Description

The Integration with Marketing Automation Tools requirement aims to connect InvenTrack's customer behavior segmentation feature with popular marketing automation platforms. This integration will facilitate seamless communication between customer segments identified in InvenTrack and marketing campaigns carried out within automation tools. By automating the deployment of targeted campaigns based on segmentation insights, businesses can improve engagement rates and conversion metrics, leading to a stronger return on investment for marketing activities.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of InvenTrack's customer behavior segmentation feature with a popular email marketing tool, allowing users to automatically create targeted email campaigns based on customer segments.

Given that customer segments have been created in InvenTrack, when the user initiates the integration with the email marketing tool, Then the system should automatically sync these segments without errors and reflect in the email marketing tool within 5 minutes.

A user wants to send a promotional email specific to high-value customers identified through customer behavior segmentation in InvenTrack.

Given that high-value customers are segmented in InvenTrack, when the user selects this segment and designs a promotional email in the marketing automation tool, Then the system should allow the user to schedule the email campaign for a specific date and time successfully.

Monitoring the performance of email campaigns sent to different customer segments to evaluate the effectiveness of the targeting strategy.

Given that an email campaign has been sent to a segmented list, when the user accesses the marketing automation tool's analytics dashboard, Then the user should be able to view key performance metrics (open rates, click-through rates, conversion rates) segmented by customer group.

Ensuring that the integration maintains data privacy and complies with GDPR regulations while handling customer data between InvenTrack and the marketing automation tool.

Given that the integration is set up, when customer data is shared with the marketing automation tool, Then the data transfer should log consent checks and anonymization processes that comply with GDPR standards.

A user wants to refresh customer segments in the marketing automation tool based on real-time changes made in InvenTrack.

Given that customer behavior updates occur in InvenTrack, when the user triggers a refresh of segments in the marketing automation tool, Then the updated customer segments should reflect accurately and timely within 10 minutes.

Integration failure notification for when the connection between InvenTrack and the marketing automation tool experiences disruptions.

Given that there is a disruption in the integration, when the user checks the integration status, Then the system should provide a clear error message and troubleshooting steps for reconnecting the integration.

Customizing marketing messages based on detailed customer segments created in InvenTrack.

Given that distinct customer segments are available, when the user uses these segments to tailor a marketing message, Then the changes should be reflected in the marketing templates, allowing users to preview them before sending out the campaign.

Dynamic KPI Monitoring

Dynamic KPI Monitoring provides real-time tracking of critical performance indicators such as sales growth, stock levels, and profit margins. This feature enables users to stay informed at a glance, allowing for immediate adjustments to strategies based on current business performance.

Requirements

Real-Time KPI Dashboards

"As a retail manager, I want to view real-time dashboards with my key performance indicators so that I can quickly assess my business’s performance and make informed decisions in a timely manner."

Description

The Real-Time KPI Dashboards requirement encompasses the development of customizable dashboards that showcase key performance indicators (KPIs) including sales, inventory levels, and profit margins. Users will be able to filter, sort, and visualize data in various formats (such as graphs and charts) to monitor their business performance instantaneously. This feature will provide users with actionable insights at a glance, enabling timely decision-making and strategic adjustments to enhance profitability and growth. The integration of this requirement with the existing InvenTrack ecosystem is critical, as it leverages real-time data to foster data-driven decision-making for users.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects customizable dashboard to display sales, inventory levels, and profit margins.

Given a logged-in user, when they access the dashboard customization interface, then they must be able to select from available KPIs including sales, inventory levels, and profit margins and add them to their dashboard.

User filters the KPI dashboard by a specific date range.

Given a user on the KPI dashboard, when they apply a date range filter, then the displayed data must accurately reflect only the KPIs within the selected date range.

User views KPI dashboard in different visual formats (graphs, charts).

Given a user on the KPI dashboard, when they select different visualization options for the data, then the KPIs must be displayed correctly in the selected graphs or charts without data loss or distortion.

User receives alerts for significant changes in KPIs on their dashboard.

Given a user on the KPI dashboard, when a KPI exceeds predetermined thresholds (like stock levels or profit margins), then the user must receive a real-time alert via email or in-app notification.

User sorts KPIs based on priority or performance.

Given a user on the KPI dashboard, when they choose to sort the KPIs by performance (highest to lowest), then the dashboard must rearrange the KPIs accordingly without delay.

User integrates the KPI dashboard seamlessly with existing e-commerce platforms.

Given a user has linked their InvenTrack account with an e-commerce platform, when they navigate to the KPI dashboard, then the data displayed must be in real-time, reflecting the latest sales and inventory information from the e-commerce platform.

User accesses the KPI dashboard from various devices (desktop, tablet, mobile).

Given a user, when they attempt to access the KPI dashboard from a desktop, tablet, or mobile device, then the dashboard must render correctly and function without error across all devices.

Automated KPI Alerts

"As a store owner, I want to receive automated alerts when my inventory levels drop or sales decrease so that I can respond quickly to avoid stockouts or missing sales opportunities."

Description

The Automated KPI Alerts requirement involves creating a notification system that informs users when certain KPIs reach predefined thresholds. For instance, if stock levels drop below a specified minimum or sales fall below expected targets, users will receive automated alerts via email or in-app notifications. This ensures that users remain aware of critical changes in their inventory dynamics, allowing them to take prompt action to address issues before they escalate. The system will be fully integrated with the existing InvenTrack platform to ensure that alerts are based on real-time data and user-defined parameters, resulting in proactive inventory and sales management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when stock levels drop below the predefined minimum threshold.

Given a user has set a minimum stock level for a product, when the stock level falls below this threshold, then the user receives an automated alert via email and in-app notification immediately.

User is notified when sales fall below a specified target.

Given a user has established a sales target for a product, when the sales fall below this target over a defined period, then the user receives an automated alert via email and in-app notification.

User can customize alert thresholds for different KPIs.

Given a user is setting up their KPI alerts, when they adjust the thresholds for stock levels or sales targets and save the settings, then the system should successfully save these custom thresholds and notify the user when the KPIs reach these levels.

User receives alerts in different languages based on their profile setting.

Given a user has selected their preferred language in their profile settings, when a KPI alert is triggered, then the user receives the alert in their selected language via email and in-app notification.

User can view alert history within the application.

Given a user has received multiple KPI alerts, when they navigate to the alert history section in the app, then they should see a complete list of past alerts including timestamps and the criteria that triggered these alerts.

User can disable specific KPI alerts without affecting others.

Given a user has enabled multiple KPI alerts, when they choose to disable one specific alert for a KPI, then that alert should be turned off without impacting the functionality of other active alerts.

Users receive alerts based on historical trends and patterns.

Given a user has access to their historical KPI data, when a significant deviation from established trends occurs, then the user receives an alert indicating the deviation and suggesting a review of inventory or sales strategies.

KPI Historical Trends Analysis

"As an e-commerce business owner, I want to analyze historical trends in my KPIs so that I can identify patterns over time and make informed decisions to strategize for the upcoming quarters."

Description

The KPI Historical Trends Analysis requirement includes the functionality for users to analyze historical performance data of various KPIs over specified time periods. This feature will allow users to visualize trends in sales, inventory turnover, and profit margins through comprehensive charts and graphs. Users will be able to select different timeframes (weekly, monthly, yearly) to identify patterns and long-term trends, facilitating strategic planning and improved forecasting. This analysis is essential for users to make data-driven decisions based on past performance and to adjust their inventory strategies accordingly, optimizing their supply chain management.

Acceptance Criteria

User needs to analyze sales trends over the last six months to understand how seasonal changes affect purchase behavior.

Given a user selects the sales KPI and sets the timeframe to the last six months, When the user generates the report, Then the system displays a chart showing monthly sales figures along with the percentage change between each month.

A manager wants to review profit margins over the past year to strategize pricing adjustments for upcoming products.

Given a user selects the profit margin KPI and specifies the last year as the timeframe, When the report is generated, Then a line graph is shown illustrating profit margin fluctuations by month, including statistical averages for the year.

An e-commerce business owner needs to compare inventory turnover rates across different periods to identify patterns that affect stock replenishment.

Given a user chooses the inventory turnover KPI and selects both quarterly and yearly timeframes, When the comparison report is generated, Then the system presents a side-by-side comparison chart highlighting differences in turnover rates between the selected periods.

A user wants to assess the overall effectiveness of marketing campaigns by analyzing sales growth during the campaign periods.

Given a user selects the sales growth KPI and defines two separate date ranges representing different marketing campaigns, When the report is created, Then the system provides a bar chart comparing sales growth across both campaign durations, including total sales amounts.

A retailer is interested in identifying long-term trends in stock levels to optimize inventory management during peak seasons.

Given a user selects the stock levels KPI and sets a timeframe of the last two years, When the analysis is initiated, Then a trend line graph is generated, showing stock level changes over these two years with significant peaks and troughs highlighted.

KPI Comparison Reports

"As a business analyst, I want to generate comparison reports for my KPIs so that I can benchmark performance across different product categories and quickly identify areas for improvement."

Description

The KPI Comparison Reports requirement focuses on enabling users to generate comparative reports that juxtapose different KPIs against one another over selected time frames. This functionality will allow users to conduct comparative analyses between various product categories, sales channels, or time periods. The insights derived from these reports will help users understand performance divergences and make informed decisions to enhance weaker areas of their operations or capitalize on successful practices. Integration with the InvenTrack reporting features will also ensure that the data is accurate and actionable, aligning with the overall purpose of enhancing strategic oversight.

Acceptance Criteria

KPI Comparison Report Generation for E-Commerce Sales

Given the user has selected two KPIs to compare from the dashboard, when the user specifies a date range and clicks on 'Generate Report', then the system should produce a report displaying both KPIs side-by-side with accurate numerical values and visual graphs.

KPI Comparison Report Filtering by Product Category

Given the user is viewing KPI Comparison Reports, when the user applies a filter to compare only specific product categories, then the report should update to display data solely for the selected categories, ensuring all displayed metrics are relevant to the filter applied.

KPI Comparison Report Export Functionality

Given the user has generated a KPI Comparison Report, when the user selects the 'Export' option, then the report should be downloadable in multiple formats (CSV, PDF, and Excel) with all data properly formatted and preserved in the exported file.

KPI Comparison Report Accuracy Verification

Given the user generates a KPI Comparison Report, when the user cross-references the report values with the source data from the database, then all reported figures must match the original data exactly within a defined tolerance level of 1%.

KPI Comparison Report Historical Data Access

Given the user is generating a KPI Comparison Report, when the user selects a date range that includes historical data, then the report must accurately reflect all KPI values from the chosen historical periods and present this data without loss of integrity.

KPI Comparison Report User Accessibility

Given the user has logged into InvenTrack, when the user navigates to the KPI Reporting section, then the interface must be intuitive and load the KPI Comparison Reports feature swiftly, allowing users to access reports within 3 seconds of interacting with the feature.

Profitability Forecasting

Profitability Forecasting analyzes sales data alongside operational costs to project future profitability scenarios under various conditions. This feature empowers users to evaluate pricing strategies, explore cost-saving measures, and make informed financial decisions to enhance overall profitability.

Requirements

Dynamic Profitability Analysis

"As a business owner, I want to analyze profitability under different pricing scenarios so that I can make data-driven pricing decisions that improve my overall profit margins."

Description

This requirement encompasses the development of an advanced analytics module that dynamically analyzes sales data and operational costs to generate real-time profitability projections. It will integrate with existing sales and expense tracking features within InvenTrack, providing users with scenario modeling tools that demonstrate how different variables (like pricing adjustments or cost reductions) affect overall profitability. The module will help users to visualize trends and make informed decisions by delivering intuitive dashboards and actionable insights. Its implementation is fundamental for users aiming to enhance profitability through data-driven strategies and will serve as a comprehensive tool for assessing financial effects before implementing changes.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a profitability projection report based on current sales and operational data within the InvenTrack platform.

Given the user has entered accurate sales and operational cost data, when they select the 'Generate Report' option, then the system should produce a detailed profitability projection report displaying current metrics and future scenarios based on variable adjustments.

User adjusts pricing of a specific product and analyzes the impact on profitability.

Given the user has access to the product pricing module, when they adjust the pricing for one product and request an updated profitability analysis, then the system should reflect these changes and present a new profitability projection with clear indications of the impact on overall profits.

User explores cost-saving measures and assesses their effect on profitability.

Given the user has identified potential cost-saving measures, when they input these changes into the 'Cost Adjustment' tool and generate a profitability forecast, then the system must display an updated profitability report showing the effects of the cost reductions alongside current profitability metrics.

User visualizes historical profitability trends through interactive dashboards.

Given the user accesses the analytics dashboard, when they select the 'Historical Trends' option, then the system should display a visual representation of profitability trends over the past year with filters for specific time frames and product categories.

User compares projected profitability under different scenarios to make informed decisions.

Given the user has modeled different pricing or cost scenarios, when they request a comparative profitability forecast, then the system should deliver a side-by-side comparison of profits for each scenario, highlighting the most lucrative option.

User saves and retrieves customized profitability projection settings for future analysis.

Given the user has customized projection settings (like specific time frames and variables), when they save these settings, then the system must allow the user to retrieve and apply these settings in future profitability analyses without re-entering data.

User receives alerts for significant changes in profitability projections based on real-time data inputs.

Given the user has set up alerts for profitability thresholds, when a significant change occurs in real-time data that affects profitability, then the system should send an immediate notification to the user regarding the change and its implications.

Cost Structure Visualization

"As a financial manager, I want to visualize my cost structure so that I can identify cost-saving opportunities and optimize my overall expenditure."

Description

This requirement involves creating a detailed visualization feature that analyzes and presents the different components of a business's cost structure. Users will be able to view fixed and variable costs associated with inventory management, enabling them to identify areas for potential savings. Integrating seamlessly with existing operational cost data, this feature will enhance the financial analysis capabilities within InvenTrack. By implementing this requirement, users can gain clarity on cost behaviors, facilitating better budgeting and financial forecasting. The use of graphical representations such as pie charts and bar graphs will make the data more accessible and provide a clearer understanding of cost dynamics.

Acceptance Criteria

Cost Structure Visualization for Inventory Management Costs

Given a user accesses the Cost Structure Visualization feature, when they input their inventory management costs, then they should see a detailed graphical representation of fixed and variable costs displayed as a pie chart and bar graph.

Identification of Cost-Saving Opportunities

Given a user examines the cost structure visualization, when they hover over different segments of the pie chart, then they should receive tooltips providing detailed information on the components of costs and potential areas for savings.

Data Integration for Cost Visualization

Given the user has existing operational cost data integrated into InvenTrack, when they generate the cost structure visualization, then the system should accurately reflect this data without discrepancies in the graphical representations.

User Accessibility and Usability of Visual Charts

Given a user interacts with the graphical visualizations, when they navigate the charts, then the interface should allow them to filter costs by type (fixed vs. variable) and display updated graphs accordingly without lag.

Understanding Cost Behavior Over Time

Given a user utilizes the Cost Structure Visualization feature, when they select a time frame (e.g., monthly, quarterly), then the visualizations should update to reflect cost trends for the selected period using line graphs and comparison tools.

Exporting Cost Visualization Reports

Given a user has completed their analysis of the cost structure, when they select the option to export their visualization data, then they should be able to download a report in PDF or Excel format containing both graphical and numerical data.

User Feedback Mechanism

Given a user has accessed the Cost Structure Visualization feature, when they finish their review, then they should have the option to provide feedback on the feature’s effectiveness, which is logged for future improvements.

Scenario Simulation Tool

"As a product manager, I want to simulate different market conditions to evaluate potential impacts on profitability so that I can better prepare my business for fluctuations in demand and costs."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a scenario simulation tool that allows users to test various business scenarios and their impact on profitability. Users can input different variables (like sales volumes, pricing strategies, and cost fluctuations) to simulate how these changes would affect their bottom line. This tool will enhance InvenTrack's forecasting capabilities by providing a risk assessment component, helping businesses to anticipate potential profitability challenges. Integrating this feature into the current forecasting module will provide users with a comprehensive toolkit for strategic planning, enabling them to make proactive adjustments to their operations based on simulated outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

As a user, I want to input different sales volumes into the scenario simulation tool to see how changes in sales affect my projected profitability under varying price points and costs.

Given a user accesses the scenario simulation tool, when they input different sales volumes and click on 'simulate', then the system should display updated profitability projections for each sales volume entered.

As a financial analyst, I need to test various pricing strategies using the scenario simulation tool to understand their impact on profitability across different market conditions.

Given a user inputs different pricing strategies and corresponding sales volumes into the simulation tool, when they click on 'run scenario', then the tool generates a report comparing profitability for each pricing option.

As a business owner, I want to include operational cost fluctuations in my scenario simulations to forecast how unexpected changes could influence my profitability.

Given a user selects operational cost variables within the scenario simulation tool, when they simulate these changes alongside sales volumes, then the output should include adjusted profitability metrics reflecting the cost variations.

As a user, I want to save my scenario inputs and results for future reference or comparisons, ensuring I can revisit previous simulations at any time.

Given a user has created a scenario simulation, when they choose the 'save' option, then the system should allow them to save the scenario with a customizable name for future access.

As a user, I want the scenario simulation tool to provide visual representations of profitability projections (like graphs) for better comprehension and presentation.

Given a user runs a simulation, when the results are generated, then the tool should include graphical representations of profitability trends over the simulated range of inputs.

As a business strategist, I want the tool to suggest optimal pricing and cost strategies based on simulated results to aid decision-making.

Given a user completes a simulation, when the results are displayed, then the tool should recommend optimal pricing and cost strategies based on the best profitability outcomes derived from the simulation.

User-defined Alerts for Profitability Changes

"As a small business owner, I want to receive alerts when my profitability metrics change significantly so that I can quickly respond to potential issues and make timely decisions to protect my margins."

Description

This requirement includes the implementation of a customizable alert system that notifies users of significant changes in profitability metrics or trends. Users can set thresholds for profitability metrics and receive real-time alerts when those thresholds are met or exceeded. This feature will enhance user engagement with the profitability forecasting module, ensuring that critical changes are promptly communicated. By integrating this alert system, InvenTrack empowers users to stay informed and responsive to shifts in profitability, allowing for timely decision-making and intervention when necessary. It will serve as an essential tool for maintaining financial health and operational agility.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a profitability alert threshold for a specific product category, indicating a minimum profit margin percentage.

Given a user is on the profitability forecasting module, when they set a threshold for profit margin percentage, then the system should save the alert and display a confirmation message.

A user receives a notification when profitability metrics exceed the defined threshold.

Given a user has set an alert threshold for profit margins, when the actual profit margin exceeds the defined threshold, then the system should send a real-time notification to the user via their preferred communication method.

A user adjusts their profitability alert settings and saves the changes.

Given a user accesses their alert settings, when they modify the threshold values and save the changes, then the system should confirm the updates have been successful and the new thresholds are active.

Users receive regular summary alerts about their profitability metrics for the previous week.

Given the user has opted for weekly summary notifications, when the end of the week occurs, then the system should send a summary of the profitability metrics along with any relevant alerts regarding threshold breaches.

A user seeks to disable an alert they previously set for profitability changes.

Given a user wants to disable a previously set alert, when they navigate to their alert settings and select to disable the alert, then the system should confirm that the alert has been successfully disabled.

Users can create multiple alerts for different profitability metrics across various product categories.

Given a user is in the alert settings, when they specify different product categories and corresponding profitability metrics to monitor, then the system should allow the creation of multiple distinct alerts and confirm their establishment.

Real-Time Inventory Insights

Real-Time Inventory Insights correlates sales trends with current inventory levels to provide actionable recommendations for reordering. This feature helps users maintain optimal stock without manual oversight, greatly reducing the risk of lost sales due to stockouts or excess inventory.

Requirements

Automated Stock Reordering

"As a retail store manager, I want automated stock reordering notifications so that I can ensure my inventory is always at optimal levels without having to manually track sales and stock."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a feature that automatically generates restocking alerts based on predefined thresholds and sales trends. It will leverage real-time sales data and inventory metrics to ensure that users are notified when stock levels dip below a specified point, thereby preventing stockouts. The benefit of this functionality lies in its ability to reduce manual oversight, enhance operational efficiency, and guarantee that businesses are always equipped with the necessary inventory to meet customer demand without unnecessary overstocking. This feature must integrate seamlessly with existing inventory management workflows and provide customizable alert settings for flexibility in different business scenarios.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automated restocking alert when inventory of a frequently sold item falls below the predefined threshold.

Given that the inventory level of the item is below the specified threshold and sales trends indicate continued demand, when the system checks inventory status, then an automated alert should be generated and communicated to the user via their selected notification method.

User customizes alert settings to adjust the threshold levels for different products.

Given that the user has access to the alert settings page, when the user changes the threshold for an item and saves the settings, then the updated threshold should be reflected in the system and trigger a test alert if the new threshold is crossed.

User experiences a successful integration of automated restocking alerts with their existing e-commerce platform.

Given that the user is configured with integration settings for their e-commerce platform, when the inventory levels are updated in the e-commerce store, then the automated alerts should reflect the real-time inventory changes without delays or errors.

User receives notifications through multiple channels (email, SMS) based on their selected preferences.

Given that the user has set their notification preferences for restocking alerts, when the inventory level triggers an alert, then the user should receive notifications through all selected channels simultaneously within five minutes of triggering.

User can view a log of past restocking alerts to track inventory management effectively.

Given that the user accesses the restocking alerts history section, when the user reviews the log, then they should see a list of previously generated alerts along with timestamps and respective inventory levels at the time of the alert.

User's inventory system successfully prevents stockouts based on historical sales data and inventory levels.

Given that the inventory management system has been running for a month with real-time sales data, when analyzing stockout incidents during that period, there should be a reduction of at least 30% in stockouts on items monitored by the automated alert system compared to the previous month without the feature.

Sales Trend Analytics

"As an e-commerce entrepreneur, I want to analyze sales trends over time so that I can make data-driven decisions on inventory management and marketing strategies."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a robust analytics dashboard that collects, analyzes, and visualizes sales data over selected time frames. It aims to correlate this data with current inventory levels to provide insights on sales trends, seasonal demand fluctuations, and product performance. By displaying these trends graphically, the dashboard will enable users to make informed decisions regarding inventory purchases and promotions. The successful implementation of this feature will empower users with a deeper understanding of their sales patterns, ultimately improving their inventory management and sales strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User reviews sales data to identify trends and make decisions about inventory restocking during monthly performance meetings.

Given the sales trend analytics dashboard is accessible, When a user selects a time frame for analysis, Then the dashboard should display visualized sales trends aligned with current inventory levels for that selected period.

As a store manager, I want to receive automated reordering suggestions based on sales trends to avoid stockouts during peak seasons.

Given that sales data indicates a rising trend in product sales, When the inventory levels reach a predefined threshold, Then the system should recommend restocking actions for those products automatically.

During a seasonal sale event, the user needs to analyze product performance to optimize promotions and stock levels.

Given the seasonal demand data is selected on the dashboard, When the user views the performance metrics, Then the dashboard should display comparative analysis of product sales before, during, and after the sale event.

An e-commerce business owner wants to track how inventory levels affect lost sales during a specific selling period.

Given the selling period is specified by the user, When the analytics dashboard is generated, Then the dashboard should show correlations between inventory levels and lost sales for that period.

The financial officer requires a report detailing the cost implications of overstocked items based on sales data.

Given the user requests a report on overstocked items, When the relevant sales data is analyzed, Then the system should provide a detailed cost analysis of overstocked inventory and its financial impact.

An admin needs to ensure that the analytics dashboard integrates smoothly with existing accounting software to track inventory costs.

Given the integration settings are configured, When the user initiates a sync with the accounting software, Then all relevant sales and inventory data should be correctly imported and displayed on the dashboard without errors.

User-Friendly Dashboard Integration

"As a small business owner, I want a user-friendly dashboard where I can see my inventory levels and sales insights all in one place so that I can manage my business more efficiently."

Description

This requirement entails designing a user-friendly dashboard that serves as a centralized hub for users to access real-time inventory insights, sales data, and stock alerts. The dashboard must be intuitive and visually appealing, ensuring that users can easily navigate various features, view key performance metrics at a glance, and access actionable insights. This integration will significantly enhance the user experience by providing a streamlined interface for inventory management while ensuring that users can efficiently manage their operations from a single location.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to access the dashboard to get real-time inventory insights after logging into the InvenTrack application.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see real-time inventory insights displayed clearly and prominently on the screen.

User wants to view key performance metrics related to inventory management on the dashboard.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they look for key performance metrics, then they should see sales trends, inventory levels, and reorder recommendations visualized in an intuitive manner.

User receives stock alerts for low inventory levels directly on the dashboard interface.

Given that the inventory level drops below a defined threshold, when the user views the dashboard, then they should receive an alert notification indicating the specific items that need reordering.

User needs to navigate through different sections of the dashboard quickly and efficiently.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they click on various menu options, then they should be able to transition between different sections without delays and with clear navigation paths.

User wants to customize the dashboard layout to better suit their preferences for inventory management.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they attempt to customize the layout, then the dashboard should allow adjustment of widget positions and saved preferences for future use.

User desires to access the dashboard on various devices without losing functionality.

Given the user accesses the dashboard on different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile), then the dashboard should maintain its usability and display all key features effectively across all platforms.

User wants to quickly analyze historical data alongside current inventory insights.

Given the user is interacting with the dashboard, when they select a timeframe for historical data, then they should see a comparison of historical sales and inventory metrics alongside real-time insights.

Customizable Reporting Features

"As a business analyst, I want to create customizable reports on inventory and sales performance so that I can identify trends and make informed recommendations to improve business operations."

Description

This requirement involves the development of customizable reporting tools that allow users to generate specific reports based on their inventory and sales data. Users should be able to select various parameters such as date ranges, product categories, or sales channels to tailor reports to their unique needs. These reports will provide users with valuable insights into their inventory turnover rates, sales performance, and other critical metrics, aiding in long-term strategic decision-making. Custom reports will not only enhance user satisfaction but also support users in optimizing their inventory management practices based on data-driven insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a customized report on inventory turnover rates for the last quarter, filtering by product categories and sales channels to analyze performance.

Given the user selects the inventory turnover report type and specifies the last quarter as the date range, When the user applies filters for product categories and sales channels, Then the system should generate a report displaying the relevant inventory turnover statistics based on selected criteria.

A user accesses the customizable reporting feature and creates a report that includes sales performance metrics over a six-month period.

Given the user selects the sales performance report type and enters a custom date range for the last six months, When the user clicks the 'Generate Report' button, Then the system should display a report with detailed sales performance metrics for the specified date range.

The user wants to save a customized report to their profile for future access.

Given the user has generated a customized report with specific parameters, When the user chooses to 'Save Report' and assigns it a name, Then the system should save the report template under the user's profile for future retrieval and editing.

A user views a previously generated report and wants to adjust the parameters for a new analysis.

Given the user retrieves a saved report, When they adjust parameters such as date range and product category, Then the system should refresh the report with updated data reflecting the new parameters chosen by the user.

Users need to export a customized report in various formats for sharing with stakeholders.

Given the user has generated a customized report, When the user selects the export option and chooses the format (PDF, Excel, CSV), Then the system should successfully export the report in the selected format without data loss or errors.

The user attempts to generate a report with no selected parameters and receives appropriate feedback.

Given the user attempts to generate a custom report without selecting any parameters, When the user clicks 'Generate Report', Then the system should display a warning message indicating that at least one parameter must be selected before proceeding.

The user wishes to see a visual representation of their customized report data in the form of graphs or charts.

Given the user has generated a customized report, When they select the option to view the report in graphical format, Then the system should provide an option to display the data visually using graphs or charts that accurately represent the data from the report.

Mobile Access Functionality

"As a retail manager, I want mobile access to my inventory management system so that I can monitor stock levels and make adjustments while I am on the move."

Description

This requirement seeks to develop mobile access capabilities for InvenTrack, allowing users to manage and monitor their inventory from anywhere at any time using their mobile devices. The mobile functionality should ensure that users can receive stock alerts, view sales trends, and make quick inventory adjustments on the go. This feature is crucial for business owners who may not always be at their desks but still need to react swiftly to changing inventory conditions. The implementation of mobile access will enhance user flexibility and responsiveness, ensuring they remain in control of their inventory management even when away from the office.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a low stock alert on their mobile device when inventory for a specific product falls below the predefined threshold.

Given that the inventory level for a product falls below the threshold, when the user is logged into the mobile app, then they should receive a push notification alerting them of the low stock.

User views current inventory levels and sales trends on their mobile device to make quick adjustments.

Given that the user has accessed the mobile app, when they navigate to the inventory section, then they should see real-time inventory levels and correlated sales trends for each product listed should be updated within 5 seconds.

User successfully updates inventory levels for a product through their mobile device while on the go.

Given that the user selects a product and chooses to edit its inventory level, when they submit the changes through the mobile app, then the inventory level should be updated in the system immediately, and a confirmation message should be displayed within 3 seconds.

User can filter and search for specific products in their inventory using the mobile app.

Given that the user is on the inventory screen, when they enter a search term into the search bar, then the displayed inventory list should filter to only show products that match the search term within 2 seconds.

User accesses data analytics on inventory turnover directly through the mobile app.

Given that the user is on the analytics section of the mobile app, when they select the option to view inventory turnover, then the app should display relevant data visuals and statistics accurately reflecting the past month's turnover rate.

Integration with E-Commerce Platforms

"As an online seller, I want integration between InvenTrack and my e-commerce platform so that I can manage inventory easily across multiple sales channels without manual tracking."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing seamless integrations with various e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Amazon. By integrating InvenTrack with these platforms, users will be able to automatically synchronize their inventory levels and manage orders across various sales channels effortlessly. This integration will eliminate the need for manual data entry and reduce errors, allowing businesses to operate more efficiently. The successful execution of this requirement will fundamentally enhance the product’s utility by ensuring users can maintain accurate inventory records and respond to sales promptly without discrepancies.

Acceptance Criteria

Integrating InvenTrack with Shopify to synchronize inventory levels automatically when a sale is made.

Given a product is sold on Shopify, when the sale is processed, then the inventory level in InvenTrack should automatically decrease by the quantity sold without any manual input.

Ensuring that inventory levels update in real-time across all connected platforms when changes occur in one system.

Given multiple e-commerce platforms (Shopify, WooCommerce, Amazon) are connected to InvenTrack, when an inventory update is made in one platform, then the corresponding inventory levels in all other platforms must reflect the change within 5 minutes.

Testing the accuracy of order management synchronization between InvenTrack and multiple sales channels.

Given pending orders exist in WooCommerce and InvenTrack, when the orders are confirmed, then InvenTrack must automatically update the order status to 'shipped' and adjust the inventory levels accordingly for all related products.

Validating the user experience of setting up integrations with e-commerce platforms within InvenTrack.

Given a user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the integrations section and select a connection to Shopify, then the user should be able to complete the integration process within 10 minutes without requiring any technical support.

Assessing the handling of errors during inventory synchronization processes.

Given a network error occurs while synchronizing inventory levels, when the error is resolved, then InvenTrack should automatically attempt to resynchronize the inventory data without user intervention, ensuring no data is lost or duplicated.

Comparative Performance Metrics

Comparative Performance Metrics allows users to evaluate their business performance against industry benchmarks or historical data. By providing a broader context, this feature helps users understand their market position and identify areas for improvement, ultimately driving competitive advantage.

Requirements

Benchmark Comparison

"As a retail business owner, I want to compare my sales metrics with industry benchmarks so that I can identify areas where I can improve my performance and better compete in the market."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a system that allows users to compare their business performance metrics against predefined industry benchmarks or historical records. It should facilitate easy access to relevant data trends and insights, enabling users to track key performance indicators (KPIs) over time against standard benchmarks. The functionality will enhance users' understanding of their competitive position in the market, identify specific areas requiring improvement, and inform strategic decision-making. The integration process should ensure that data is updated in real-time, allowing for immediate evaluation of performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the dashboard to view performance metrics and benchmarks for retail sales.

Given the user is logged into the InvenTrack system, when they navigate to the performance metrics dashboard, then they should be able to see their retail sales metrics compared to the industry benchmark in a clear visual format.

User wants to compare their business performance over the last quarter against historical data.

Given the user selects the last quarter as the comparison period, when they execute the comparison, then they should receive a comprehensive report displaying their performance metrics along with historical data for the same quarter, indicating areas of improvement.

User receives an alert when their performance metrics deviate significantly from the benchmark.

Given the user sets up alert thresholds for their key performance indicators, when their performance deviates beyond the specified thresholds, then they should receive an automated notification via email detailing the deviation and suggested corrective actions.

User wishes to filter performance metrics by region or product category to assess performance contextually.

Given the user accesses the filter options on the metrics dashboard, when they select a specific region or product category, then the performance metrics displayed should update to reflect data only for the selected filter, comparing it against the relevant benchmarks.

User wants to generate a report summarizing their business performance against benchmarks for a specific period.

Given the user chooses a specific date range and clicks on the 'Generate Report' button, when the report is created, then it should include a summary of their performance metrics, comparisons with benchmarks, and visual graphs to illustrate trends over the selected period.

User seeks to understand the factors affecting their performance metrics compared to the benchmarks.

Given the user clicks on an element within the performance metrics dashboard, when they request detailed insights, then they should receive an analysis report that identifies contributing factors to their performance relative to benchmarks.

User wants to ensure that performance data is updated in real-time for ongoing assessments.

Given the user is viewing their performance metrics dashboard, when real-time data updates occur, then they should see metrics refresh automatically without needing to reload the page, maintaining current data accuracy.

Historical Performance Analysis

"As a small business owner, I want to analyze my sales over the past year to see trends and make better inventory decisions for the upcoming season."

Description

This requirement outlines the need for a feature that allows users to analyze their historical performance metrics over certain periods. Users should be able to view trends in key indicators such as sales, inventory turnover, and customer engagement. This analysis will help users recognize patterns over time, enabling them to make informed decisions on restocking, promotions, and overall business strategy. The feature should incorporate visualization tools such as charts and graphs to clearly present the data and highlight significant changes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Historical Performance Analysis feature to view sales trends over the last year.

Given the user is logged in to InvenTrack, when they select the Historical Performance Analysis feature, then they should see a line chart displaying monthly sales for the past 12 months, with the option to filter by product category.

User utilizes the graphical representation of inventory turnover rates for quarterly analysis.

Given the user has selected a specific quarter, when they view the Historical Performance Analysis, then they should see a bar graph illustrating the inventory turnover rates for that quarter, with annotated averages for comparison.

User reviews historical customer engagement data to determine patterns for marketing strategies.

Given the user is on the Historical Performance Analysis page, when they select the customer engagement metric, then they should be able to view a pie chart representing customer interaction types (e.g., email opens, social media interactions) over the past six months.

User generates a report summarizing the key performance indicators (KPIs) from the historical data.

Given the user requests a report on key performance indicators, when they submit the request, then a downloadable report should be generated that includes metrics for sales, inventory turnover, and customer engagement trends, clearly labeled and formatted.

User compares historical performance metrics against industry benchmarks to identify areas for improvement.

Given the user has access to comparative performance metrics, when they select the benchmark comparison option within Historical Performance Analysis, then they should see a dashboard that compares their KPIs against relevant industry benchmarks, highlighting discrepancies and recommendations for improvement.

User customizes the date range for analyzing historical performance metrics.

Given the user is on the Historical Performance Analysis interface, when they select a custom date range, then the displayed metrics and graphs should update to reflect the data for the selected period accurately, with options to save the custom filters for future use.

Customizable Reporting

"As a user, I want to create customizable reports of my inventory metrics so that I can focus on important data that drives my business decisions."

Description

This requirement specifies the need for a reporting tool that allows users to customize their performance reports based on selected metrics and timeframes. Users should be able to select which performance indicators are most relevant to them and generate reports tailored to their specific needs. This functionality will empower users by providing deeper insights aligned with their unique business objectives, enabling strategic planning and enhanced monitoring of performance against goals. The reports should be exportable in multiple formats, including PDF and Excel.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to generate a customized performance report to analyze sales metrics for the last quarter while including only relevant KPIs for their business.

Given the user has selected the 'Sales Metrics' category and the 'Last Quarter' timeframe, when they click 'Generate Report', then the system should create a report displaying only the chosen KPIs with the correct data.

A business owner needs to export a customized report into a PDF format for presentation purposes after tailoring it according to their specific metrics and timeframes.

Given a user has customized their report and clicks 'Export', when they select 'PDF' as the format, then the system should successfully generate and download a PDF version of the report with all selected customization intact.

The user aims to analyze inventory turnover metrics over the past year by adjusting the selected timeframe and metrics in the reporting tool.

Given the user selects 'Inventory Turnover' as the metric and specifies the timeframe 'Last Year', when they generate the report, then the system should accurately display the inventory turnover rate for each month of the specified timeframe in the report.

A retail manager wants to compare their performance metrics against industry benchmarks to assess their market position.

Given the user has selected 'Industry Benchmark Comparison' as the report type, when they generate the report, then it should include both their performance metrics and the corresponding industry benchmark, highlighting any discrepancies.

A user wants to save a customized report template for future use to ensure consistency in reporting.

Given the user has customized their report and clicks 'Save as Template', when they provide a template name and confirm, then the system should successfully save the template for future report generation.

The business owner requires a report that includes historical data for performance comparison over the last three years.

Given the user selects 'Historical Data' as an option and specifies 'Last Three Years' as the timeframe, when they generate the report, then the report should display performance metrics accurately over the selected historical period.

A marketing analyst needs to produce a report that integrates both sales and customer satisfaction metrics for the last month.

Given that the user selects both 'Sales' and 'Customer Satisfaction' metrics and sets the timeframe to 'Last Month', when they generate the report, then the report should include a comprehensive overview of both metrics alongside comparative visuals.

Performance Alert Notifications

"As a business owner, I want to receive alerts when my sales drop below a specific threshold, so that I can take immediate action to address potential problems."

Description

This requirement involves setting up a notification system that alerts users when their performance metrics deviate significantly from industry benchmarks or historical averages. Users should be able to define threshold levels for various metrics that trigger alerts through email, SMS, or app notifications. This proactive feature will ensure that users are immediately informed about critical changes, allowing for timely interventions to address potential issues or leverage opportunities.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert via email when their average monthly sales performance drops below a user-defined threshold compared to industry benchmarks.

Given the user has set a sales performance threshold, when the average monthly sales drops below the threshold, then the user should receive an email notification within 5 minutes.

User receives an SMS notification when inventory levels fall below a specified threshold level relative to historical averages.

Given the user has configured an inventory threshold level, when the inventory level drops below this level, then the user should receive an SMS notification immediately.

User is notified through app notifications when their customer satisfaction ratings decline significantly compared to past performance metrics.

Given the user has set satisfaction rating thresholds, when the current customer satisfaction rating is significantly lower by at least 10% than the historical average, then an in-app notification should be triggered.

A user wants to adjust their performance alert settings for different business units and receive notifications accordingly.

Given the user has the ability to configure performance alert settings for multiple business units, when a defined performance threshold is met for any unit, then notifications should reflect the specific business unit associated with the alert.

User can view and customize the types of performance alerts they want to receive notifications for through their account settings.

Given the user is in their account settings, when they select specific performance metrics they want alerts for, then these preferences should be saved, and notifications for those metrics should be activated accordingly.

User receives a weekly summary of performance alerts that details any notifications triggered during that week.

Given the user has opted in for a weekly summary, when the week ends, then the user should receive a summary email that lists all performance alerts that were triggered during the week.

Competitor Analysis Tool

"As a business strategist, I want to analyze competitor performance metrics to understand my market position better and adjust my strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating a competitor analysis tool that provides users with insights on competitor performance metrics in relation to their own. Users should have access to aggregated market data that showcases how their business compares with similar businesses. This feature will offer a broader perspective on market positioning, enabling users to adapt their strategies based on competitors’ strengths and weaknesses. It should include visualizations and comparative data tables for enhanced clarity.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Comparative Performance Metrics feature to analyze their business performance against industry benchmarks over a specific time period.

Given the user has selected the Comparative Performance Metrics option, when they input their business data and select a date range, then the system should display a comparison report that includes visualizations and data tables showing their metrics against industry averages.

User generates a report comparing their performance metrics with their top three competitors identified in the system.

Given the user has access to competitor data, when they request a comparison report, then the system should generate a report that includes comparative performance metrics side by side for the user and their selected competitors.

User wants to filter performance metrics by specific categories such as revenue, sales growth, and customer satisfaction to identify areas of improvement.

Given the user is viewing the Comparative Performance Metrics dashboard, when they apply filters for specific metrics, then the system should update the visualizations and data tables to reflect only the selected categories.

User receives alerts for significant changes in performance metrics relative to industry benchmarks or competitors.

Given the system is monitoring performance metrics, when there is a significant change in the user’s metrics compared to industry benchmarks, then the user should receive an email notification or alert through the app.

User examines historical data trends for their business performance over the past year to understand growth patterns.

Given the user has selected the historical comparison view, when they choose a timeframe of the past year, then the system should display a line graph illustrating performance trends over time and highlight key growth areas.

User collaborates with team members by sharing comparative performance reports through the application.

Given the user has generated a comparative performance report, when they use the share functionality, then the system should allow them to send a link to the report via email to selected team members in a secure manner.

User customizes the dashboard to prioritize the performance metrics that matter most to their business strategy.

Given the user is on the dashboard page, when they drag and drop performance metric widgets to rearrange them, then the layout should update immediately to reflect the new arrangement and save it for future sessions.

Feedback Pulse

Feedback Pulse enables sales associates to submit on-the-spot insights about customer preferences and product performance via a user-friendly interface. This feature ensures that valuable real-time feedback is captured efficiently and categorized for analysis, allowing management to quickly identify trends in customer behavior and product demand.

Requirements

Real-time Feedback Submission

"As a sales associate, I want to submit customer feedback in real time so that I can provide valuable insights immediately and help the management adjust inventory based on current trends."

Description

The Real-time Feedback Submission requirement allows sales associates to input customer insights and product performance data directly through a mobile or web-based interface. This feature will enable sales associates to capture qualitative and quantitative feedback instantly during customer interactions, significantly enhancing the speed and accuracy of data collection. Integrated with InvenTrack’s inventory tracking capabilities, this functionality will facilitate timely updates to inventory management, allow for better demand forecasting, and ultimately inform product strategy based on actual customer preferences and behaviors. The requirement emphasizes ease of use, ensuring that associates can provide feedback quickly while attending to customers, which enhances overall operational efficiency and customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales associate submits real-time feedback on customer preferences during a busy sales event, using their mobile device to capture insights immediately without interrupting customer interactions.

Given that I am a sales associate at a retail store, When I input feedback on customer preferences through the mobile app during a sales event, Then the feedback is saved successfully and is accessible in the management dashboard within 5 seconds.

Sales associate uses the web-based interface to submit insights about a popular product's performance directly after a customer expresses interest in it.

Given that I am a sales associate accessing the web interface, When I submit feedback regarding product performance after a customer inquiry, Then the feedback should reflect in the database with the correct timestamp and be categorized as 'Product Performance'.

The system automatically categorizes and displays submitted feedback within the management dashboard for analysis immediately after it's submitted by a sales associate.

Given that feedback has been submitted by a sales associate, When I access the management dashboard, Then I should see the new feedback categorized by 'Customer Preferences' or 'Product Performance' within 10 seconds of submission.

Sales associate needs to report both qualitative and quantitative feedback about a customer interaction while managing multiple customers in the store.

Given that I am submitting feedback, When I select both a qualitative comment and a quantitative rating for a product, Then both pieces of information should be stored correctly and should reflect in the management analytics without data loss.

During a sales promotion, sales associates aggregate customer feedback in real-time to adjust inventory orders and marketing strategies effectively.

Given that real-time feedback is being collected, When sales associates submit feedback during the promotion, Then inventory management systems should receive updates that reflect suggested changes in stock levels based on the feedback provided.

Sales associates receive training on how to use the Real-time Feedback Submission feature effectively before it's launched in the retail environment.

Given that training sessions are completed, When I test the submission process during training, Then I should be able to submit and categorize feedback without errors or confusion, indicating successful user training.

Feedback Categorization System

"As a manager, I want feedback from sales associates to be categorized automatically so that I can quickly analyze trends and make data-driven decisions for inventory management."

Description

The Feedback Categorization System requirement involves developing an automated mechanism to classify incoming feedback from sales associates based on predefined categories such as customer preferences, product performance, and service quality. This system will utilize natural language processing and tagging strategies to streamline the feedback analysis process. By organizing the data efficiently, management can quickly identify patterns and trends, leading to more informed decision-making regarding product offerings and inventory levels. Additionally, this feature will enhance the reporting capabilities, allowing for periodic reviews of customer insights without manual sorting efforts, thus saving time and resources while improving accuracy in trend analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales associate submits customer feedback after a product demonstration during a retail event.

Given a sales associate has logged into the Feedback Pulse system, when they enter feedback about a customer's preferences, then the system should automatically categorize the feedback based on predefined tags such as 'Customer Preference' or 'Product Performance.'

Management reviews customer feedback after the product launch to assess performance and interest.

Given that feedback has been submitted by sales associates, when management accesses the Feedback Categorization System, then they should see an organized report that displays categorized insights relevant to 'Product Performance' and 'Service Quality' over the past month.

A sales associate notices a trend in customer demand for a particular product during weekly sales calls.

Given that a sales associate is viewing the Feedback Pulse interface, when they input multiple feedback entries for the same product preference, then the system should consolidate these entries and display a summary of customer insights for that product in the trending category.

Management conducts a quarterly review of product performance to inform inventory decisions.

Given the Feedback Categorization System has received input, when management initiates a report for quarterly analysis, then the report should accurately reflect categorized feedback trends, showing patterns in customer preferences and product performance.

Sales associates attend training on how to provide feedback effectively using the new system.

Given that sales associates have completed the training, when they submit feedback through the system, then the feedback should be processed without errors, and categorized accurately in real-time.

A new feature request based on customer feedback is analyzed for feasibility and impact on inventory.

Given that feedback relates to a potential feature enhancement, when management reviews the categorized feedback report, then they should be able to prioritize requests based on frequency and customer sentiment reflected in the categories.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a product manager, I want to access a feedback analytics dashboard so that I can visualize trends and make quick, informed decisions about inventory and product strategies."

Description

The Feedback Analytics Dashboard requirement entails the creation of a comprehensive dashboard that visually presents categorized feedback data in an intuitive format. This feature will include interactive charts and graphs displaying key metrics such as customer satisfaction levels, product feedback scores, and seasonal trends. The dashboard will aggregate real-time data from the feedback submission and categorization stages, providing management with actionable insights at a glance. By facilitating easy interpretation of complex data sets, this dashboard will empower stakeholders to make timely decisions that can improve inventory management, optimize product offerings, and enhance overall business performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Feedback Analytics Dashboard to review customer feedback data after the launch of a new product line.

Given the user is logged in and has permission to access the dashboard, when they navigate to the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then they should see an overview of categorized feedback data including product performance summaries and customer satisfaction metrics within 3 seconds.

Sales management team reviews seasonal trends in customer feedback and sales data to plan for upcoming promotions.

Given the data from the feedback submission is up-to-date, when the management selects the seasonal trends component on the dashboard, then they should be presented with an interactive chart displaying at least the last four seasons' data for customer satisfaction and product feedback scores.

A sales associate submits feedback about a customer's product preference through the Feedback Pulse feature and expects to see that feedback reflected in the dashboard.

Given feedback has been submitted through the Feedback Pulse, when the data refresh occurs, then the Feedback Analytics Dashboard should display the new feedback categorized under the relevant product and customer preference sections within 5 minutes.

Management plans a review meeting to assess overall product performance based on the data presented in the dashboard.

Given management is preparing for the review meeting, when they view the dashboard, then they should have access to a downloadable report option that includes key metrics and trends presented in the last 30 days, with visual data representations such as graphs and charts.

The feedback displayed on the dashboard should be user-friendly and understandable for non-technical stakeholders.

Given a non-technical user is viewing the dashboard, when they hover over the various visual elements, then tooltips should provide clear definitions and explanations of the metrics and data being displayed, ensuring comprehension of at least 90% of the visual elements represented.

The dashboard should support filtering options for users to view specific feedback categories or timeframes based on their needs.

Given the user is on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they apply a filter for a specific product category or custom date range, then the displayed data and charts should update accordingly to show only the relevant feedback and insights in less than 2 seconds.

Push Notification Alerts for Insights

"As a sales manager, I want to receive alerts when significant customer feedback trends emerge so that I can react quickly and adjust strategies based on real-time insights."

Description

The Push Notification Alerts for Insights requirement aims to implement a notification system that alerts management and sales teams when significant trends or feedback patterns emerge from customer insights. This feature will utilize predefined thresholds and AI-driven analytics to send real-time alerts, ensuring that stakeholders are immediately informed of potential issues or opportunities. By proactively addressing feedback, the business can enhance customer satisfaction and react swiftly to changes in product demand, fostering a culture of responsiveness and continuous improvement. This requirement is essential for maintaining competitive advantage in dynamic market conditions while optimizing inventory levels and offerings.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales associates submit feedback through the Feedback Pulse interface during a busy sales period, leading to real-time alerts being generated for management when specific product trends emerge.

Given a sales associate inputs customer preferences and product performance feedback, when the feedback triggers predefined thresholds, then a push notification alert is sent to the management and sales teams within 5 minutes.

Management is monitoring the feedback trends during a high-traffic event, such as a holiday sale, to stay updated on customer sentiments and product demand changes.

Given that significant feedback trends are detected during the high-traffic event, when three or more thresholds are exceeded, then an aggregated push notification with trend insights is sent to management without delay.

A sales team member is reviewing the push notifications received regarding customer insights to assess whether immediate action is necessary.

Given that a push notification is received, when the team member accesses the notification, then they can view detailed insights along with the context of the feedback and suggested actions within 10 seconds.

Management receives alerts on a mobile device while traveling to ensure they are informed of critical customer feedback patterns and trends.

Given that management has opted into mobile push notifications, when a significant feedback pattern emerges, then a clear and concise push notification detailing the nature of the trend is received, ensuring it is actionable.

During a product launch, real-time insights are essential for agility in responding to customer reactions and preferences.

Given that feedback is submitted regarding the new product, when feedback indicates a negative trend, then a push notification is triggered, allowing management to initiate an immediate review session within 2 hours.

The system tracks feedback trends over time and alerts management only when necessary, reducing notification overload.

Given that the average feedback score for a product drops below a certain threshold over a week, when the condition is met, then a strategic push notification summarizing the trend and suggested next steps is sent to management.

User Training and Support for Feedback Pulse

"As a sales associate, I want training on how to use the Feedback Pulse feature effectively so that I can maximize my contributions to improving inventory management and customer satisfaction."

Description

The User Training and Support for Feedback Pulse requirement encompasses the development of comprehensive training materials and support resources for sales associates and management to effectively utilize the Feedback Pulse feature. This includes creating user guides, tutorial videos, and a dedicated support portal to assist users in understanding how to submit feedback, categorize it, and analyze results efficiently. Proper training will ensure that all team members are comfortable using the feature and are aware of the benefits it brings to inventory management, ultimately leading to higher user adoption rates and more effective utilization of feedback data.

Acceptance Criteria

User Training Material Accessibility for Feedback Pulse

Given a new sales associate, when they log into the support portal, then they can easily access user guides and tutorial videos related to the Feedback Pulse feature.

User Guide Completeness for Feedback Pulse

Given the completed user guide, when a sales associate reviews the guide, then they should find clear instructions on submitting feedback, categorizing it, and analyzing results without additional help.

Tutorial Video Engagement for Feedback Pulse

Given the tutorial videos for Feedback Pulse, when a sales associate watches these videos, then they should be able to submit feedback confidently after the tutorial, demonstrated by successfully submitting at least one feedback entry immediately after.

Support Portal Functionality for Feedback Pulse

Given the support portal, when a sales associate attempts to use the portal, then they should be able to submit a support ticket and receive a confirmation of submission instantly.

User Adoption Rate for Feedback Pulse

Given the rollout of Feedback Pulse, when management reviews user adoption rates after three months, then at least 80% of sales associates should have submitted feedback through the system at least once.

Feedback Categorization Process for Feedback Pulse

Given the feature for categorizing feedback, when a sales associate submits feedback, then they should be able to categorize it into at least three distinct categories defined in the user guide.

Analysis Tools Availability for Feedback Pulse

Given the analysis tools integrated into Feedback Pulse, when management accesses the dashboard, then they should find visual reports summarizing feedback trends and insights from the past month.

Insight Analytics Dashboard

The Insight Analytics Dashboard compiles the submitted feedback into visual reports that highlight trends in customer preferences and product performance over time. This user-focused feature empowers business owners and managers to make informed inventory decisions by showcasing key metrics that reflect customer sentiment accurately, enhancing product assortments and stock levels.

Requirements

Customizable Metrics

"As an inventory manager, I want to customize the dashboard to display the metrics most relevant to my business so that I can focus on the data that matters most for my decision-making."

Description

The Customizable Metrics requirement enables users to select and prioritize key performance indicators (KPIs) relevant to their inventory management goals. This functionality allows business owners to tailor the dashboard to their unique needs, ensuring that the most critical metrics are readily accessible and prominently displayed. By allowing users to choose which metrics to focus on, the feature enhances the relevance of insights provided, leading to more strategic inventory decisions and improved business outcomes. This customization fosters user engagement as they can align the dashboard's presentation with their specific operational goals, encouraging ongoing use and reliance on the personal data insights for better decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

As a business owner, I want to customize the metrics displayed on my Insight Analytics Dashboard so that I can prioritize the KPIs that matter most to my inventory management strategy.

Given I am logged into the Insight Analytics Dashboard, when I navigate to the Customizable Metrics section and select specific KPIs, then the dashboard should immediately update to display only the selected metrics.

As a manager, I want to save my customized dashboard settings so that I can access my preferred metrics in future sessions without needing to reconfigure the dashboard every time.

Given I have customized the dashboard metrics, when I click the 'Save Settings' button, then my selections should be stored, and upon re-logging, the dashboard should reflect these saved preferences.

As a user, I want to receive a confirmation message when I successfully update my customizable metrics to ensure that my changes have been applied.

Given I have made changes to the dashboard metrics, when I click the 'Update Metrics' button, then a confirmation message should be displayed confirming that my metrics have been successfully updated.

As a user, I want to see a preview of my customizable metrics before finalizing the changes, so that I can be sure they meet my needs.

Given I am in the Customizable Metrics section, when I select new KPIs, then a preview of the dashboard should display the selected metrics in real-time.

As a business owner, I want the ability to reset my dashboard metrics to the default settings in case I change my mind about my custom selections.

Given I have customized the metrics on my dashboard, when I click the 'Reset to Default' option, then all metrics should revert to the original default values.

Automated Reporting

"As a business owner, I want to receive automated reports on inventory performance so that I can analyze key data trends without spending time on manual reporting processes."

Description

The Automated Reporting requirement incorporates functionality that allows users to receive scheduled and on-demand reports regarding inventory performance metrics directly to their email or dashboard notifications. This feature simplifies the process of monitoring and analyzing inventory data, enabling business owners to stay informed without needing to manually generate reports. By providing accessible and actionable insights, this feature streamlines workflows and saves time, improving overall efficiency. Additionally, automated reporting fosters a data-driven culture by ensuring that key stakeholders are regularly updated with relevant information, fostering timely decision-making and proactive inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives scheduled weekly inventory performance reports via email every Monday morning.

Given the user has set preferences for weekly reporting, when Monday arrives, then the user should receive an email containing the latest inventory performance metrics.

Users can generate on-demand reports for specific date ranges through the dashboard.

Given the user selects a start and end date on the dashboard, when the user clicks the 'Generate Report' button, then a report for the specified date range should be displayed and can be downloaded.

The reporting system sends alerts for inventory levels that drop below a specified threshold.

Given the user has set threshold values for critical inventory items, when the inventory level falls below this threshold, then an automated alert should be sent to the user's email and displayed in notifications.

The report includes visual charts that represent inventory trends over time.

Given the user accesses the automated reports, when viewing the report, then visual charts should be present displaying trends in inventory performance metrics for the selected time frame.

Users can modify their reporting preferences at any time.

Given the user is on the preferences page, when they change their email frequency or report content options, then those preferences should be saved, and the user should receive confirmation of the updates.

Users can filter reports by product category or supplier.

Given the user accesses the report generation feature, when they select specific filters for product category or supplier, then only the relevant data should be included in the generated report.

Interactive Trend Analysis

"As a product manager, I want to visualize historical inventory trends so that I can make data-driven decisions regarding product assortments and stock levels."

Description

The Interactive Trend Analysis requirement enables users to visualize historical inventory data and customer feedback trends through interactive charts and graphs. This feature empowers business owners to identify patterns over time, such as seasonal demand spikes and declining product interest, directly impacting inventory strategies. By offering drill-down functionalities, users can explore data at various levels, from broad overviews to specific product lines. This encourages users to utilize data more effectively in predicting future needs and optimizing stock levels, thus aligning inventory management more closely with consumer behavior and market trends.

Acceptance Criteria

User reviews historical inventory data for the last year in the Insight Analytics Dashboard to identify seasonal trends.

Given the user has accessed the Interactive Trend Analysis feature, when they select a date range of the last year, then the dashboard should display interactive charts showing inventory trends for each month, highlighting peaks and troughs in demand.

A business owner drills down into product performance data to assess inventory for a specific category.

Given the user is viewing the Interactive Trend Analysis dashboard, when they select a product category from the dropdown menu, then the system should update the visualizations to display detailed trends for that specific category, including total sales and customer feedback ratings.

A retail manager analyzes customer feedback trends alongside inventory data to optimize stock levels.

Given the user has accessed the Interactive Trend Analysis dashboard, when they overlay customer feedback data on inventory charts, then the dashboard should allow for visual comparison, showing correlations between customer satisfaction and stock levels for the selected timeframe.

The user wants to export trend data for a presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user is on the Interactive Trend Analysis page, when they click the export button, then the system should generate a downloadable report in a predetermined format (e.g., CSV or PDF) containing all selected visualizations and underlying data for the specified date range.

A business owner uses the dashboard to identify declining interest in a product line to make reordering decisions.

Given the user has set the date filter to the last three months, when they view the trend analysis for specific products, then the dashboard should highlight products with decreasing feedback scores and declining inventory turnover rates, prompting further investigation into restocking needs.

A store manager receives notifications on significant trend changes that may affect inventory.

Given that the user has set up alert preferences within the Interactive Trend Analysis feature, when a significant change in trend occurs (e.g., a 20% drop in customer feedback scores for a key product), then the system should send an automated notification to the user via email or app alert.

Smart Notification System

The Smart Notification System alerts relevant stakeholders when significant feedback trends emerge or when particular products receive consistent remarks (positive or negative). This feature fosters proactive inventory management strategies, ensuring that business owners can quickly react to customer needs and optimize product offerings.

Requirements

Real-time Feedback Monitoring

"As a business owner, I want to receive real-time notifications about customer feedback trends, so that I can quickly adapt my inventory and product offerings to meet customer demands."

Description

The Real-time Feedback Monitoring requirement involves developing a system that continuously listens for customer feedback across various channels (such as social media, reviews, and surveys) and captures this data in real-time. This capability will showcase key trends in positive and negative customer sentiments directly related to the products in inventory. It enhances the product by offering immediate insights into customer preferences, enabling rapid response to changing market conditions. Additionally, it integrates with existing customer review platforms and communication tools to aggregate feedback efficiently, thereby fostering a more responsive inventory management scheme.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time monitoring of customer feedback on social media channels.

Given the system is connected to social media platforms, when a customer posts feedback about any product, then the feedback should be captured and displayed in the dashboard within 5 minutes.

Aggregation of feedback from multiple review platforms.

Given the system is integrated with customer review platforms, when a feedback is submitted on any of these platforms, then the system should collate this feedback and highlight trends in the dashboard.

Alerts for significant feedback trends.

Given feedback has been gathered over a defined period, when a product receives a sudden increase in negative sentiments, then the system should initiate an alert to the inventory manager within 10 minutes.

Positive feedback monitoring for product restocking decisions.

Given the monitoring system is active, when the positive feedback for a product reaches 80% within a week, then the system should notify the inventory team to consider restocking.

Integration with communication tools for stakeholder notifications.

Given the feedback monitoring system is in place, when a significant trend is detected, then notifications should be sent to relevant stakeholders via existing communication tools (e.g., email, Slack) within 5 minutes.

Real-time sentiment analysis reporting.

Given customer feedback has been collected, when the system processes this feedback, then it should provide a real-time sentiment analysis report indicating overall customer sentiment for each product every hour.

Trend Analysis Dashboard

"As a retail manager, I want a dashboard that displays trends in customer feedback for each product, so that I can visualize performance issues and adjust inventory levels accordingly."

Description

The Trend Analysis Dashboard requirement entails creating a visual representation of feedback data to identify patterns over time. This dashboard will provide insights into which products receive consistent positive or negative remarks, allowing managers to make informed decisions regarding stock levels and product placements. It will feature customizable views, offering filters by product category, time period, and sentiment polarity. This functionality is crucial for evaluating overall product performance and understanding customer satisfaction trends, thereby enabling proactive inventory management strategies that align with consumer preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Trend Analysis Dashboard displays feedback trends for a specific product category over the last three months, allowing managers to identify consistent positive or negative remarks and adjust inventory levels accordingly.

Given the user selects a product category and a three-month time period, when the dashboard is rendered, then it should display a visual representation of feedback trends including sentiment polarity and frequency of comments.

The Trend Analysis Dashboard allows users to customize views by adding and removing filters such as product category, time period, and sentiment polarity to analyze specific datasets according to business needs.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they apply various filters and click 'Apply', then the dashboard must update to reflect the selected filters accurately without any delays or errors.

The Trend Analysis Dashboard incorporates a notification system for alerting users when feedback trends exceed a designated threshold, prompting them to investigate potential inventory adjustments.

When feedback for any product reaches a predefined positive or negative comment count, then the system should automatically send notifications to relevant stakeholders via email and in-app alerts.

Users can export the data visualizations and trend analysis reports from the Trend Analysis Dashboard for further analysis or presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user selects the 'Export' option, when they choose a file format (e.g., PDF or CSV) and confirms the action, then the system should generate and download the report reflecting the dashboard data.

The Trend Analysis Dashboard is mobile-responsive, allowing users to access and interact with the dashboard seamlessly from various devices, including smartphones and tablets.

Given the user accesses the dashboard from a mobile device, when the page is loaded, then all elements should be arranged appropriately for a mobile display without sacrificing usability or readability.

The Trend Analysis Dashboard updates in real-time to reflect new feedback submitted by customers about products, ensuring that business owners always have the latest data at their fingertips.

Given new feedback is submitted, when the user accesses the dashboard, then it must display the updated feedback data within one minute of submission without requiring a manual refresh.

The Trend Analysis Dashboard includes a help section or tutorial to guide users in navigating and utilizing the dashboard's features effectively.

When the user clicks on the help icon, then it should provide a comprehensive guide or tutorial overviewing the dashboard functionalities, including a FAQ section for additional assistance.

Automated Alert System

"As an inventory manager, I want to receive automated alerts when feedback trends exceed certain thresholds, so that I can take immediate action to resolve issues or capitalize on successes."

Description

The Automated Alert System requirement mandates the creation of a notification system that triggers alerts to stakeholders when significant feedback thresholds are met (e.g., a spike in negative feedback or consistent praise for a new product). This system will help ensure that relevant stakeholders, including inventory managers and product developers, are informed in real-time about important feedback trends. The alerts will be customizable based on the user’s role, preferred channels (email, SMS, in-app notifications), and specific criteria for triggering alerts. The integration of this system aids in timely decision-making and fosters a culture of responsiveness within the organization.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time alert notification for spike in negative product feedback.

Given that a product receives a spike in negative feedback based on the defined threshold, when the automated alert system processes the feedback data, then it should send an immediate notification to the inventory manager via the selected channel (email, SMS, in-app) with details of the product and feedback summary.

Customizable alert preferences for different user roles.

Given that the system allows user role definitions, when a user with the role of 'Product Developer' updates their alert preferences, then the system should successfully save and apply the user’s selected criteria for alerts, ensuring they receive relevant notifications based on their specification.

Notification sent upon positive feedback trend for a new product.

Given a new product launched in the inventory, when the system detects consistent positive feedback exceeding the specified threshold, then an alert should be sent to the product manager, detailing the positive feedback and recommended actions for inventory restocking.

Integration of notification channels based on user settings.

Given that users can select their preferred notification channels, when the alert system triggers an alert based on defined feedback criteria, then the alert must be sent only through the channels (email, SMS, or in-app) as configured by each user, without any discrepancies.

Testing of the alert system's reliability during high feedback volume.

Given that multiple products receive significant feedback simultaneously during a sale event, when the feedback processing occurs, then the system should successfully trigger alerts for all relevant products without any delays or missed notifications.

User interface for managing alert settings is user-friendly.

Given the need for users to manage their alert settings, when a user navigates to the alert settings section, then they should be able to easily configure their preferences without requiring additional help or instructions, ensuring a seamless user experience.

Alerts reflect real-time data for inventory managers.

Given that the alert system is designed for real-time feedback monitoring, when a feedback threshold is breached, then the inventory manager should receive an alert containing accurate and current feedback data within one minute of the threshold being met.

Feedback Categorization Algorithm

"As a data analyst, I want an algorithm that categorizes customer feedback automatically, so that I can quickly identify the most pressing issues and opportunities for product enhancement."

Description

The Feedback Categorization Algorithm requirement involves implementing a machine learning-based approach to categorize customer feedback based on sentiment (positive, neutral, negative) and content type (product quality, delivery, usability). This categorization will simplify the data analysis process and improve the efficiency of identifying critical areas for improvement. This feature will enhance the Smart Notification System by providing structured insights, allowing businesses to prioritize actions based on the most relevant feedback, thereby promoting effective inventory management strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Categorization for Negative Product Reviews

Given a set of customer feedback with negative sentiments, when the Feedback Categorization Algorithm is applied, then at least 90% of the feedback is accurately categorized as negative regarding product quality and usability.

Feedback Categorization for Positive Delivery Reviews

Given customer feedback indicating positive sentiment, when the Feedback Categorization Algorithm processes the data, then at least 85% of the feedback is categorized as positive with respect to delivery and service.

Real-Time Notification Triggered by Categorized Feedback

Given that the Feedback Categorization Algorithm has processed customer feedback, when it identifies a trend of at least 50 negative comments about a specific product, then a notification is sent instantly to stakeholders to take action.

Categorization of Neutral Feedback

Given customer feedback that is neutral, when the Feedback Categorization Algorithm categorizes the data, then the algorithm should classify at least 80% of the neutral feedback correctly without skewing towards positive or negative categories.

Accuracy Validation of Sentiment Analysis

Given a defined dataset of customer feedback with known sentiments, when running the Feedback Categorization Algorithm, then the algorithm should achieve a sentiment classification accuracy of at least 90%.

Integration with the Smart Notification System

Given that the Feedback Categorization Algorithm has successfully categorized customer feedback, when the data is passed to the Smart Notification System, then the system should display actionable insights within 5 minutes.

Feedback Categorization Dashboard Display

Given that customer feedback has been categorized, when the administrator accesses the dashboard, then they should see clearly categorized feedback presented in a user-friendly way, with filters for sentiment and content type.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As a system administrator, I want to integrate InvenTrack with my e-commerce platform, so that I can consolidate customer feedback data across multiple channels and make informed inventory decisions."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms requirement specifies the need to connect the Smart Notification System with major e-commerce platforms such as Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento. This will enable seamless data exchange and allow feedback from various sales channels to be incorporated into InvenTrack's analytics framework. This integration is essential for providing a comprehensive view of customer sentiment related to product performance across different channels, which will inform inventory decisions and marketing strategies. Additionally, it ensures that all customer interactions are contextually understood, enhancing the overall utility of the Smart Notification System.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration with Shopify for feedback synchronization.

Given the Smart Notification System is integrated with Shopify, when a customer leaves feedback on a product, then that feedback should be reflected in InvenTrack within 5 minutes and categorized correctly as positive or negative.

Integration with WooCommerce to process customer reviews.

Given the Smart Notification System is connected to WooCommerce, when a product receives a new review, then the system must automatically trigger a notification if the review contains less than 3 stars or includes particular keywords related to common issues.

Integration with Magento for real-time inventory alerts.

Given the Smart Notification System is integrated with Magento, when stock levels for any product drop below the defined threshold, then the system should send immediate restock alerts to relevant stakeholders via email and in-app notifications.

Multi-platform feedback aggregation for analytics.

Given the integration with multiple e-commerce platforms, when feedback is collected from Shopify, WooCommerce, and Magento, then the analytics framework should compile and visualize this data in real-time, allowing users to view feedback trends across all platforms in a single dashboard.

Historical feedback data tracking over time.

Given the Smart Notification System is fully operational, when historical feedback data is collected for a product over the past three months, then users should be able to access and analyze this data to identify trends and patterns in customer sentiment.

User access control for feedback notifications.

Given the Smart Notification System has user roles defined, when feedback is generated, then only users with the appropriate permissions should receive notifications based on their assigned roles, ensuring sensitive data is protected and accessibility is managed.

Performance testing under high load conditions.

Given the Smart Notification System is deployed and integrated with e-commerce platforms, when subjected to 1000 simultaneous feedback submissions, then the system should successfully process and reflect all feedback without errors within 10 minutes.

Collaborative Feedback Forum

The Collaborative Feedback Forum creates a dedicated space for sales associates to discuss and exchange thoughts on customer interactions and product performance. This feature reinforces teamwork and collective intelligence within the sales team, synthesizing individual insights into actionable inventory strategies that align with customer demand.

Requirements

User Authentication

"As a sales associate, I want to securely log in to the Collaborative Feedback Forum so that I can share customer insights without my data being compromised."

Description

The User Authentication requirement ensures that all users accessing the Collaborative Feedback Forum have verified identities, enhancing security and privacy. This feature should enable users to register, login, and manage their accounts with options for password recovery and multi-factor authentication. By providing a secure access point, it protects user data and encourages open sharing of insights without fear of data breaches. The implementation should integrate seamlessly with existing user databases and authentication protocols, providing a secure yet user-friendly experience. Expected outcomes include increased user trust and participation in the forum, leading to richer insights and more effective inventory strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User Registration Process for the Collaborative Feedback Forum

Given that a user is on the registration page, when they fill in the required fields and submit the form, then they should receive a confirmation email and be directed to the login page after successful registration.

User Login for the Collaborative Feedback Forum

Given that a user has registered, when they input their credentials on the login page, then they should be granted access to the forum if their credentials are valid.

Password Recovery for Users in the Collaborative Feedback Forum

Given that a registered user has forgotten their password, when they initiate the password recovery process, then they should receive an email with a secure link to reset their password.

Multi-Factor Authentication Setup for User Accounts

Given that a user is logged in, when they navigate to their account settings and enable multi-factor authentication, then they should receive a verification code via their chosen method (SMS or email) for each subsequent login attempt.

User Account Management for the Collaborative Feedback Forum

Given that a user is logged in, when they access their account management settings, then they should be able to update their personal information and change their password successfully without losing their session.

Seamless Integration with Existing User Databases

Given that the authentication system is implemented, when a user attempts to log in, then their identity should be verified against the existing user database without any delays or errors.

User Feedback Submission in the Collaborative Feedback Forum

Given that a user is logged in and on the forum page, when they submit feedback on a product, then their feedback should be stored in the database and visible to other users in the forum thread.

Discussion Thread Creation

"As a sales associate, I want to create discussion threads in the forum so that I can focus on specific customer feedback topics and gather insights from my teammates."

Description

This requirement enables users to initiate discussion threads within the Collaborative Feedback Forum, facilitating focused conversations on specific topics related to customer interactions and product performance. Each thread should allow users to post messages, reply to others, and upload relevant documents or images, enhancing collaborative communication. The feature should support thread categorization for easier navigation and searching, making it simple for users to find discussions pertinent to their needs. This capability will enrich the forum by allowing diverse topics to be explored collaboratively, ultimately leading to actionable insights that can help optimize inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales associates initiate a new discussion thread to discuss recent customer feedback on a product, aiming to enhance team collaboration about inventory management.

Given that a sales associate has logged into the Collaborative Feedback Forum, When they click on 'Create New Thread', Then they should be able to enter a title, select a category, and add a message or upload files before submitting the thread.

A user searches for specific discussion threads related to a product that has received diverse feedback, aiming to consolidate insights for a product review meeting.

Given that a user is in the Collaborative Feedback Forum, When they use the search function with a keyword related to the product, Then they should see a list of relevant threads arranged by recency and relevance.

Sales associates receive notifications about new replies to threads they are following to stay updated on discussions and contribute their insights effectively.

Given that a user has subscribed to a discussion thread, When a new reply is posted, Then the user should receive a notification through email and in-app alerts to inform them of the new reply.

A sales associate uploads an image to a discussion thread to provide visual context regarding a customer's feedback on a product.

Given that a user is composing a message in a thread, When they choose to upload an image file that meets the specified size and format criteria, Then the image should be successfully uploaded and displayed within the thread.

A user categorizes a discussion thread to facilitate better organization of conversations about different product lines.

Given that a user has created a new discussion thread, When they select an appropriate category from the predefined list, Then the thread should display the selected category correctly on the thread overview page.

A sales associate replies to an existing discussion thread concerning a specific customer complaint to provide their insights and suggestions.

Given that a user is viewing a discussion thread, When they click on 'Reply' and submit their response, Then the reply should appear immediately under the original message in the thread, maintaining chronological order.

A user decides to edit their original message in a discussion thread to clarify their input after receiving feedback from another associate.

Given that a user has posted a message in a thread, When they select the option to edit their message, Then the user should be able to modify the content, and the updated message should reflect immediately in the thread without losing any previous replies.

Real-time Notifications

"As a sales associate, I want to receive real-time notifications about new messages in the forum so that I can promptly engage with my colleagues and contribute my insights."

Description

The Real-time Notifications requirement keeps users engaged by providing instant alerts for new messages, replies, or updates in the Collaborative Feedback Forum. This feature should include customizable notification settings, allowing users to choose what events they want to be alerted about and through which channels (e.g., email, in-app notifications). The implementation of this feature is critical for encouraging active participation as it ensures members are promptly informed of forum activity, fostering a faster exchange of ideas and timely responses to customer feedback. The expected outcome is a more vibrant discussion environment that enhances teamwork and collective intelligence.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales associates receive real-time notifications when a new message is posted in the Collaborative Feedback Forum, ensuring they can engage promptly with customer feedback discussions.

Given a sales associate is logged into InvenTrack, when a new message is posted in the Collaborative Feedback Forum, then the sales associate should receive an instant notification through their preferred channel (email or in-app).

Users want to customize their notification preferences for different types of forum activities, such as new messages, replies, or updates, to avoid notification overload.

Given a user accesses notification settings, when they select specific types of notifications (new messages, replies, updates) and save their preferences, then only those selected notifications should be received moving forward.

Sales associates want to receive notifications when someone replies to their specific discussion thread in the Collaborative Feedback Forum, ensuring they can follow up on customer inquiries effectively.

Given a sales associate has posted a message in a discussion thread, when someone replies to that thread, then the sales associate should receive an instant notification through their selected channel.

A user updates their notification settings and expects to see these changes take effect immediately without logout or delay.

Given a user updates their notification settings in the system, when they navigate back to the forum, then notifications should reflect the updated preferences without requiring the user to log out or refresh the page.

The system should ensure that no duplicate notifications are sent for the same message or reply to eliminate confusion and irritation among users.

Given a sales associate receives a notification, when viewing the same message or reply in the forum, then they should not receive additional notifications for the same item within a specified time period (e.g., 10 minutes).

Search Functionality

"As a sales associate, I want to use a search function in the forum so that I can easily find previous discussions related to customer feedback and product performance."

Description

The Search Functionality is vital for improving user experience in the Collaborative Feedback Forum by enabling users to quickly locate specific discussions, posts, or topics using keywords. This requirement should include advanced filtering options (e.g., by date, relevance, or author) to refine search results effectively. Implementing this functionality will enhance information retrieval, allowing users to access past contributions quickly and engage meaningfully in ongoing dialogues. The same technology that powers the search can also suggest relevant discussions based on user activity, thus promoting more active engagement with the forum's content.

Acceptance Criteria

User searches for a specific customer interaction in the Collaborative Feedback Forum.

Given the user is on the forum page, when they enter a keyword related to a past customer interaction in the search bar, then the search results should display relevant discussions that include that keyword, sorted by relevance.

Sales associates want to filter search results by date in the Collaborative Feedback Forum.

Given the user has entered a search term, when they select a date range filter, then the search results should only include discussions posted within that specified date range.

A sales associate needs to find discussions by a specific author in the Collaborative Feedback Forum.

Given the user is viewing the search results, when they select the option to filter by author and enter the author’s name, then the results should update to show only the discussions created by that author.

User engages in a discussion after finding it through the search functionality.

Given the user has found a relevant discussion through search, when they click on the discussion title, then they should be directed to the full discussion page with all previous comments visible.

User receives suggestions for relevant discussions based on their search activity.

Given the user has searched multiple times, when they perform a search, then the system should suggest at least three relevant discussions based on previous searches or interactions.

Sales associates want to clear their search results and start a new query.

Given the user has initiated a search, when they click on the 'Clear Search' button, then the search input and results should be reset, allowing for a new search.

User views search results on different devices to ensure functionality.

Given the user is using the search functionality on various devices, when they perform a search, then the results should be displayed correctly and formatted properly across all devices including mobile, tablet, and desktop.

User Feedback and Rating System

"As a sales associate, I want to rate and comment on posts in the forum so that I can help promote high-quality insights and engage more effectively with my colleagues."

Description

The User Feedback and Rating System allows participants in the Collaborative Feedback Forum to rate the quality and usefulness of posts or suggestions made by others. This feature should enable users to provide feedback through a simple star rating system and add comments on posts. By implementing this requirement, the forum not only encourages quality contributions but also helps identify valuable insights that can guide inventory management decisions. The feedback collected can be analyzed to adjust forum dynamics, ensuring that high-quality discussions are recognized and incentivizing better participation.

Acceptance Criteria

Users can successfully access the User Feedback and Rating System within the Collaborative Feedback Forum after logging into their accounts.

Given a logged-in user, when they navigate to the Collaborative Feedback Forum, then they should see the User Feedback and Rating System prominently displayed.

Users are able to rate posts using the star rating system, resulting in an updated average rating for that post.

Given a post in the forum, when a user clicks on the star rating system and selects a rating, then the post's average rating should update immediately to reflect the new rating.

Users can leave comments on posts within the User Feedback and Rating System to provide additional context or insights.

Given a post with the User Feedback and Rating System, when a user submits a comment, then the comment should appear under the post and be visible to all users.

The User Feedback and Rating System should limit users to one rating per post to ensure integrity and validity of feedback.

Given a user has rated a post, when they attempt to rate the same post again, then the system should alert the user that they have already rated the post and prevent another submission.

The system aggregates and displays user ratings and comments to highlight the most highly rated posts in the forum.

Given multiple posts with user ratings, when users access the forum, then the posts should be sorted by average rating, displaying the highest-rated posts at the top.

Users receive notifications for highly-rated posts or comments to encourage participation and engagement in the forum.

Given a user subscribes to notifications, when a post receives a rating of four stars or higher, then the user should receive a notification about the newly-rated post.

Integrated Analytics Dashboard

"As a sales manager, I want to view an analytics dashboard for the forum so that I can track engagement and leverage insights to improve inventory management."

Description

The Integrated Analytics Dashboard provides users with insights into forum activity, including metrics on participation rates, popular discussion topics, and user engagement levels. This requirement will involve designing a user-friendly dashboard that presents analytics in an easily digestible format. By integrating this feature, sales associates and management can track the effectiveness of discussions and identify trends in customer feedback. Understanding this data will enable smarter inventory decisions based on collective insights gathered from the forum, ultimately leading to enhanced inventory management strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays user metrics over the past month.

Given that the user has access to the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, when they select the past month timeframe, then the dashboard should display participation rates, popular discussion topics, and user engagement levels for that period, formatted in graphs and charts.

Users can filter discussion metrics by specific topics.

Given that a user is viewing the dashboard, when they apply a filter for a specific discussion topic, then the dashboard should update in real-time to show only the metrics related to that topic, including participation and engagement statistics.

Dashboard refreshes data automatically every hour.

Given that the user is logged into the analytics dashboard, when an hour has passed, then the dashboard should automatically refresh and display the latest analytics data without requiring a manual refresh from the user.

Dashboard allows user to export analytics data.

Given that a user is viewing analytics on the dashboard, when they select the export option, then the dashboard should allow users to download the displayed metrics in a CSV format for external analysis.

Users receive weekly summary emails of forum engagement data.

Given that a user has enabled email notifications, when the end of the week arrives, then the user should receive an email summarizing key metrics on forum activity, including participation rates and popular discussions.

Dashboard users can compare metrics across different periods.

Given that a user is on the Integrated Analytics Dashboard, when they select two different time periods for comparison, then the dashboard should display side-by-side metrics that allow for clear comparison of participation and engagement rates.

User access to the dashboard is restricted by role.

Given that the system has multiple user roles, when a user with restricted access logs into the dashboard, then they should only be able to view analytics relevant to their role and no other sensitive data is displayed.

Feedback Integration API

The Feedback Integration API connects the Customer Feedback Loop with other business systems, such as CRM and inventory management tools. This seamless integration allows for a holistic view of customer interactions, ensuring that feedback is utilized effectively in inventory planning, marketing strategies, and customer relationship management.

Requirements

Seamless API Authentication

"As a system administrator, I want a secure API authentication process so that I can ensure only authorized applications can access our customer feedback data, protecting sensitive information from potential breaches."

Description

The requirement encompasses the implementation of a secure authentication mechanism for the Feedback Integration API. This includes OAuth 2.0 support, ensuring that only authorized systems can access the API. The benefit of this requirement is to enhance security and protect sensitive customer feedback data from unauthorized access. By integrating this authentication method, InvenTrack can ensure a robust system that builds trust with users, allowing businesses to manage customer feedback confidently and securely within their inventory management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

API consumer application initiates a request to access the Feedback Integration API using OAuth 2.0.

Given the API consumer is registered and has received valid client credentials, when an authorization request is made using the OAuth 2.0 flow, then the system should return an access token.

An API request is made to access customer feedback data without a valid access token.

Given an unauthorized API consumer attempts to access the Feedback Integration API, when the request is issued without an access token, then the system should return a 401 Unauthorized error response.

A registered application requests a new access token using a refresh token.

Given a valid refresh token, when the request to refresh the access token is made, then the system should return a new access token along with a new refresh token, while retaining the previous refresh token's validity.

A user attempts to revoke their access token through the API.

Given a valid access token, when the revoke token request is sent, then the system should invalidate the access token and prevent any further access until a new token is issued.

The system logs API access attempts with the access token's user details.

Given a successful API call is made with an access token, when the request is logged, then the log should include user details, timestamp, and API endpoint accessed for audit purposes.

API documentation provides clear guidelines for implementing OAuth 2.0 authentication.

Given the API documentation is reviewed, when implementing the OAuth 2.0 authentication flow, then it should include clear instructions, example requests, and error handling mechanisms for API consumers.

A malicious user attempts to use an expired access token to access the API.

Given an expired access token is used in a request, when the API call is made, then the system should return a 403 Forbidden error response indicating that the token is no longer valid.

Real-Time Feedback Processing

"As a marketing manager, I want customer feedback to be processed in real-time so that I can quickly adjust our inventory levels and marketing strategies based on current customer sentiment, helping to improve customer satisfaction and sales."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a system that processes customer feedback in real-time as it is received. This involves creating an automated workflow that categorizes, analyzes, and displays feedback within the inventory management system for immediate visibility. The main benefit of real-time processing is that it allows businesses to respond quickly to customer insights, enhancing their ability to adjust inventory and marketing strategies rapidly based on actual consumer behavior. This integration enhances decision-making and fosters a proactive approach to inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Feedback Submission by Customers

Given a customer submits feedback through the provided form, when the feedback is entered into the system, then the feedback should be processed immediately and categorized into predefined categories within 2 seconds.

Automated Feedback Categorization and Analysis

Given customer feedback is received, when the feedback processing system receives the data, then it should automatically categorize the feedback into at least three categories: Positive, Negative, and Neutral, with an accuracy of 90% or higher.

Dashboard Visibility of Processed Feedback

Given feedback has been processed in real-time, when an inventory manager views the dashboard, then they should see the updated feedback results, including categorized feedback, within 5 seconds of submission.

Integration with Inventory Adjustment Mechanism

Given real-time feedback indicates a demand surge for a product, when the feedback categorization system identifies this surge, then the inventory management system should automatically suggest restocking the product within 10 seconds.

User Notification of Feedback Status

Given feedback has been processed and categorized, when a customer accesses their feedback submission status, then they should receive a notification confirming their feedback has been received and processed within 3 seconds.

Custom Feedback Reporting

"As an operations manager, I want to create custom feedback reports so that I can analyze trends and make informed inventory decisions based on specific customer feedback, ensuring we meet demand effectively."

Description

The requirement specifies the development of customizable reporting tools within the Feedback Integration API. This feature would allow users to generate tailored reports based on specific parameters such as time frames, product categories, or customer segments. The customization will enable businesses to glean actionable insights, making it easier to align inventory management efforts with customer preferences and historical trends. This enhances the overall analytical capability of InvenTrack, supporting data-driven decision-making in inventory and marketing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a monthly sales report filtered by product category to analyze inventory performance.

Given a user accesses the Custom Feedback Reporting tool, when they select 'monthly report' and 'product category' filters, then a tailored report is generated highlighting sales performance of each category within the selected month.

A user customizes a feedback report based on a specific time frame to assess customer sentiment and product popularity.

Given a user is in the Custom Feedback Reporting section, when they set the time frame to 'last quarter' and select 'customer sentiment' metrics, then a report is produced showing feedback trends for the specified time frame.

The user integrates the feedback report with the existing CRM to enhance customer relationship management efforts.

Given a user has generated a feedback report, when they select the option to export the report to their CRM system, then the data should be successfully imported without errors and reflect the same parameters as set in the report.

A user generates a report to analyze customer segments to adjust marketing strategies accordingly.

Given a user wants to generate a feedback report, when they specify 'customer segment' as a filter and run the report, then the output should detail feedback and preferences of each selected segment, allowing for strategic alignment.

A business analyst reviews customizable reporting options to ensure they meet diverse analytical needs.

Given a user is evaluating the Custom Feedback Reporting feature, when they explore the available customization options for reports, then they should find options for filtering by parameters such as time frame, product categories, and customer segments.

The user shares generated reports within the organization for collaborative analysis and decision-making.

Given a report has been generated by the user, when they select the 'share report' option, then the report should be shared via email or link, enabling team members to access it seamlessly while retaining its integrity.

Integration with CRM Systems

"As a customer service representative, I want customer feedback from InvenTrack to be integrated with our CRM so that I can provide personalized service and follow up with customers based on their feedback, ultimately improving customer loyalty."

Description

This requirement involves developing an integration layer that connects the Feedback Integration API with popular Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems. This capability will allow customer feedback collected through InvenTrack to be directly linked to customer profiles in the CRM, creating a comprehensive view of customer interactions. By having this integration, businesses can facilitate personalized follow-ups and targeted marketing campaigns, enhancing the overall customer relationship management and improving retention rates.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Feedback Loop Data into CRM Profiles

Given that the Feedback Integration API is connected to a CRM system, When a new customer feedback is submitted through InvenTrack, Then the customer's profile in the CRM should be updated with the latest feedback data within 5 minutes.

Testing Data Consistency Between InvenTrack and CRM

Given that a feedback entry is created in InvenTrack, When the data is fetched from the CRM, Then the feedback displayed in the CRM should match the entry in InvenTrack in terms of content and timestamp.

Automated Marketing Campaign Triggering Based on Feedback

Given that the Feedback Integration API updates customer feedback in the CRM, When feedback indicates a positive experience, Then a follow-up marketing email should be triggered automatically within 1 hour of the feedback submission.

Handling Negative Feedback in CRM

Given that negative feedback is submitted via InvenTrack, When this feedback is integrated into the CRM, Then the associated customer profile must be flagged for follow-up by the customer service team within 24 hours.

Monitoring API Response Times for Data Fetch

Given that the API is queried to retrieve customer feedback data, When the request is made, Then the API response time must not exceed 2 seconds for 95% of requests during peak usage.

Access Control for CRM Integration

Given that the integration is in place, When a user attempts to access feedback data in the CRM, Then the user must have appropriate permissions set in InvenTrack to view or manipulate the feedback data.

Error Logging and Notifications on Integration Failures

Given that the integration between Feedback Integration API and the CRM is live, When any error occurs during data transfer, Then an error log must be created, and a notification should be sent to the system administrator immediately.

Automated Feedback Alerts

"As a business owner, I want to receive automated alerts for significant changes in customer feedback so that I can address potential issues swiftly, maintaining high customer satisfaction and preventing larger problems."

Description

The requirement targets the development of an automated alert system that notifies relevant stakeholders when significant feedback trends or urgent issues arise. This feature would utilize machine learning algorithms to detect anomalies or spikes in feedback that require immediate attention, ensuring that businesses are proactive in their response strategies. The benefit lies in faster reaction times to customer concerns and improved overall service quality, as businesses can address issues before they escalate.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback trend detection for sudden spikes in customer complaints regarding product quality.

Given that product feedback is received, when a significant spike in negative feedback occurs (defined as more than a 30% increase in complaints within a 24-hour period), then an automated alert should be sent to the inventory management team outlining the details of the feedback and its potential impact on stock levels.

Automated notifications sent to stakeholders regarding urgent feedback on service response times.

Given that feedback on service response times is collected, when the average response time feedback drops below 1 star rating over a 7-day period, then an automated alert should be generated and sent to relevant stakeholders, including customer service management.

Integration of feedback trends into inventory restocking decisions.

Given that feedback data is integrated with inventory management, when feedback indicates a consistent demand increase for a specific product, then an automated alert should trigger a restocking suggestion to inventory managers based on predicted demand estimations.

Real-time alerts for positive feedback trends that may affect marketing strategies.

Given that positive feedback is received and analyzed, when there is a 50% increase in positive feedback ratings within a week, then an automated alert should notify the marketing team to consider promotions or highlighted advertisements for the associated products.

Detection of unusual patterns in feedback for product discontinuation considerations.

Given that product feedback is continuously monitored, when a product receives 3 consecutive weeks of negative feedback with a negative trend, then an alert should be sent to the product management team suggesting a review for potential discontinuation.

Automating stakeholder notifications for urgent issues flagged through customer feedback.

Given that a significant negative feedback trend is detected, when an urgent issue is identified (such as product defects), then all stakeholders (including inventory, marketing, and customer service teams) should receive an automated comprehensive summary report within 2 hours of detection.

User-Friendly Feedback Dashboard

"As a product manager, I want an easy-to-use feedback dashboard so that I can quickly understand customer feedback trends and make informed decisions regarding inventory adjustments, ensuring we meet market demands effectively."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing an intuitive, user-friendly dashboard that visualizes customer feedback data. This dashboard will feature various analytics tools and visual representations, making it easier for users to interpret feedback trends and patterns at a glance. The dashboard's design aims to enhance user engagement and facilitate quicker decision-making regarding inventory strategies by presenting data in a clear and accessible manner, thereby improving the overall user experience of InvenTrack.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the feedback dashboard for the first time after logging into InvenTrack and explores the visual representation of customer feedback data.

Given a user has logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the Feedback Dashboard, then they should see a visually intuitive layout with feedback trends represented in graphs and charts, and the data should load within 3 seconds.

User interacts with the feedback dashboard to filter data based on a specific time period to analyze trends.

Given a user is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they select a specific date range from the filter options, then the dashboard should update to display only the feedback data within that selected range and refresh within 2 seconds.

User needs to export customer feedback data from the dashboard for sharing with the marketing team.

Given a user is viewing the Feedback Dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then a downloadable file (CSV or Excel format) should be generated containing the current feedback data displayed on the dashboard within 5 seconds.

User wants to understand the categories of customer feedback at a glance on the dashboard.

Given a user is on the Feedback Dashboard, when they look at the summary section, then they should see clearly labeled categories of feedback (Positive, Neutral, Negative) with corresponding percentage values and visual indicators (e.g., color-coded pie charts).

User wants to receive alerts when feedback trends indicate a significant issue, such as increased negative feedback on a product.

Given a user has set up alerts in the Feedback Dashboard preferences, when the system detects a predefined threshold of negative feedback within a week, then the user should receive an alert notification via their chosen communication method (email, in-app notification).

User needs to customize which feedback metrics are displayed on the dashboard according to their business needs.

Given a user accesses the customization settings of the Feedback Dashboard, when they select or deselect specific feedback metrics (e.g., NPS score, customer comments), then the dashboard should reflect these changes immediately and accurately.

Actionable Insights Generator

The Actionable Insights Generator synthesizes feedback data into specific, implementable strategies for inventory adjustment and marketing campaigns. By providing tailored recommendations based on actual customer insights, this feature ensures that businesses can respond promptly to changing customer demands, enhancing satisfaction and sales alignment.

Requirements

Data Aggregation Capability

"As a retail manager, I want to automatically gather feedback data from different customer touchpoints so that I can understand customer preferences and make informed inventory and marketing decisions."

Description

The Data Aggregation Capability is essential for collecting and synthesizing customer feedback data from various sources, such as sales transactions and customer surveys. This requirement ensures all relevant input data is consolidated efficiently, allowing for a comprehensive analysis of customer sentiments and preferences. By automating the data collection process, businesses can save time and reduce errors associated with manual data entry, leading to more accurate insights. The aggregated data will be seamlessly integrated into the overall InvenTrack system, ensuring that the insights generated are based on real-time information, thereby enhancing decision-making processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Data aggregation for customer feedback is initiated upon a new sales transaction, allowing insights to reflect real-time customer sentiments immediately after purchase.

Given a new sales transaction is recorded, when the system aggregates customer feedback from surveys and sales data, then it should display the consolidated insights within 5 minutes.

An inventory manager is reviewing the monthly report that includes aggregated customer insights alongside sales data to determine adjustments needed for the upcoming month.

Given the monthly report is generated, when the report is accessed by the inventory manager, then it should include aggregated data from at least 80% of recent customer surveys and sales transactions.

A user initiates a customer survey to gather feedback on recently purchased products, which needs to be seamlessly integrated into the InvenTrack system for real-time updates.

Given a customer survey is completed, when the data is submitted, then it should be automatically aggregated by the system within one minute and reflected in the actionable insights dashboard.

A business owner is notified of trends from aggregated customer feedback indicating a demand surge for a specific product line, which should trigger alert mechanisms.

Given a trend is identified from the aggregated data, when the criteria for a demand surge are met, then the system should alert the business owner within 10 minutes of data aggregation.

A data collection process flows from multiple sales channels, requiring the system to collect and display customer sentiments without manual intervention.

Given data from multiple sales channels is available, when the aggregation process begins, then the system should consolidate this data without any manual entry required and verify data accuracy with 99% confidence.

An administrator is reviewing the data aggregation process to ensure it captures both qualitative and quantitative feedback effectively for enhanced insights.

Given the data aggregation process is operational, when reviewing the aggregation logs, then at least 90% of the feedback entries should be categorized correctly in the system based on type (qualitative or quantitative).

Insight Generation Algorithm

"As a business owner, I want the system to analyze customer feedback and suggest actionable marketing strategies so that I can enhance customer engagement and improve sales performance."

Description

The Insight Generation Algorithm is designed to analyze the aggregated feedback data and produce actionable recommendations for inventory adjustments and marketing strategies. This requirement focuses on creating sophisticated algorithms that can identify trends, correlations, and actionable insights based on historical and real-time data. By utilizing machine learning techniques, the algorithm will evolve and improve with more data input, allowing it to provide increasingly relevant suggestions. This will empower businesses to adapt their operations swiftly in response to changing customer demands, ultimately driving customer satisfaction and sales performance.

Acceptance Criteria

As a retail manager, I want to utilize the Insight Generation Algorithm after a seasonal sale to analyze customer feedback and suggest inventory adjustments that align with emerging trends and avoid future overstocking.

Given that the manager inputs customer feedback data from the recent sale, When the Insight Generation Algorithm processes this data, Then the system should generate actionable recommendations indicating which products to increase or decrease based on identified trends.

As a marketing coordinator, I need to access the insights generated by the algorithm to develop targeted marketing campaigns that reflect customer demand and preferences.

Given that insights are generated from the algorithm, When I retrieve the generated insights for the last quarter, Then the system should present a list of at least five specific marketing strategies based on customer behavior data and inventory levels.

As a business owner, I want to evaluate the effectiveness of the Insight Generation Algorithm over several months to ensure it improves with more data and provides increasingly relevant recommendations.

Given that the algorithm has been running for six months, When I compare the recommendations given by the algorithm at the start and end of this period, Then there should be a measurable improvement in the relevance and accuracy of suggested inventory adjustments and marketing strategies, validated by sales performance data.

As an inventory manager, I need the algorithm to identify correlations between inventory levels and customer purchasing trends, so I can anticipate stock needs more effectively in real-time.

Given that real-time sales data is integrated with feedback data, When the algorithm performs its analysis, Then it should generate insights that highlight at least three products with notable correlations between increased sales and current inventory levels within the last month.

As a product owner, I want to ensure the Actionable Insights Generator is user-friendly so that my team can easily interpret and implement the suggested changes without technical support.

Given that a user receives insights from the algorithm, When they review the interface, Then they should be able to understand the insights clearly and find instructions for implementation within two clicks in the system.

As a data analyst, I need to validate the accuracy of the trends identified by the algorithm against historical sales data to verify the recommendations' reliability.

Given that the algorithm has generated recommendations based on recent data, When I compare these recommendations with the actual sales performance of the same products over the last year, Then at least 80% of the recommendations should align with actual positive sales trends.

Real-time Notification System

"As a store owner, I want to receive immediate notifications about new insights and recommendations so that I can act quickly to optimize my inventory and marketing strategies."

Description

The Real-time Notification System is a critical feature for alerting users to newly generated insights and recommendations. This requirement ensures that users receive timely notifications when actionable insights are available, facilitating quicker responses to market changes. The notification system will be integrated into the InvenTrack platform, allowing users to customize their preferences for alert types and delivery methods (e.g., email, app notifications). This will enhance user engagement and ensure that businesses can act promptly on insights, align their inventory and marketing efforts with customer behavior, and improve overall productivity.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification via email or app when new actionable insights are generated in the system.

Given the user has opted to receive notifications, when actionable insights are generated, then the user should receive a notification through their selected delivery method.

User customizes notification preferences for different types of insights.

Given the user is in the notification preferences settings, when they select different types of insights to be notified about, then the preferences should be saved and user receives notifications based on their selected types.

User is alerted to actionable insights via multiple platforms (email, app notifications) simultaneously.

Given the user has enabled notifications for both email and app alerts, when actionable insights are generated, then the user should receive notifications on both platforms at the same time.

User can preview actionable insights directly from the notification without needing to access the app.

Given the user receives a notification about new actionable insights, when they click on the notification, then a preview of the insights should be displayed without having to log into the app.

System logs and maintains a history of all notifications sent to the user for further review.

Given that notifications are generated and sent to users, when a user accesses their notification history, then they should be able to see a complete log of past notifications with detailed timestamps.

User can set time intervals for receiving summary notifications for actionable insights.

Given the user is in the notification settings, when they set their preferred time intervals, then the system should send summary notifications at those specified intervals, summarizing any new insights generated in that time frame.

User Interface Customization Options

"As a user of InvenTrack, I want to customize my dashboard to highlight the insights that matter most to my business so that I can focus on the most impactful strategies."

Description

The User Interface Customization Options will allow users to personalize how they view and interact with the actionable insights generated by the system. This requirement focuses on providing various settings for users to choose from, such as dashboard layouts, color schemes, and displayed metrics. By enabling users to tailor their experience, it will enhance usability and ensure that they can prioritize the insights most relevant to their specific business needs. A customizable interface is vital to improve user satisfaction and engagement with the feature, promoting effective use of the insights provided by the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects the option to customize their dashboard layout to prioritize key metrics related to inventory management.

Given that the user has accessed the customization options for the dashboard, when they choose their desired layout and save the changes, then the dashboard should reflect the new layout upon the next login.

User applies a new color scheme to their interface to match their branding.

Given that the user selects a color scheme from the customization options, when they apply the chosen scheme and refresh the page, then the interface should display the new color scheme accurately across all components.

User decides to hide certain metrics that are not relevant to their business needs from the insights dashboard.

Given that the user is in the customization settings, when they uncheck the box for specific metrics, then those metrics should no longer appear on the dashboard after saving the changes.

User wants to ensure that their customized settings are saved and accessible across devices.

Given that the user has customized their settings, when they log in from a different device, then their previously saved customization options should automatically load without requiring further adjustments.

User updates their metrics display preferences for real-time inventory tracking and saves the changes.

Given that the user has modified their metrics display settings, when they click the save button, then the application should confirm the save action and reflect the updated metrics on the dashboard.

User seeks to reset their interface customization to default settings.

Given that the user wants to revert to default settings, when they select the reset option in the customization settings, then all customizations should revert back to the default configuration after confirmation.

User interacts with the customization options for mobile view of actionable insights.

Given that the user is on a mobile device and navigates to the customization options, when they adjust the interface for mobile view and save, then the changes should be accurately displayed the next time the mobile app is accessed.

Integration with E-commerce Platforms

"As an e-commerce manager, I want to automatically apply insights from InvenTrack to my online store so that I can optimize my inventory and marketing efforts without manual intervention."

Description

The Integration with E-commerce Platforms is a necessary requirement to ensure that the actionable insights generated from customer feedback can be directly applied to inventory and marketing strategies on external platforms. This feature will support seamless data exchange between InvenTrack and major e-commerce platforms like Shopify, WooCommerce, and others. By enabling automatic adjustments based on insights from the Actionable Insights Generator, businesses can streamline their operations and maintain optimal stock levels, which is crucial for maximizing sales opportunities and enhancing customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

E-commerce Order Adjustment Scenario

Given that an inventory level falls below the defined threshold, when a customer places an order on an integrated e-commerce platform, then the system should automatically adjust the inventory in InvenTrack to reflect the sale and notify the user of the new stock level.

Real-time Data Sync Scenario

Given that the Actionable Insights Generator provides new recommendations based on customer feedback, when changes are made in InvenTrack, then these changes should be instantly reflected in the connected e-commerce platform without delay.

Automated Restocking Alert Scenario

Given that the inventory level hit a predetermined low, when the automated restocking alert is triggered, then the system should send a notification to the business owner through their preferred communication channel.

Sales Insights Integration Scenario

Given that sales data is available from the e-commerce platform, when the user accesses the Actionable Insights Generator, then it should display recommendations based on both sales trends and customer feedback for inventory adjustments.

Platform Compatibility Validation Scenario

Given that InvenTrack integrates with major e-commerce platforms, when testing the integration functionality with Shopify and WooCommerce, then it should successfully exchange data in both directions without any data loss or errors.

Real-Time Customer Surveys

Real-Time Customer Surveys allow sales associates to easily solicit customer opinions on products immediately after purchase or interaction. This feature captures spontaneous feedback, enriching the overall understanding of customer preferences, and making it easier to adapt inventory strategies in response to direct customer input.

Requirements

Feedback Collection Interface

"As a sales associate, I want to collect customer feedback immediately after a purchase so that I can understand their preferences and adjust our inventory strategy accordingly."

Description

The Feedback Collection Interface provides a user-friendly mechanism for sales associates to initiate real-time customer surveys immediately after the purchase or interaction. This requirement must facilitate easy access and usability, enabling associates to prompt surveys via mobile devices or tablets. The interface should include customizable questions, allowing for tailored feedback collection while ensuring data integrity and a seamless user experience. Integrating this feature with existing POS systems is essential to ensure that the surveys are initiated automatically or with minimal input, thus capturing spontaneous feedback efficiently. The data collected should be stored in a centralized database for further analysis and reporting, contributing to informed decision-making regarding inventory management based on customer preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Sales associate initiates a customer survey immediately after a purchase at the point of sale.

Given the sales associate is at the POS after completing a transaction, when they tap the 'Initiate Survey' button on the Feedback Collection Interface, then the survey prompt should display on the customer's mobile device or tablet within 5 seconds.

Sales associate customizes survey questions for a specific product category based on recent customer feedback.

Given that the sales associate is in the Feedback Collection Interface, when they select the 'Customize Questions' option for product category 'A', then they should be able to edit at least 3 survey questions and save them successfully without errors.

System automatically triggers a survey after a customer interacts with the store staff for assistance.

Given a customer has completed an interaction with a staff member, when the interaction is marked as complete in the POS system, then the survey should automatically initiate within 2 minutes without requiring further input from the associate.

Collected feedback is stored in the centralized database for analysis.

Given that a survey has been completed by a customer, when the feedback is submitted, then it should be stored in the centralized database and be accessible for reporting within 10 seconds of submission.

Sales associate receives feedback analytics from completed surveys to inform inventory decisions.

Given that at least 5 surveys have been completed for a specific product, when the sales associate accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should see a summary report with at least 3 actionable insights based on the feedback collected.

Sales associate checks if the feedback collection interface is accessible on mobile devices.

Given that the feedback collection interface is designed for mobile use, when the sales associate accesses the interface on various mobile devices, then it should be responsive and fully functional across different device screen sizes and operating systems.

Survey Analytics Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to access an analytics dashboard that displays customer feedback trends so that I can make informed decisions about inventory management based on customer preferences."

Description

The Survey Analytics Dashboard provides a centralized location for viewing and analyzing the results of customer feedback collected through real-time surveys. This requirement includes the implementation of various data visualization tools, charts, and graphs to interpret customer sentiment analysis, satisfaction levels, and trend identification over time. The dashboard should present the survey results in an easily digestible format, allowing business owners and managers to quickly gauge customer opinions and detect patterns that inform inventory decisions. Integration with other analytics already present in InvenTrack will enhance insights and facilitate comparisons with sales data, fostering a deeper understanding of inventory requirements and customer demand.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the Survey Analytics Dashboard from the InvenTrack main interface.

Given that the user is logged into InvenTrack, when they navigate to the 'Survey Analytics Dashboard' section, then they should see an overview of customer feedback results displayed in various charts and graphs.

Interpreting customer sentiment analysis from real-time survey data.

Given that survey responses have been collected, when the user selects the 'Sentiment Analysis' option on the dashboard, then they should see a clear visual representation of customer sentiment, categorized into positive, neutral, and negative responses.

Identifying trends in customer satisfaction over a specified period.

Given that the user is viewing the Survey Analytics Dashboard, when they apply date filters for the past month, then they should see a trend line graph showing customer satisfaction levels over that time period.

Integrating survey results with sales data for deeper insights.

Given that the user has survey results and sales data available, when they view the integrated report on the dashboard, then they should be able to compare survey feedback with corresponding sales figures side by side.

Exporting survey data for external analysis.

Given that the user is viewing the Survey Analytics Dashboard, when they click the 'Export' button, then they should be able to download survey results in a CSV file format for external analysis.

Receiving automated alerts for significant changes in customer sentiment.

Given that the user has set up notification preferences, when there is a significant drop in customer sentiment as defined by a preset threshold, then the user should receive an automatic alert via email or through the InvenTrack application.

Customizing the dashboard layout to user preferences.

Given that the user is on the Survey Analytics Dashboard, when they drag and drop the widgets to rearrange the layout, then the dashboard should save the new layout for their next visit.

Automated Survey Trigger

"As a marketing manager, I want surveys to be automatically sent to customers after specific interactions so that we can gather consistent feedback without relying on sales associates to initiate the process."

Description

The Automated Survey Trigger requirement establishes a mechanism to automatically prompt customer surveys following specific events, such as purchase completion, product return, or customer service interaction. This feature is crucial for eliminating the need for human intervention and ensuring consistent feedback solicitation at critical touchpoints. The automation should allow for predefined survey templates to be sent via email or SMS, enhancing the capture of spontaneous feedback. This requirement also includes ensuring GDPR compliance for data collection and management, thus safeguarding customer information while enhancing response rates and improving data quality for analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

After a customer successfully completes a purchase on the e-commerce platform, an automated survey prompt is triggered via SMS or email.

Given a successful purchase, when the transaction is confirmed, then the customer receives a survey prompt within 5 minutes via their preferred communication channel (SMS or email).

If a customer returns a product, they should automatically receive a survey asking about their experience with the return process.

Given a product return process initiated by the customer, when the return is confirmed, then the customer receives a survey regarding the return experience within 10 minutes.

Following a customer service interaction, an automated survey should be sent to gather feedback on the support experience.

Given a completed customer service interaction, when the case is closed, then the customer receives an automated survey to rate their support experience within 15 minutes.

Survey triggers must comply with GDPR requirements regarding customer data handling and privacy.

Given the survey trigger mechanism, when a survey is sent, then the customer’s data is handled according to GDPR regulations ensuring consent is gathered and data is securely stored.

Predefined survey templates must be available for different event triggers in the system.

Given the requirement for automated surveys, when a new template is created, then it must be accessible for selection when configuring survey triggers for specific events such as purchases or returns.

Tracking metrics for survey response rates post automation must be implemented to evaluate effectiveness.

Given the automated survey triggers, when surveys are sent, then a report of response rates should be generated showing at least a 20% response rate within 48 hours after survey prompt is triggered.

Product Details

Vision & Mission

Problem & Solution

Details & Audience

User Personas

Inventory Innovator

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

E-commerce Visionary

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Supply Chain Strategist

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Financial Guardian

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Logistics Optimizer

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Product Features

Intelligent Prediction Engine

Requirements

Historical Data Analysis

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Seasonal Trend Integration

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Market Condition Analysis

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Restocking Alerts

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User-Friendly Dashboard for Predictions

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Dynamic Reorder Alerts

Requirements

Dynamic Threshold Setting

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-Channel Notification System

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Analysis for Threshold Optimization

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Integrate Supplier Reorder Linkages

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User Feedback Loop for Alert Effectiveness

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Purchase Order Generation

Requirements

Dynamic Reorder Suggestions

Description